Portfolio

I earned my BBA from The University of Texas at Tyler. My graduate study has been at University of Central Florida.

Doctor of Philosophy in Education

I started the Ph.D. in the Instructional Technology department of the College of Education at University of Central Florida in 2005. The focus of the program is the application of appropriate instructional technologies to the adult learner and validation of the Digital Propensity Index by Kelsey Henderson.

Instructional Technology as an interdisciplinary field that focuses on the systematic design of training and educational environments. Instructional Technology is not about computers; rather, the analysis, design, development, implementation, evaluation and management of high-quality instruction.

An important part of assignments and portfolio assessment is reflection. After all, if I just posted my old assignments to the internet without any narrative, the assignments might not make a lot of sense. Reflection is part of the College of Education Conceptual Framework. At first, I thought the framework was just a bunch of administrative BS for staying accredited, but having reflection in the core shows me maybe it's got some validity.

Advanced Instructional System Design

Course description: Analysis of fundamental concepts of theoretical and procedural instructional systems design models with an emphasis on their cognitive origins, pedagogical bases, current and future values. Become versed in alternative instructional design theories and models. Examine alternative design models, analysis techniques, and instructional theories.

AttachmentSize
EME7634a_syllabus_sp06.pdf119.55 KB
EME7634_Fauser,Henry,Norman_Alternative_ID_models.pdf91.63 KB

Instructional strategy considerations

What are the most important considerations when choosing a particular instructional strategy?

  1. learning objectives - For example, if my learning objectives focus on learning a procedure, I would not choose Problem-solving instructional strategy. If learning objectives state learners are to learn skill to make something, I'm going to use something like Shank's Learning by Doing theory. As part of this, learning objectives need to be able to be categorized in a learning taxonomy like from Tripartite (Hilgard 1980), Gagne (1985), Bloom (1956), Anderson (1981), Merrill (1983), Reigeluth & Moore (1999), etc.
  2. Is it important for students to drive the speed of the course, are experience necessary for the experience, are teacher-directed methods appropriate?

  3. desired/prescribed learning environment - setting, use of simulation, importance of hands on experience, configurations
  4. available resources - time, personnel; if there is limited time, consider applying teacher-directed strategies
  5. learners/target audience - do learner characteristics really change the instructional strategy? 2c argues no. It might affect the delivery mode, though. Checklists are most appropriate for procedures with one answer. Higher order thinking with multiple correct answers are best to use with assessment rubrics. Novice versus expert - novices might need a more structured learning strategy where they have lots of scaffolding and have it slowly taken away.

Types of tests

Entry test - prerequisites Pretest - adapt instruction based on results Practice tests Final test

  • normative referenced
    • ISD doesn't do this because it doesn't measure skills; psychometrics
  • critereon referenced
    • conventional - m/c, t/f; good for assessing verbal outcomes, some concepts and principles
    • performance/product checklist - procedural learning; one way to do something, one way of learning
    • rubrics - multiple ways of doing something

Comparison of Alternative Instructional Design Models

by: Marlene Fauser, Kirk Henry, and David Kent Norman on February 4, 2006

An Instructional Design model gives structure and meaning to a problem, enabling the would-be designer to negotiate the design task using a process or systematic method. Models help us to visualize the problem, to break it down into discrete, manageable units. The true value of a model can only be determined within the context of use. A model should be judged by how it mediates the designer's intention, how well it can share a work load, and how effectively it shifts focus away from itself toward the object of the design activity (Ryder, 2006).

The purpose of this paper is to analyze three instructional design models, one from each of the classifications classroom, product, and system. The analysis should compare and contrast the key concepts associated with each model. Additionally this paper will identify and describe arguments against the use of ISD models in general.

Instructional Design models are classified into three types, classroom, product and system (Gustafson & Branch, 2002). Classroom models are of interest to, and are usually designed for, professional teachers from K-12, community colleges, vocational schools, and other related areas. These models take into consideration the environment of teachers. Their users may view them as a guide rather than a methodology. These models focus on the use of existing materials rather than the design of new. The output of these models is small, a unit or module of instruction used within the school year. The models also have less rigorous formative evaluation and revision than product or system models.

Product-Oriented models, prescriptive in nature, are primarily focused on creating instructional products. These instructional products may be self-study, self-paced computer based training, or other materials that can be used by a student with reduced guidance. The methodology of these models may cause them to be confused with system models, but product models are not used to create comprehensive systems as system models are. Product development models demonstrate four assumptions: the instructional product is needed, something needs to be produced rather than using or modifying existing materials, there will be considerable emphasis on tryout and revision, and the product must be usable by learners with only facilitators but not teachers. These models are drawn upon as computer-based instruction has become more often the instructional delivery method of choice (Gustafson & Branch, 2002).

Systems-oriented models are used to develop large amounts of instruction. This can be courses or curricula and may include the development of new materials or the repurposing of existing materials. Systems models align with the ADDIE methodology, emphasizing front-end analysis and design phases. Gustafson and Branch observed emphasis on front-end analysis may result in a proposal for a non-training solution (2002). Systems models, unlike product development models, typically assume a large scope of effort.

Classroom Oriented Model - Gerlach and Ely

The Gerlach and Ely Model is a prescriptive model that is well suited to K-12 and higher education. It is meant for novice instructional designers who have knowledge and expertise in a specific context (Braxton, Bronico, & Looms, 1995). Although drawn as a linear model, many of the steps are intended to occur simultaneously. The Gerlach and Ely Model recognizes most curriculum will be designed around the concepts to be taught in each subject matter and teachers, who are forced to adapt existing materials for use in their courses (Braxton, et al., 1995).

The first step in the Gerlach and Ely process is to simultaneously specify the content and objectives. With this model intended for K-12 teachers, these combined steps recognize that teachers know the content or think of content first, then define the objectives for that content. The objectives do need to be defined, however, for use in the next steps of the model.

The second step is to specify the entry point of learners, which for K-12 teachers may simply mean reviewing existing records. The third step is to perform five activities simultaneously: (1) determine strategy, (2) organize groups, (3) allocate time, (4) allocate space, and (5) select resources. The key is to determine which combinations will best allow the students to meet their objectives. The Gerlach and Ely model emphasizes using existing instructional materials rather than develop new materials.

After these simultaneous decisions are made, the next step is evaluation of performance. The teacher should determine what observable or measurable changes occurred in the students and if the observations can be attributed to the instruction. The model concludes with a feedback loop to determine the effectiveness of the instructions so changes can be made as necessary.

Product Oriented Model - Bates

In 1995, Tony Bates presented a model for developing open and distance learning. Bates realized digital communications were going to be used more frequently for distance education. Early in his research, he acknowledged the fact that there are inherent limitations of distance education. Bates created a framework for selecting learning technologies which is still relevant today. The organizing framework that Bates proposed is called ACTIONS, which stands for access, cost, teaching and learning implications, interaction, organizational issues, novelty and speed.

Bates's model has what he calls a front-end system design. A front-end system design has four phases: course outline development, selection of media, development/production of materials, and course delivery. Within each phase, Bates has properly identified the team roles and the actions or issues to be addressed. Bates readily admits he borrows heavily from the ADDIE model from which he derives many of his ideas. One of the reasons Bates may have felt compelled to create an additional model to ADDIE is because ADDIE has been widely and often criticized for being too systematic. ADDIE is often said to be too linear, too constraining, and even too time-consuming to implement with regards to e-learning. While Bates may have been making an attempt to simplify ADDIE, he cautions course design may take as much as two years.

One of his main concerns, prompting the development of ACTIONS, was the way face to face course material was adapted for web or other distance learning approaches. Bates feels the traditional remote instructor concept is nothing more than face-to-face instruction without direct interaction. Bates also states these specific scenarios often fail to take advantage of the unique benefits that are available through the specific technology being used.

Additionally, in his 1995 book, Technology: Open Learning and Distance Education, Bates details cost analysis when designing distance or e-learning solutions. If his design and evaluation methods are followed, one would easily be able to determine the effect each dollar spent on this e-learning solution has had on a given student. This can be particularly useful when dealing with fiscal management issues.

The Bates Model provides the user with a plethora of tools and ideas, each of which will be useful for designing e-learning environments. The model is broken down into four distinct groups. Each group is replete with projects and assignments.

System Oriented Model - Gentry IPDM

Castelle Gentry explains his model of Instructional Development in the course of a textbook. Gentry named his model the Instructional Project Development and Management (IPDM) Model. The IPDM model was born as a result of five conclusions Gentry made with regards to instructional design. The first conclusion admonishes introductory instructional design textbooks for not adequately linking relationships between instructional design processes and their supporting processes (Gentry, 1994, p. ix). The second of Gentry's conclusions says introductory instructional design textbooks should teach both what and how to "do", in other words "practical means for accomplishing specific tasks" (Gentry, 1994, p. ix). The third through fifth conclusions set a basis for Gentry to develop a generic Instructional Design model as a survey of instructional design processes, supporting processes, and techniques.

The result IPDM Model is has eight development components, defined by Gentry (1994) in a non-linear diagram.

  1. Needs analysis - establish the validity of needs and goals for existing or proposed instruction
  2. Adoption - establish acceptance of an innovation by those affected and obtain a commitment of resources.
  3. Instructional Design - determine and specify objectives, strategies, techniques, and media for meeting instructional goals.
  4. Production - construct elements of a project, as specified in a design and revision data.
  5. Prototyping - assemble, pilot test, respecify, validate, and finalize an instructional unit.
  6. Product Installation – establish the necessary conditions for effective operation of a new instructional product or process.
  7. Ongoing Operation – maintain the continuing application of an instructional product and/or procedure.
  8. Ongoing Instructional Unit Evaluation – collect and analyze data about an ongoing instructional unit to make decisions about future revision.

The development components have five supporting components, defined by Gentry (1994, p. 5):

  1. Project Management – control, coordinate, and allocate resources.
  2. Information Handling – select, collect, organize, store, retrieve, distribute, and assess information required by an ID project.
  3. Resource Acquisition and Allocation – determine resource needs, formalize budgets, and manage resources.
  4. ID Project Personnel – determine needs for staffing, training, assessment, motivation, counseling, censuring, and dismissing ID project members.
  5. Facilities – organize and renovate spaces for design, implementation, and testing of elements of instruction.

The development and supporting components are linked by information sharing between the two clusters for the duration of the project. Gentry designed his model to show instructional design is not a linear process.

Model Comparison and Contrast

When doing the comparison between Bates, Gentry and Gerlach/Ely's models, it was noted that all three models allowed for some variation in implementation; it would not be incorrect to modify the order of the steps depending on the settings of the instructional situation. This is especially true for the Gerlach/Ely model. The three models we have chosen to review all were published between 1994 and 1995.

The Bates and Gentry models both rely heavily on front end work. This means that the model assumes that step one will involve an extensive needs analysis. The information learned from the analysis will be crucial in the next phases of the design. In particular, the Gentry IPDM model is best for large scale projects, as demonstrated by the communication core of the model. Both Bates and Gentry also provide a framework for helping the designers determine the overall cost of the solution. This may include the cost of the technology needed for implementation. Bates and Gentry are also very good at providing personnel assignments for each phase of the design. This allows the designer to determine, up front, the type of personnel that will be needed throughout the design and implementation.

The main strength of the Gerlach/Ely model is practicing classroom teachers can identify with the process it suggests. The Gerlach/Ely model allows for a novice instructional designer whereas Gentry and Bates need some design expertise to perform front-end analysis. As a result, classroom teachers might be more likely to apply Gerlach/Ely. The Gerlach/Ely model differs from the other two by emphasizing existing content as the basis for new instruction. Basing new instruction on old content by forgoing front-end analysis may unintentionally reinforce traditional learning teaching patterns rather than promoting a re-examination of best practices in classrooms.

Instructional Designers cannot be effective if they are familiar with only one model.  The designer must be able to fit the design to the situation and familiarity with various models will make that designer more successful.  Analyzing various models demonstrates that although the models had differences, combined steps in various ways, or used different vocabulary, they shared a fundamental principle of attempting to deliver effective learning or educational tools.

Arguments Against Instructional Design

In an article published in Training Magazine in April 2000, Jack Gordon and Ron Zemke lay out arguments against the use of ISD models. The article was the catalyst for a plethora of rebuttal articles, white papers, and seminars on why ISD is not dead and is still useful and relevant to the field (Clark, 2004). The arguments in the original article were:

  • ISD is too slow and clumsy to meet today's training challenges
  • There's no "there" there
  • Used as directed, it produces bad solutions
  • It clings to the wrong world view

Rebuttals concentrated on the question: Is it ISD that's flawed, or the manner in which it is applied that is the problem (Zemke & Rossett, 2002)? To address the argument of ISD being slow and clumsy, Sivasailam "Thiagi" Thiagarajan conducts workshops in "Rapid Instructional Design" which includes strategies and design elements to move more quickly through the ADDIE phases and to use partial processes where appropriate (Thiagi, 1999).

Argument two discusses the use of ISD as a "technology" of instruction. Project management for Information Technology (IT) projects is seen as a science. Yet IT project management is an art as is Instructional Design. IT project management has addressed similar flaws in waterfall or linear project management processes. Additional project life cycles have been introduced in this discipline. These models, selected based on project and environmental factors, include: incremental or prototype based methodology, Barry Boehm's Spiral Model, and the Rush to Base Evolutionary Model (BU, 2005). Options such as these applied to ISD would allow for the flexibility and rapidness desired for delivery of an instructional solution.

The third argument is that following ISD models will produce bad training. Clark (2004) discusses how the "A" of ADDIE was never meant to stand for Performance Analysis and that Instructional Design should only begin once it is determined training is the solution to the problem.

Charge 4 assumes ISD jobs have a set of best practice procedures that must be taught to students who are not master performers. Saul Carliner suggests we should remember ISD is a value system that must be applied appropriately and all ISD needs is re-tooling for all the new ways of learning we see since ISD was first proposed more than 50 years ago.

References

Boston University Corporate Education Center. (2005). Courseware MDP405: Managing Information Technology v4.0.

Braxton, S., Bronico, K., & Looms, T. (1995). Instructional design methodologies and techniques. Retrieved January 30, 2006, from University of Michigan, Educational Software Design and Authoring Web site: http://www.umich.edu/~ed626/Gerlach_Ely/ge_main.htm

Carliner, S. (2003). An instructional design framework for the twenty-first century. Unpublished manuscript, Concordia University. Retrieved January 30, 2006, from http://education.concordia.ca/~scarliner/idmodel.pdf

Clark, D. (2004, June 7). The Attack on ISD – 2000. Retrieved January 30, 2006, from http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/history_isd/attack.html

Clark, D. (2004, June 13). A hard look at ISD - 2002. Retrieved January 30, 2006, from http://www.nwlink.com/~donclark/history_isd/look.html

Gentry, C.G. (1994). Introduction to instructional development: Process and technique. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Gordon, J. & Zemke, R. (2000, April). The attack on ISD: Have we got Instructional Design all wrong?. Training Magazine.

Gustafson, K.L., & Branch, R.M. (1997). Survey of instructional development models: Fourth edition. Syracuse, NY: ERIC Clearing house of Information & Technology

Ryder, M. (2006). Instructional Design models. Retrieved January 29, 2006, from University of Colorado at Denver, School of Education Web site: http://carbon.cudenver.edu/~mryder/itc_data/idmodels.html#comparative

Thiagarajan, S. (1999). Rapid Instructional Design. Retrieved January 29, 2006, from http://www.thiagi.com/article-rid.html

Zemke, R. & Rossett, A. (2002, February 1). A hard look at ISD. Training Magazine

Analysis Techniques Portfolio

by: Marlene Fauser, Kirk Henry, and David Kent Norman on February 18, 2006

Task Analysis involves the systematic process of identifying specific tasks to be trained and a detailed analysis of each of those tasks (Ehrlich, 2000). To be able to design learning supported instruction, designers must understand the tasks the learners will be performing (Jonassen, Tessmer, & Hannum, 1999).

The purpose of this paper is to apply three analysis techniques from separate categories of methods as described by Jonassen, et al. to one instructional goal. This paper describes the key concepts, application, and experiences with a technique each from the Job, Procedural, and Skill Analysis Method, Instructional and Guided Learning Analysis Method, and Subject Mater/Content Analysis Method. A sample of each analysis technique is provided in the Appendices.

The Job, Procedural, and Skill Analysis Method emerged during WWII when most training being developed was technical training which emphasized procedural skill development. These methods describe in a procedural manner the way jobs are performed. Analyzing steps has become the most common conception of task analysis and there are many methods and approaches published. Alternatively, Instructional and Guided Learning Analysis Method describe tasks how they are best learned. This may or may not be consistent with the ways the job is performed. Subject Matter/Content Analysis Methods consider that designers elicit instructional information from SMEs. This information will usually come to the designer in an outline form, chunked by the subject matter expert. This organizational method can be effective, but is not always the best way to represent the instructional content. Subject Matter/Content Analysis Methods offer alternate methods for representing content structure.

Job, Procedural, and Skill Analysis Method – Job Task Analysis

The task analysis approach emerged from the field of systems analysis when systems analysis was applied to the world of work (Jonassen, et al., 1999). The purpose of creating task descriptions is to enhance the performance of the overall system or to enhance job or task performance.

In order to conduct a job analysis, you must describe and analyze each task. The description should include the stimulus situation and the proper response. One would typically start at a general level and then get more specific (Miller, 1962 as cited in Jonassen, et al., 1999). Jonassen, et al. would argue that there are several advantages to creating task descriptions:

  • It is very job oriented
  • It provides data to support training, personnel selection, and job design
  • It describes tasks in sufficient detail to prevent misunderstanding
  • It identifies the competencies that underlie job tasks

We must also consider the disadvantages of task descriptions as well. First, the process is generally limited to specific descriptive aspects of tasks. Secondly, the skill level of the task analyst must be high. Individuals with this level of skill may be difficult to find. Additionally, it has been found that the task description procedure as a whole does not help select specific tasks for training.

All of this information was considered when creating the analysis for the task of distance collaboration. The outline in Appendix A contains detailed information that follows the methods suggested by Jonassen, et al. (1999). There is additional information in Appendix B that further develops each solution and what it should be used for.

When going through this assignment, it was difficult for me to understand the level to which the analysis should be reported. I was torn between describing each button push and mouse click. For our chosen area, there are several categories where different applications could be used. I felt that it would be difficult to describe each button push for each individual software package as they did in the book for pre-flight checks.

I did notice, however, that putting this information on paper, provided me, an experienced technologist, with clear concise information which can and will be used to help others decide on platforms as well as conduct smooth, effortless collaboration sessions.

Instructional and Guided Learning Analysis Method - Learning Contingency Analysis

Learning contingency analysis differs from task analysis primarily in focusing on tasks in a learning environment rather than job performance (Jonassen, et al., 1999, p. 99). By focusing on identifying the behavioral components of tasks, the designer can discover the interdependencies among the tasks (Jonassen, et al., p. 99). Contingency analysis involves first sequencing the instructional content, followed by determining the most effective conditions for the instruction. For example, teaching algebra to a six-year-old during recess would be an extreme example of poor contingency analysis. First the child must have an understanding of basic arithmetic and a learning environment free of distractions.

The sequencing of instruction should reflect one behavior having dependence on another (Jonassen, et al., p. 100). To sort learning contingencies, Jonnassen cites Gropper's (1974) four behavioral components tasks can have:

  • Superordinate/subordinate – a hierarchical relationship to show behavior X is a part of behavior Y.
  • Coordinate relationship – behaviors at the same level in a hierarchical relationship, not necessarily performed at the same time or in the same order.
  • Shared elements – behaviors that share some amount of the same concepts.
  • No relationship – behaviors with no relationship to each other.

Appendix A references eight steps for conducting a learning contingency analysis, which includes Gropper's behavior components as part of steps three and four. The hierarchical learning analysis is similar to Dick, Carey, and Carey's (1999) chapter on subordinate skills analysis. Dick, et al, describes a method of drawing relationships between learning components in a pictorial form, versus a bulleted, tabular form in contingency analysis. The fifth step of contingency analysis skips a few chapters in the Dick and Carey model, but is analogous to developing instructional strategy.

In all, the learning contingency analysis is best for environments where learning is important, rather than performance. It is a time consuming analysis meant to draw a roadmap for the most effective sequence of instruction. The result instruction framework is rigid and may not be appropriate for learning tasks which can not be directly observed. A large instructional unit could make a confusing set of sequential dependencies between tasks in step 3 as compared to the pictorial method recommended by Dick, et al., so a highly skilled analyst is to perform contingency analyses.

Subject Mater/Content Analysis Method – Master Design Chart

The Master Design Chart approach to task analysis is used when the educational ends are the development of the behavioral capabilities of the students (Jonassen, et al., 1999, p. 207). This method has its basis in two foundations. The first foundational principle states that instructional outcomes can be stated as behavioral objectives. The second states the use of instructional taxonomies to describe the outcomes. In using this method, the instructional designer classifies content according to behaviors but is not bound to any taxonomy.

To conduct a Master Design Chart analysis the designer constructs the behavior axis using a taxonomy of instructional outcomes. The designer can use more specific behaviors as appropriate. Next the specific items of content are identified and listed as the vertical axis.

Each cell in the chart is now analyzed and the relative emphasis required in the course or curriculum is noted in the cell. This is done on a continuum with 0 representing no emphasis and a number such as 3 or 5 representing the most emphasis. Although the resulting chart does not represent relationships among the instructional outcomes, it is recommended a relationship step be taken.

A Master Design Chart is constructed for a curriculum or a whole course rather than for an individual lesson. Although it gives an overview of the entire course, no information is included regarding any instructional strategy. A strength of this method is that the risk of omitting important content is reduced. Weaknesses of this method are that it is dependant on the skills of the analyst, lacks basis in needs assessment and is time consuming to construct.

For our course, the matrix was created using document analysis techniques. The result is included as Appendix E. The content included information about being a "Distance Manager" and included content on what a leader should learn and know to successfully manage a geographically diverse team. Concentration from this SME was on higher level techniques as opposed to the detailed tasks analyzed in the Job Task Analysis approach.

While creating this matrix it was difficult to determine how the task list should be written. My habit is to include the action verb associated with the learning event. The matrix provides that association to the taxonomy, a challenge for this designer.

I selected to analyze this method since much of my work comes to me from Subject Matter Experts. I hoped I could learn to use a Subject Mater/Content Analysis Method in my job performance. I found it contrary to my method of thinking, which does helps me see things from a new perspective. However I also found it tedious and am not anxious to complete the Master Design Chart.

Overall Reflection

After reviewing the previous techniques, it has become clear that while some techniques can be used for the broadest of applications, others have been designed specifically for certain tasks. The more finely tuned the instructional designer's skill set is, the more they will be able to select the most specific tool for the task.

The task analysis method could be considered the broadest within the subset that we evaluated. It could be used in nearly every scenario. However, the resolution that it lacks may cause the end product to be deficient. Learning about and when to use the most refined tools available is the difference between being a novice or an expert.

References

Dick, W., Carey, L., & Carey, J. O. (2005). The systematic design of instruction: 6th edition. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon.

Ehrlich, D. (2000). Glossary of terms. Retrieved February 18, 2006, from the Northeastern Illinois University, Instructional Design II Web site: http://www.neiu.edu/~dbehrlic/hrd408/glossary.htm

Fazio, A., & Rieff, K. (2006, Jan). The distance manager. Presented at a meeting of the IT department of Walt Disney Parks & Resorts.

Jonassen, D. H., Tessmer, M., & Hannum, W. H. (1999). Task analysis methods for instructional design. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates

Appendix A: Jonassen, et al. (1999)

  1. Distance Collaboration.
  2. Tasks that make up this job.
    1. Email
    2. Collaborate on Document Creation
    3. Video Conference
    4. Tele Conference
    5. Chat Online
    6. Use Collaboration Software
      1. Adobe Macromedia Breeze
      2. WebCT
  3. Task Description
    1. Email
      1. Proficiency in email usage.
      2. Attach presentations to email and send to participants before scheduled meeting time.
      3. Provide paper copies for local participants.
    2. Collaborate on Document Creation
      1. Prepare presentations before scheduled meeting time.
      2. Annotate as much as possible.
      3. Use large clear fonts if presentation is to be broadcast over a video conference link.
    3. Video Conference
      1. Make sure all equipment to be used are compatible.
      2. Conduct periodic test runs.
      3. Presenter should engage and address remote audience.
      4. Remote audience should remain muted unless speaking to local site.
      5. Ensure that all documents to be used are sent in advance and that font sizes are appropriate for broadcast.
    4. Tele Conference
      1. Make sure all equipment to be used is compatible.
      2. Conduct periodic test runs.
      3. Conference leader should engage and address remote audience.
      4. Remote audience should remain muted unless speaking to local site.
      5. Ensure that all documents to be used are sent prior to the conference.
    5. Chat Online
      1. Select chat platform
      2. Make sure that all participants are familiar with the tools that will be useful for the collaboration.
      3. Decide on rules of engagement for online chat.
      4. Inform users whether the chat session will be saved or not.
    6. Use Collaboration Software
      1. Select collaboration software platform (corporate decision)
      2. Conduct training and provide job aids for software use.
  4. Detailed Task Description
    1. Email
      1. Start email program.
      2. Open and review any important emails as needed.
      3. Respond to messages that require a response.
      4. Open and create email dialogue.
      5. Select individuals to send email to from address book or manually enter new email addresses. Determine who may need to be carbon copied or blind copied.
      6. Enter subject for email.
      7. Type message.
      8. Attach any documents that may be needed.
      9. Send email
    2. Collaborate on Document Creation
      1. Start document creation software
      2. Create presentation
      3. Distribute presentation in appropriate fashion
    3. Video Conference
      1. Start video conferencing equipment
      2. Obtain contact information of participants. Ensure that participants have all conference materials beforehand.
      3. Utilizing contact information, attach all participants to the video conference.
      4. Conduct conference using appropriate etiquette.
      5. Thank participants and end conference.
      6. Clear conference area.
    4. Tele Conference
      1. Start tele conferencing equipment
      2. Obtain contact information of participants. Ensure that participants have all conference materials beforehand.
      3. Utilizing contact information, make sure all participants have joined tele conference.
      4. Conduct conference using appropriate etiquette.
      5. Thank participants and end conference.
      6. Clear conference area.
    5. Chat Online
      1. Start agreed upon chat platform
      2. Obtain contact information of participants. Ensure that participants have all conference materials beforehand.
      3. Utilizing contact information, make sure all participants have joined the chat room.
      4. Conduct online chat using appropriate etiquette.
      5. Thank participants and end online chat.
    6. Use Collaboration Software
      1. Start agreed upon chat platform
      2. Obtain contact information of participants
      3. Utilizing contact information, make sure all participants have joined the collaboration.
      4. Collaborate using appropriate etiquette.
      5. Thank participants and end collaboration. Ensure that all work created in the collaboration is properly saved and distributed.
  5. Task Requirements
    1. Email
      1. Users must have an email account and be familiar with its usage.
      2. Users must be able to send and receive each other's emails. (No filters restricting access from other participants.)
    2. Collaborate on Document Creation
      1. Users must select the appropriate document creation software and be familiar with its usage.
      2. Users must follow agreed upon criterion for the look and feel of documents to be shared.
      3. Users should be prepared to share documents prior to distance collaboration.
      4. When collaborating on a document, a method for tracking changes by individual users should be set in advance.
    3. Video Conference
      1. Communication standards should be agreed upon either on the corporate level or between specific participants.
      2. Equipment standards should be agreed upon either on the corporate level or between specific participants.
      3. Users should be familiar with the operational procedures of the video conferencing equipment.
      4. For large video conferencing situations, appropriate technical support should be on hand or available.
      5. As with all speaking opportunities, water should be made available for consumption.
    4. Tele Conference
      1. Communication standards should be agreed upon either on the corporate level or between specific participants.
      2. Equipment standards should be agreed upon either on the corporate level or between specific participants.
      3. Users should be familiar with the operational procedures of the tele conferencing equipment.
      4. As with all speaking opportunities, water should be made available for consumption.
    5. Chat Online
      1. Participants must be familiar with agreed upon platform.
      2. Participants should be prepared to share documents prior to online chat.
    6. Use Collaboration Software
      1. Participants must be familiar with agreed upon platform.
      2. Participants should be prepared to share documents prior to online chat.
      3. When collaborating on a document, a method for tracking changes by individual users should be set in advance.
  6. Performance Structure
    1. Call meeting
    2. Determine technology to be used for meeting and collaboration.
    3. Ensure that all documents are created and distributed prior to session.
    4. Begin collaboration session.
    5. Ensure that minutes and progress are saved and forwarded to all participants.
    6. Thank participants and solicit information on how to improve collaboration.

Appendix B

1. Identify the job to be analyzed - The job is distance collaboration. The focus of the analysis will be on the tools, etiquette and procedures of the collaboration.

2. Identify all the tasks that make up that job.

3. Develop a task description for each task.

4. Develop a detailed task description for each task.

5. Analyze each task to determine the requirements. (What does it take from the individual to make this task successful?)

6. Determine the structure of the performance. (This means what order should things be done in)

           

E-mail

 

Evaluation

Select Hardware/ Software

Top-down institution decision

Institutional knowledge and commitment

 

 

   

Assemble committee for fact gathering

   

 

   

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/ distribution)

   

 

   

Demonstrate selected software

   

 

   

Garner opinions

   

 

   

Narrow options

   

 

   

Select best fit

   

 

         

 

Purchase

Provide monies

Provide network infrastructure

Survey responsible staff to analyze infrastructure impact

 

 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 

 

   

Develop proficiency in use of e-mail

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 

 

   

Select method of delivery

Investigate new technologies - consider future needs.

 

 

   

Ensure telephony, mobile PCs, PDAs, etc are installed and supported.

Users must be able to fully utilize hardware/software.

 

 

Use

Use hardware/ software to communicate.

Send and receive communications

Software knowledge

 

 

   

Attach presentation(s) to e-mail.

Send attachments to participants before scheduled meeting time.

 

 

   

Print attachments

Purchase printers

 

 

         

 

         

PowerPoint*

* Popular software used in a variety of Distance Learning Methods

Evaluation

Select software

Top-down institution decision

   
     

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/ distribution)

   
     

Demonstrate selected software

   
     

Garner opinions

   
     

Narrow options

   
     

Select best fit

   
 

Purchase

Provide monies for licensing

Provide network infrastructure

   
 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 
     

Develop proficiency in use of PowerPoint

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 
     

Select method of delivery

Investigate new technologies - consider future needs.

 
     

Install hardware and software for individual users

Users must be able to fully utilize hardware/ software.

 
     

Attach presentation(s) to e-mail.

   

 

Use

Use software to communicate.

Prepare presentations before scheduled meeting times

Use large clear fonts if presentation is to be broadcast of video conference link

 

 

     

Annotate as much as possible

 

 

         

Video Conferencing

 

Evaluation

 

Selection

Top-down institution decision

 

 

     

Assemble committee for fact gathering

 

 

     

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/ distribution)

 

 

     

Demonstrate selected hardware

 

 

     

Garner opinions

 

 

     

Narrow options

 

 

     

Select best fit/validate compatibility.

 

 

Purchase

Provide monies for hardware and software

Provide network infrastructure

   

 

Implementation

Assign tasks for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 
     

Develop proficiency

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 

 

   

Select method of delivery

Investigate new technologies - consider future needs.

 

 

   

Install hardware and software for individual users

Users must be able to fully utilize hardware/ software.

 

 

Use

Conduct equipment tests.

Ensure equipment/network is working.

   

 

 

Presenter should engage and address remote audience.

Develop training courses to enhance presenters and method of communicating via distance.

   

 

 

Remote audience should remain muted unless speaking to local site

Provide documentation/ instruction to audience on requirements of interaction.

   

 

 

Ensure that all documents to be used are sent in advance and that font sizes are appropriate for the broadcast

Provide documentation/ instructions to presenter on requirements of good transmission.

   
           

Teleconferencing

 

Selection

Select telephones

     

 

Purchase

Provide monies

Provide telephone connection (hardware or wireless).

   

 

 

Conference leader should engage and address remote audience.

Develop training courses to enhance presenters and method of communicating via distance.

   

 

Use

E-mail/fax needed documents

Ensure that all documents to be used are sent prior to the conference.

   

 

         

Online Chat

 

Selection

Evaluate various online chat programs

Develop criteria to meet needs of participants.

   
 

Implementation

Training

Make sure that all participants are familiar with the tools that will be useful for the collaboration.

   
 

Use

Etiquette

Decide on rules of engagement for online chat.

   
   

Communicate rules

Inform users whether the chat session will be saved or not.

   
           

Forums

 

Selection

 

Top-down institution decision

   
     

Assemble committee for fact gathering.

   
     

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/distribution).

   
     

Demonstrate selected software

   
     

Garner opinions

   
     

Narrow options

   
     

Select best fit

   
 

Purchase

Provides monies

Provide network infrastructure.

   
 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop support staff expertise

   
   

Inform uses of forum availability

Send e-mail

   
     

Put information on website

   
 

Use

Use hardware/ software to communicate.

Develop documentation on software use.

   
           

Collaboration Software

 

Evaluation

Select Hardware/ Software

Top-down institution decision

Institutional knowledge and commitment

 

     

Assemble committee for fact gathering

   
     

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/ distribution)

   
     

Demonstrate selected software

   
     

Garner opinions

   
     

Narrow options

   
     

Select best fit

   
 

Purchase

Provide monies

Provide network infrastructure

Survey responsible staff to analyze infrastructure impact

 
 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 
     

Develop proficiency in use of collaboration software.

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 
 

Use

Use hardware/ software to communicate.

 

Software knowledge

 
     

Attach presentation(s) to e-mail.

Send attachments to participants before scheduled meeting time.

 
           

WebCasts

 

Evaluation

Select Hardware/ Software

Top-down institution decision

Institutional knowledge and commitment

 

 

   

Assemble committee for fact gathering

   

 

   

Develop criteria to meet needs of company (cost/ distribution)

   

 

   

Demonstrate selected software

   

 

   

Garner opinions

   

 

   

Narrow options

   

 

   

Select best fit

   

 

Purchase

Provide monies

Provide network infrastructure

Survey responsible staff to analyze infrastructure impact

 

 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 

 

   

Develop staff proficiency in use of webcasting

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 

 

Use

Use hardware/ software to communicate.

 

Software knowledge

 
           

Website (Intranet)

 

Evaluation

       
 

Purchase

Provide monies

Provide network infrastructure

Survey responsible staff to analyze infrastructure impact

 
 

Implementation

Assign tasks required for implementation

Develop staff expertise

Train trainers - each train must be able to communicate and demonstrate.

 
     

Develop staff proficiency in use of webcasting

Train users - each user must be knowledgeable and realize benefits of software.

 
 

Use

Use hardware/ software to communicate.

     

Appendix C: Job Analysis Diagram

Appendix D: Learning Contingency Analysis

Steps

Instructional Unit

Step 1: Identify the tasks

  • Email
  • Collaborate on document creation
  • Video conference
  • Tele conference
  • Chat online
  • Use collaboration software

Step 2: Identify the specific behaviors

  • Mouse clicking
  • Locate programs
  • Opening programs
  • Printing
  • Attaching documents to emails
  • Send email
  • Generate presentation

Step 3: Determine the sequential dependencies

  • Must be able to click before locating programs
  • Must be able to locate programs before opening them
  • Must be able to open documents before printing them
  • Must be able to open a new email dialogue before attaching documents to it
  • Must be able to open a new email dialogue before being able to send it

Step 4: Sequence the behaviors

  • Email
  • Locate and open email program
  • Read new email
  • Print email
  • Reply to email
  • Format email contents
  • Attach documents
  • Send email
  • Collaborate on document creation
  • Locate and open document creation program
  • Format contents of document
  • Enable change tracking
  • Create comments in the document
  • Accept and reject document changes from other team members
  • Tele conference
  • Activate 3-way calling
  • Navigate phone tree for tele conferencing services
  • Video conference
  • Activate video conference service
  • Use collaboration software

Step 5: Plan the instructional progressions

  • Locate, open, and demonstrate use of virtual team software
  • Review simple program features
  • Review document formatting
  • Review netiquette

Step 6: Analyze the criterion behaviors

  • Learners must discriminate between program icons
  • Learners will be required to apply common program features to multiple different programs such as changing text size, printing, and creating new documents.
  • Learners will need to adapt to use potentially new jargon to communicate with team members such as “IM”ing.

Step 7: Select alternative instructional approaches

  • Demonstrate correct use of programs in each task
  • Consult a decision tree on the optimal times to use either email, tele conferencing, video conferencing, chatting online, etc.

Step 8: Adjust for individual differences

  • Pretest each student's knowledge
  • Place students in various parts of the instructional sequence based on their pretest results

Appendix E: Master Design Chart

 

Verbal

Concepts

Procedures & Rules

 

Define

Identify

List

Describe

Interpret

Locate

Apply

Prepare

Set Up

Culture

Time zones

                 

Use of time

                 

Vocabulary – location neutral language

                 

Level of Formality

                 

Regional culture

                 

Corporate culture

                 

Technical culture

                 

Personal conduct

                 

Beliefs/Assumptions/Values

                 

Protocol

                 

Etiquette

Communication

                 

Clarity

                 

Shared goals

                 

Clear expectations

                 

Meeting guidelines/agenda

                 

Limit meeting length

                 

Leadership Skills

Verbal communication

                 

Written communication

                 

Strong interpersonal skills

                 

Technical skills

                 

Facilitator

                 

Establish trust

                 

Team comfort with technology

                 

Solicit participation/elicit responses

                 

Coach

                 

Team build/celebrate

                 

Tools/technology

Within your firewall?

                 

What’s available to all?

                 

Practice

                 

Include interactivity

                 

Technology matches goal

                 

Analysis of Survey, Record, and Other Qualitative Data

Course description: Examination of the major elements involved in planning, conducting, and reporting survey research; emphasis is on the design, instrumentation, data analysis and data; interpretation for survey research.

Writing up reliability results

Guiding Principle: No measure is ever reliable. Scores determined by a measure may be reliable depending on who completes the measure and the conditions under which the measure is completed (when and where).

Structure of the Reliability write-up

Procedure One Procedure Two

1. Comment on the reliability of the scores by examining the reliability coefficient.

Everyone has her/his own standards, but here are what mine tend to be:

< .65 Poor;
.65 ≤ Modest ≤ 80;
> .80 Very good

1. Comment on reliability coefficient

2. Comment on the corrected item-total correlations

  1. Note which items have a negative corrected item total correlation.
  2. Note whether any negative corrected item total correlation are attributable to miscoding or items with response options are scaled opposite of the majority of items.
  3. Note which items have a zero corrected item total correlation.
  4. Note which items with a zero corrected item total correlation do so because of no variance (every person responded the same way to the item)
2. Do nothing more 3. Comment on how high your reliability coefficient would increase if you were to drop out all negative item-total correlations one at a time until you had no more negative corrected item-total correlations.
  4. Do nothing more

Sample paragraph

Responses for the various features of the agency website were judged to be moderately reliable for the customer service representatives who participated in the survey, with a reliability coefficient of 0.778. A review of the corrected item-total correlations suggests that the questions for the website as a critical tool and a unique website in the marketplace do not correlate with the corrected total very well. Their elimination is warranted on the basis that reducing the scale to only relevant items would make for a better, more parsimonious scale. It turns out that removing the item may further be motivated by anticipated increase in the reliability coefficient reported in the output (0.884).

If HTML newsletters, online payments, Internet as a tool, and customer communication with the agency were removed, the reliability of the scale would increase to 0.963.

To examine the impact of removing both items, each item was removed one at a time. This approach is necessary because the impact of removing one item changes the relationship of the other item with the changing total.

Case Studies in Research Design

Course description: A critical analysis of educational research design.

Developing a research question

Three major types of questions are causal/comparative, relationship, and impact. Use a literature review as a funnel to narrow a broad area of research into a manageable contribution, which leads to "The purpose of this study is..." Classic or landmark studies would be considered good content for the introductory, broad part of the literature review. Use incremental blocks of studies as a transition to more focused topics in your area of research. The final question should be something you are genuinely interested in finding the answer to so you have the motivation to complete the report as time progresses.

The question should have a question mark at the end. The question should ask if there is a cause/effect, what impacts what, or if there a relationship (what two or more things are related). Should have a construct or construct level at the start that is narrowed down to something very specific. Could "self concept" really mean "body image"? Does "achievement" mean achievement in math, reading, overall, or something else? Include operational definitions for parts of the question to define "achievement" if you are looking for relationship between achievement and yearly income. Perhaps achievement has several six factors to consider observing in the study.

Research problem statement template

Template:

This study will investigate the effects of (treatment) on (population). The investigation will be conducted (describe the setting). The present study, within the context of (the setting), will be concerned with the following research questions:

  1. Does the procedure of (treatment) have (performance change) difference on (the experimental population) as compared to (the control population)?
  2. Does the method of (treatment) - (restate method of treatment) - affect (population)?

Hypothesis 1: (Relate back to research question number 1). Hypothesis 2: (Relate back to research question number 2).


Example:

This study will investigate the effects of Digital Propensity on the preferences of insurance agency employees when information is presented with either text or graphics as the primary presentation format. The investigation will be conducted in a "real work" setting and will use a computer-based task. The present study, within the context of a work environment, will be concerned with the following research questions:

  1. Does the presentation of graphics with text support more closely match the preferences of "Digital Natives" than the same content presented as text with graphical support?
  2. Does the presentation of text with graphical support more closely match the preferences of "Digital Immigrants" than the same content presented as graphics with text support?

Sample Chapter organization of study

Chapter 1 of this study introduced the problem statement and described the specific problem addressed in the study as well as design components.

Chapter 2 presents a review of literature and relevant research associated with the problem addressed in this study.

Chapter 3 presents the methodology and procedures used for data collection and analysis.

Chapter 4 contains an analysis of the data and presentation of the results.

Chapter 5 offers a summary and discussion of the researcher's findings, implications for practice, and recommendations for future research.

Validity issues in research

Internal validity - how valid were the procedures that I followed in terms of the research method to obtain the information I need External validity - how generalizable is the information learned from a study

Internal validity

  • History effect - did something recently happen to one of the sample groups that would make it differentiate from the other groups. For example, if you ask small children about their fears of ghosts, some of the children may report less fear if they are surveyed near Halloween.
  • Maturation - when the study doesn't control for natural growth; in other words, the natural maturation of the group is the actual cause of improvement in the study instead of the treatment
  • Testing - what are the effects of a pretest on a posttest; familiarity with the instrument impacts the results on the second test
  • Instrumentation - is an issue when instrumentation changes during a study; for example, calibration of individual opinions in a observation study could have differences in results just because a one rater might think an event is a 5 on a 1-10 scale, and another rater might think the same event is a 7. The result grades on essay papers depending on the mood of the instructor. If the publisher comes out with a new version of a test and the previous test isn't available. Then you need to see how closely the two tests are correlated.
  • Statistical regression - also known as regression to the mean; for example, getting a perfect score on the SAT only leaves the possibility of going down in score. The more extreme the results, the more likely each is to move towards the mean because of the error that put them in the extreme in the first place like guessing on questions that make the difference between a perfect score and a lower score.
  • Differential selection - people that you pick are not representative of the population in the first place;
  • Experimental mortality - differentially loose respondents; for example, you might not even know who you lost or picked in the first place. Loosing the extremes in both cases of a paired study could be the actual cause of change rather than the treatment
  • Selection maturation interaction - as part of the selection, the sample actually has unknown differences that make the differences in the results instead of the treatment. For example, if teaching children basketball, while the children may start with similar free-throw ability, one child may improve faster than another simply because of superior hand-eye coordination, rather than the basketball instruction.

External validity

  • Interactive or reactive effects of testing - example: giving a pretest to the people in the population sample may impact their performance during observation, so the pretest has an interaction effect that limits the generalizability of the results to the general population because the whole population did not take the pretest.
  • Interaction and selection biases - the treatment only works for the selection, so can't be generalized; may be a result of the environment the selected group was performing in
  • Reactive effects of experimental arrangements
  • Multiple treatment interference - when you have more than one treatment, how do you know which one made the difference? Something like sequencing presentation of treatments may make a difference.

Bibliography

Campbell, D. T. & Stanley, J. C. (1966). Experimental and quasi-experimental designs for research. Chicago, R. McNally.

Comprehensive Ph.D. candidacy examination study guide

Instructions: Use the following questions as a study guide for your comprehensive exam. 4-5 questions will be presented to you for your comprehensive exam. You are to select and respond to 3 to meet the requirements for your comprehensive exam.

  1. Identify and describe a learning or instructional theory that helps explain the differences between Digital Natives versus Digital Immigrants in terms of their preferences and propensity to learn from graphics versus text as posited by Marc Prensky.
  2. Define the term "Digital Native" and describe how it is similar to and differs from related terms used to describe different types or generations of people (e.g., Millennial, Net Generation, Generation X, Y, Z).
  3. Characterize the evolution/theory of Instructional Technology from it's origins to the 21st Century. Use a timeline and help identify key authors (e.g., people who influenced the field) along with key dates and events.
  4. A university administrator approaches you with a request to develop training for his/her faculty on the design of e-learning programs. What would be your initial set of questions and/or comments and why would you ask those questions.
  5. Many argue against Instructional Systems Design (ISD) as an approach to the creation of training and educational materials and programs. What are the basic arguments against ISD and how would you address them.
  6. We know that training/education is appropriate only when the target population lacks skills and knowledge. What are other reasons why people do not perform and what performance interventions may be applied to address each performance problem.
  7. Discuss a history of instructional media with a focus on the progression of media toward the current applications of digital educational games. Include discussions of important (sometimes called "landmark") research that has influenced the evolution of instructional media.
  8. Discuss learning modality preferences, with a focus on print and visual components by citing appropriate historical and/or recent research.
  9. Discuss research design methods and statistical techniques that can be used to examine the effects of two instructional media components (Text/Print first vs. Graphics/Visual first) on attitude and performance of two groups of learners (digital natives vs. digital immigrants).

Dissertation research

Committee members:

Atsusi "2c" Hirumi (co-chair)
Stephen A. Sivo (co-chair)
Chuck Dziuban
E.H. "Mike" Robinson
Laura Blasi

Defended June 27, 2008

Predicting the performance of interpreting instruction based on Digital Propensity Index score in text and graphic formats

Practitioners have proposed that Digital Natives prefer graphics while Digital Immigrants prefer text. While Instructional Design has been extensively studied and researched, the impact of the graphical emphasis in instructional designs as it relates to digital propensity has not been widely explored. Specifically, this study examined the performance of students when presented with text-only and graphic-only instructional formats. The purpose of this study was to test the relationship between Digital Propensity Index scores of individuals and their performance when interpreting online instruction. A sample of students from the population of a large metropolitan university received the Digital Propensity Index questionnaire, which is a measure of an individual's time spent interacting with digital media. Each student was randomly assigned varying formats of a computer-based instructional unit via a public survey. The instructional unit consisted of the DPI questionnaire and six tasks related to the Central Florida commuter rail system.

Participants were asked to answer the DPI questionnaire on a website by clicking on a link in an emailed invitation. Following the DPI questionnaire, participants were randomly assigned to one of two groups. Group One saw three instructional tasks shown in text and shuffled in random order. Each task was displayed on its own webpage. By submitting an answer to the task, the group progressed through the website to the next task. Group Two saw graphic tasks first, again, shuffled in random order. After the first three tasks, the groups swapped instructional formats to view the opposing group's initial questions. Participants were timed on how many seconds they spent reviewing each task. Each task had an assessment question to evaluate the learning outcomes of the instructional unit. Finally, the DPI score of the participant was matched with the time spent viewing each presentation format.

The findings indicate that DPI score had a statistically significant prediction of time spent navigating each type of instruction. Though the link between DPI score and time spent navigating instruction was statistically significant, the actual measurable time difference between navigating text and graphic formats was only a fraction of a second for each increment in DPI score. Limitations and potential future research related to the study are discussed as well.

AttachmentSize
Norman_David_K_200808_PhD_protected.pdf3.3 MB

Distance Education: Technology, Process and Product

Course description: Instruction and how it is delivered at a distance. Examines technologies, processes, and products of distance education with emphasis on e-learning.

AttachmentSize
EME6457_syllabus_Sp06.pdf61.96 KB
EME6457_Norman,D._Distance_education_tools.pdf128.25 KB
EME6457_Tidwell,C.,&Norman,D.K._Standards_for_DE.pdf57.67 KB

Instructional Treatment Plan

As a class assignment, I developed an instructional treatment plan for the following objective: Given a virtual working environment, avoid communication problems between virtual team members when working on a project.

We chose Nelson's Collaborative Problem Solving (CPS) model because team skills are a higher order thinking activity. Nelson says CPS is not appropriate for memorized or procedural tasks and a CRT item would be "waste precious instructional time" and that "CPS is most appropriate when there is not a single answer to a question or best way of doing something" (Reigeluth, 1999, p. 247).

CPS was also chosen because the collaborative element in a virtual environment forces the students to experience the very topic they're studying and writing about. Each of the process activities in CPS is a small assessment of the enabling objectives since the group can't move on to complete the assignment until they have normed, agreed on the problem, defined roles, etc. I thought the true assessment of the enabling objectives would be performed as part of the debriefing, reflection, and discussion at the end of the unit.

Many texts have the condition, behavior, and criteria/degree elements of objectives (Dick, Carey, & Carey, 2005, pp. 123-139; Kubiszyn & Borich, 2003, p. 82; Simonson, Smaldino, Albright, & Zvacek 2006, p. 129; Stolovitch & Keeps, 1999, p. 356) and that Hirumi added audience (2005, ¶ 6). We tried to follow the samples in Dick, et al. (2005, p. 139), for the condition/degree of assessing intellectual skills by specifying things like "at least five peer-reviewed journals" in the sample assessment rubric. The other assessment rubric items were modeled from Dr. Hirumi's performance criteria for this assignment and peer evaluation for the end of the course.

I believe I can ask the question, "could I observe the learner doing this?" (Kubiszyn et al., 2003, p. 80; Dick et al., 1999, p. 127) to each of the objectives we listed in the treatment plan as part of the measurable behavior component of the objectives. Granted, the observation would not have an associated percentage completion or accuracy, but that goes back to the complexity of multiple solution theory in CPS. Dick et al, p. 139 has several samples without a CRT item as the assessment criterion for intellectual skill objectives.

Ways to improve the treatment plan are to include some of the degree elements from the assessment rubric earlier in the objectives, add more description and content to the instructional events, create an activity for forming and norming teams and an activity for role selection, and investigate taking some fuzziness out of the objectives.

References

Dick, W., Carey, L., & Carey, J. O. (2005). The systematic design of instruction (6th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson Allyn and Bacon.

Hirumi, A. (2005, August 1). Unit 4: Performance objectives supplement. Retrieved September 9, 2005, from http://webct.ucf.edu/eme6613c/Unit04/u04info.html

Kubiszyn, T., & Borich, G. (2003). Educational testing and Measurement: Classroom application and practice (7th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley / Jossey-Bass Education.

Reigeluth, C. (1999). Instructional-design theories and models: 2nd ed. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Simonson, M., Smaldino, S., Albright, M., & Zvacek, S. (2006). Teaching and learning at a distance: Foundations of distance education (3rd ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, Inc.

Stolovitch, H. D., & Keeps, E. J. (eds.). (1999). Handbook of human performance technology: Improving individual and organizational performance worldwide (2nd ed.). San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass / Pfeiffer

Online University Instructional Treatment Plan - Unit 1.0 Virtual Teams

Unit Descriptors

Course title: Working Effectively in Virtual Teams

Unit Number and Title: Unit 1.0 - Virtual Team Communications

Terminal Objective: Given a virtual working environment, avoid communication problems between virtual team members when working on a project.

Enabling Objectives: When assigned a task to be completed in a virtual team, you should be able to:

  • Criticize unclear messages.
  • Select appropriate communication tools for specified tasks.
  • Evaluate advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams.
  • Examine strengths and weaknesses of selected communication tools.
  • Predict typical communication problems of virtual teams.
  • Compare and contrast virtual and F2F team communications.

Prerequisites:

  • Access and knowledge to use tools for virtual communication (email, chat, text messaging, etc)
  • Entry behaviors
    • minimum 12th grade ability in reading, writing, and comprehension
    • ability to navigate and print websites on the Internet

Time Requirements: Approximately 1 week

Instructional Strategy and Media Selection

Designer's Notes: Collaborative Problem Solving

This unit does not cover attitudinal parts of the lesson. The Collaborative Problem Solving grounded instructional strategy has been modified to meet the needs of this unit. CPS is a learner-centered learning environment, with a learn-by-doing participation attitude for participants, and the encouragement of exploration of multiple perspectives. CPS is not suited for learning factual information or procedural skills, rather different ways to apply a complex set of knowledge to different ways to complete a task (Reigeluth, 1999). The majority of this portion of the training is intended to be web-based.

Unit 1 Instructional Strategy

Instructional Events Description Interaction Media & Tool Selection
Build readiness (Prepare students for project.) Creating an authentic learning problem is essential at this point (Stinson & Milter, 1996). 

The review of the unit should address benefits and pitfalls of group work and how the group products will be evaluated. The instructor should ask students questions about the process and respond with appropriate adjustments, if necessary. Defining the exact problem for virtual teamwork should be done in collaboration with the learners. To guide the problem, the following guidelines should be used:

  • develop problems to encourage critical thinking and problem-solving skills
  • use issues relevant to the learners
  • use novel problems or ones that address significant, current problems

Learners will read the introduction on pages 118-119 on virtual team communications in the assigned text. Learners will also review the included web sites on the subject to help them become familiar with the subject matter.

Unit Overview

Unit 1.0 provides an overview of virtual teams by: (a) discussing benefits and pitfalls of virtual teams; (b) comparing them to face-to-face interaction; (c) listing rules and etiquette for virtual communication. The primary purpose is to avoid communication problems when working in virtual teams. Since Unit 1 is the start of your group work in this course, it will take slightly longer than other units with a full week commitment to complete. Start by reading pages 118-119 of your text to become familiar with the subject matter. When you have a good feel for the introductory text, post an authentic problem to the bulletin board you think might be possible to solve in the course of this unit. At the end of this unit, you will be assessed on your content knowledge and skills, group-process skills, and metacognitive strategies.

learner - instructor, learner - content Discussion board, text, web resources and email. 
Form and norm groups

Users form their own groups of three to six members by posting profiles of their gender, ethnicity, relevant pre-existing knowledge or skills, and previous experience with working on a team (Reigeluth, 1999, pg. 259). Interested team members reply to posts to form groups.

The instructor may need to assist learners having trouble finding a group. 

Instructor will create private discussion boards for each group or students will create a Yahoo group or use another collaboration tool with instructor approval. As part of the norming process, members should agree on operational guidelines.

Assignment: Form Groups

Post a short comment about yourself to the bulletin board with at least the following information: the problem you are interested in solving, sex, ethnicity, relevant knowledge or skills, and previous experience working with a team. Form teams of no less than three and no more than six members by replying to biographies. Each team should work with at least one person who is not already known. When teams are formed, send a short paragraph of some agreed upon operational guidelines for the group to the instructor.

learner - learner, learner - instructor. Discussion board, Internet resources.
Determine a preliminary problem definition

Students will explore the challenges of virtual teams by reading pages 120-135 in the text on virtual team communications, and refer to suggested web sites that deal with the topic. 

Based on their findings they will summarize and determine which direction they wish to pursue in virtual team communications.

They will need to focus on challenges facing virtual teams and validate these findings through their own virtual team experience.  Each student will maintain a log of events throughout the virtual team experience.

Assignment: Preliminary Problem Definition

Develop a common understanding of the problem the group will solve. Each group member should post a short statement of their understanding of the problem. The group should choose one for the next step, and post it to their group presentation site. Be sure the selected problem statement has enough information readily available to support a timely solution before moving to the next step.

learner - learner, learner - content Discussion board, chat, instant messaging
Define and assign roles

Scribe and moderator are pre-determined by instructor.

Students will need to determine and assign roles to other team members.

It is important that the team member selected to be the moderator is aware of what is involved in keeping the project moving forward.

The course information in WebCT on team roles will need to be reviewed.

Assignment: Assign team member roles

Students will need to understand the importance of clearly defined roles for an effective virtual team project.  Each student will volunteer for a specific role within the team.  Each student must understand the role they will be taking on to avoid misunderstandings and to make sure that each team member in a virtual team has a clearly defined role.

learner - learner, learner - content Discussion board, internet resources, email, chat, instant messaging.
Engage in collaborative problem-solving process Learners engage in whatever means necessary to solve the problem. 

Students will use the text, suggested web references, other web resources, and library resources to research their proposed problem. 

Students will need to clearly identify the area their specific area of research on virtual team communications being mindful of the strengths and weaknesses of virtual teams.

Instructor will be available to answer online questions via the bulletin board, or email.

Assignment: Engage in collaborative problem-solving.

All team members need to contribute to the collaboration process.  All team members will be expected to reply to discussion postings, virtual chat meetings (at established group times).  Also, every team member is expected to participate in the instructor-student online chat session during the project as assigned by the instructor.

learner - learner, learner - instructor, learner - content, learner - other, learner - interface, learner - environment Discussion board, email, internet, chat, text
Finalize the solution or project Students will write a 5-page group report on their findings. 

This report will be posted to the course web site for other students to view and for the instructor to provide feedback and evaluation.

Assignment: Finalize the project

Review the assessment guidelines and write a 5 page group report on the findings of virtual teamwork. Post the final report to your group's presentation site.

learner - learner Web page, discussion board, email.
Synthesize and reflect Each student will submit a one page summary of their experience being part of a virtual team.  This summary will focus on the challenges of virtual teams, positives and negatives of the experience, and finally a recommendation for future virtual team events. Students should also identify newly acquired skills from the group project and what, if any, metacognitive strategies they employed.

They will post two bulletin board postings on their recommendations for improving the virtual team experience.

Part of this learning experience will also include a general chat time with the instructor on the experience as a whole.

Assignment: Synthesize and Reflect

Write a one page reflection. Discuss the challenges of working in a virtual team, the positives and negatives of the experience, what skills you acquired in the process, and what metacognitive strategies you employed, if any. Generate at least two recommendations for improving future virtual team events and post them to the bulletin board. Watch for a notice from the instructor about meeting in the chat room for a whole-class debriefing.

learner - learner, learner - instructor Discussion board, chat, email.
Assess products and processes Each student will evaluate their learning experience and assign letter grades to each member of the group based on the specified course criteria using a teamwork evaluation form.

Students will provide comments on other student work in a constructive fashion via the bulletin board.

Instructor will provide feedback on each groups report and virtual team summaries.

Instructor will distribute electronic survey via email to all students to provide feedback on the virtual team experience.

learner - learner, learner - instructor Evaluation form, discussion board, email and multiple choice survey
Provide closure Each student will receive a final grade on their final product, which will include a group grade, and instructor direct feedback.

The group evaluations will be summarized and shared with each member of the group for feedback.

Student's will post wrap up insights on the whole process and will include what worked and what didn't work discussion posts.

learner - learner, learner - instructor Discussion board, email, grade tool.

Media Selection Rationale

Webpages were selected to deliver most instructional events for a number of reasons (the tools in WebCT will be used for the project):

  • Webpages provide the most accessible means of providing a combination of audio, video, text and graphics.
  • The content and learning objectives for this unit is primarily focused on higher order cognitive skills. As such, the use of interactive online tools is essential for immediate feedback.
  • No face-to-face interaction is necessary for virtual teams (and defeats the purpose of the virtual team experience).
  • Web content can serves as a job aid for future reference.
  • Face-to-face time requirements are eliminated for team members.

Email, chat, discussion board, and whiteboard will be used for various parts of the virtual team process:

  • Email will be used for communications between individual team members and the instructor when communication does not need to include the entire group.  Students need to learn the nuances of email usage and the impact that is has on communication in virtual teams.  Poorly worded emails or emails typed accidentally in all uppercase may offend the receiver or at least make the send appear confused.
  • Email etiquette is critical for students to learn so that they are less likely to send emails that are confusing or improperly worded.  In a business or other professional environment emails must be written professionally and clearly. 
  • The chat room feature of WebCT exposes the students to an interactive communication (like instant messaging) in a group format.  The more experience students get with collaborative virtual communication tools the better they will be prepared for their future careers.
  • The discussion board is useful for posting questions or statements that need to be viewed by a wider audience.  It also permits a threaded conversation to occur with input from a variety of participants.
  • Deciding what types of messages are best suited for which media will make all of the difference in the effectiveness of the virtual teams communications.

Unit 1 Learner Assessment Alignment Table

Designer's Notes: The enabling objectives for Unit 1.0 focus on higher order thinking skills, therefore an essay, discussion, and reflection are necessary for assessing virtual teamwork knowledge. The terminal objective for the virtual teamwork unit focuses on the cognitive domain. Each objective addresses the audience, required behavior, condition, and criteria or degree to which the performance will be measured.

Unit 1 Learner Assessment Alignment Table

Skill Objective Domain Method Item/Criteria
Communicate effectively in virtual teams Terminal objective 1.0 - Given a virtual working environment, avoid communication problems between virtual team members. Cognitive reflective discussion learner reflection, potential for real-world success, and the group processes of each team
Criticize virtual team communications Enabling objective: 1.1 - Given example communications from virtual teams, criticize virtual team communications. Problem solving reflective discussion, post test: essay

learners' gains in content knowledge and skills, group-process skills, and metacognitive strategies

  • Shows ability to criticize messages in virtual teamwork with clear rationale and grounded research.

Select appropriate communication tools for specified tasks.

Enabling objective: 1.2 - Given a problem situation, select the appropriate communication tools for the specified tasks. Concept reflective discussion, post test: essay

learners' gains in content knowledge and skills, group-process skills, and metacognitive strategies

  • Correctly selects the most effective communication tools for specified tasks.

Evaluate advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams.

Enabling objective 1.3 - Given a teamwork situation, evaluate the advantages and limitations associated with using virtual teams. Cognitive

Post test: essay

  • Evaluation of advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams is supported by at least five peer-reviewed journal articles.
Examine strengths and weaknesses of selected communication tools. Enabling objective 1.4 - Given a list of communication tools, evaluate their strengths and weaknesses. Problem solving Post test: essay
  • Examines at least five strengths and five weaknesses of at least two communication tools identified in peer-reviewed journal articles.
Predict typical communication problems of virtual teams. Enabling objective 1.5 - Given a teamwork situation, predict the problems typically associated with virtual teams. Cognitive Post test: essay
  • Predictions of typical communication problems of virtual teams are supported with real-life cases.
Compare and contrast virtual and F2F team communications. Enabling objective 1.6 - Given a communication scenario, compare and contrast the using F2F or virtual environments as the communication medium. Cognitive reflective discussion, post test: essay

learners' gains in content knowledge and skills, group-process skills, and metacognitive strategies

  • Compares and contrasts virtual and F2F team communications.

Appendix: Sample Assessment Instruments

Teamwork Evaluation Form

Your Name:
Name of Individual Being Evaluated:
Date:

Total Score: ____ /25pts

Quality (___ /5pts): Completed all assignments to the level of quality expected by the group.

Responsibility (___ /5pts): Completed all assignments in a timely manner. Attended meetings.

Interpersonal Skills (___ /5pts): Worked well with other team members.

Attitude (___ /5pts): Projected positive attitude throughout project.

Contribution (___ /5pts): Contributed to the group in an equitable fashion.

Percent (%) Contribution:

Estimate the % contribution of the team member you are evaluating under the column marked "Individual" for major tasks completed by the team for each assignment. The % contribution of the individual plus the % contribution of all others MUST add up to equal 100% for each major task

Tasks % Contribution
by Individual
% Contribution
by All Others
     
     
     
     

 

Letter Grade: _____ (Letter grade is base on the team members overall contribution to the virtual team experience). 

 

Additional Comments:

 

 

 

Sample assessment rubric for measuring achievement of terminal objective Unit 1

Exemplary
  • Shows ability to criticize messages in virtual teamwork with clear rationale and grounded research.
  • Correctly selects the most effective communication tools for specified tasks.
  • Evaluation of advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams is supported by at least five peer-reviewed journal articles.
  • Examines at least five strengths and five weaknesses of at least two communication tools identified in peer-reviewed journal articles.
  • Predictions of typical communication problems of virtual teams are supported with real-life cases.
  • Compares and contrasts virtual and F2F team communications.
  • Completes all assignments to the level of quality expected by the group.
  • Completes all assignments in a timely manner.
  • Works well with other team members.
  • Contributes to the group in an equitable fashion.
  • Projects positive attitude throughout project.
  • Assignment products have minimal to no spelling or grammatical errors.
Proficient
  • Shows ability to criticize messages in virtual teamwork with logical rationale and research.
  • Correctly selects appropriate communication tools for specified tasks in most cases.
  • Evaluation of advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams is supported by at least three journal articles.
  • Examines at least five strengths and five weaknesses of at least two communication tools identified in journal articles.
  • Predictions of typical communication problems of virtual teams are supported with theory.
  • Compares and contrasts virtual and F2F team communications.
  • Completes most assignments to the level of quality expected by the group.
  • Completes most assignments in a timely manner.
  • In general, works well with other team members.
  • Contributes to the group in an equitable fashion.
  • Projects positive attitude most of the time.
  • Assignment products have repeated spelling or grammatical errors.
Developing
  • Does not provide logical rationale for criticizing messages in virtual teamwork.
  • Does not select appropriate communication tools for specified tasks.
  • Evaluation of advantages and limitations associated with virtual teams is not supported with research.
  • Does not examine at strengths and weaknesses of communication tools using publications.
  • Does not support predictions of typical communication problems of virtual teams with research.
  • Does not effectively compare and contrast virtual and F2F team communications.
  • Does not complete assignments to the level of quality expected by the group.
  • Does not complete assignments in a timely manner.
  • Does not work well with other team members.
  • Does not contribute to the group in an equitable fashion.
  • Projects negative attitude throughout the project.
  • Assignment products have material or significant spelling or grammatical errors, making the assignments difficult to read.

References

Reigeluth, C. (1999). Instructional-design theories and models: 2nd ed. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Stinson, J. E. & Milter, R. G. (1996). Problem-based learning in business education: Curriculum design and implementation issues – Drawing on eleven years experience with a problem-based learning MBA program, curricular design and implementation. Retrieved March 1, 2006, from Ohio University Web site: http://www.ouwb.ohiou.edu/stinson/PBL.html

Editing Professional Writing

Course description: The study of major issues in editing, including levels of edit, grammar and mechanics, visuals, style, and the impact of technology. Learn how to edit a variety of professional documents (which could include correspondence, reports, instructions, proposals, online help, or Web sites) to make them more usable to their intended audience. Explore both copyediting and comprehensive editing and learn how to apply these to professional documents. In addition to learning how to edit the content, organization, style, and mechanics of professional documents, explore how the editing process is rhetorical. Finally, explore various ethical, legal, and management issues concerning editing.

AttachmentSize
ENC5216a_syllabus_sp06.pdf37.43 KB

My writing process

When I start writing a paper for a school assignment, I review each of the requirements of the assignment, making headings for each in a word processor. Then I try to link each part of the assignment with one or more of the objectives for the instructional unit. For example, in preparation for this assignment, I started with three lines at the top of a blank document in the following manner:

What is my writing process like? What is your first step in completing a paper? What is each subsequent step?

Of the four objectives listed for this instructional unit, "recognize and articulate your own writing process", was the only objective to match the components of the assignment. I try to make the link between assignment requirements and objectives to double-check my interpretation of the assignment.

What I do next, in writing a paper, depends on the type of assignment. In the case of this assignment, I am reflecting rather than summarizing results of research, so I started writing immediately after I linked the assignment requirements with an objective. After each paragraph, I read back through what I said in the previous two paragraphs and make revisions.

Had this assignment been to write about the results of research, I would have started by outlining the sections of the paper. Each section would contain a notation of the applicable requirements in the assignment. If any ideas come to mind for things to write about, I add them as short, incomplete notes in the section it belongs. I create a title page with a temporary title. Next, I start a literature review. The literature review almost always prompts me to change the title of my paper more than once. I only start writing the paper for an assignment when I have a solid topic statement or abstract for guiding the rest of the report.

Whether it be subject of the paper is reflection, research, or a topic where I am a subject matter expert, I revise the report in two paragraph chunks as I go. I think it helps confirm the flow between paragraphs. When I finish a complete section, I skim through the section before moving to the next to check flow. At the end of the paper, I walk away from the computer; final revisions are for a fresh sitting. In the ideal situation, I print the paper to edit with a pencil.

In my first critical revision, I check for using the same word to start sentences and grammar. I only read one sentence at a time to see if it makes sense. When I finish the pencil revisions, I make the corrections in the word processor and make my final read-through on the computer screen for the flow of the paper. Sometimes I move large chunks of paragraphs to other parts of the paper. At this point, I coax my wife into using a red pen on a print-out of the paper. For the most part, she revises for content, leaving comments on what I should leave out, expand on, or add. In ideal situations, I give the paper a third read before turning it in. Unfortunately, procrastination often prevents me from having the energy to put into a third reading.

Technical editing defined

Technical editing is an iterative team effort involving one or more editors, authors, subject matter experts (SMEs), and evaluators. Each team component has specialized roles. The editor provides direction, scope, vision, purpose. Editors verify adherence to applicable style guides as well as review drafts for usability, logic, arrangement, spelling, punctuation, grammar, and design. Writers translate information from subject matter experts to written form. Writers are responsible for arbitrating content presentation between the editors’ global scope and the SME’s specific content. Changes to text during the review process are the responsibility of the writers. SMEs provide expert input on required content. SMEs also serve as a specialist member of the evaluation team to review text for currency, accuracy, and adequacy. Evaluators serve as a third party to improve the effectiveness of delivery. Evaluation is performed in a one-to-one or small group format to include clarity, impact, feasibility, and generalizations. Field trial is performed with evaluators to judge the text’s effectiveness under the targeted conditions.

The editing process is a kind of life cycle. I developed a waterfall style diagram of the production process, consisting of 6 major parts, as shown in Figure 1: define project parameters, logical design, physical design, development, implementation, and maintenance.

Figure 1: Technical Editing Waterfall

Between each step, a review is performed by the editor, SME, and/or evaluators, to be implemented by the writers. Since costs to significantly revise a document increase as the document reaches completion, the review and changes are essential before moving on to the next step.

Instructional System Design

Course description: Systematic design of instruction including task analysis, learner analysis, needs assessment, content analysis, specification of objectives, media selection, evaluation and revision. Analysis of instructional design models.

The learning in the course is split into nine instruction areas: goal analysis, subordinate skills analysis, learner and context analysis, performance objectives, learner assessment, instructional strategy, instructional development, formative evaluation, and summative evaluation. I was assigned to work with a local non-profit organization to improve the human resources segment of their new employee orientation.

Alignment between learning objectives and item types in assessments

Method
Type of Test Item
Sample Behaviors
Conventional
True/False
identify, recognize, select, choose
Matching
identify, recognize, select, discriminate, locate
Fill-in-the-Blank
construct, develop, discuss, define, generate, identify, solve, locate, state
Multiple Choice
choose, discriminate, identify, recognize, select, solve, locate
Short Answer
define, discriminate, evaluate, identify, locate, state, name, select, judge, solve
Essay
construct, discuss, develop, evaluate, generate, judge, solve
Performance
Performance/Product Checklists
construct, solve, develop, generate, locate, perform, operate
Assessment Rubric
choose, construct, generate, operate, perform


Alignment according to Gagne's taxonomy:

Method
Type of Test Item
Learning Domain
Conventional
True/False
Verbal Information Concepts
Matching
Fill-in-the-Blank
Multiple Choice
Performance
Performance/Product Checklists
Procedures/Rules
Assessment Rubric
Problem Solving/Cognitive Strategies

Analysis Phase

The difficult part of this project has not been meeting with the service learning partner or getting the information we need, it has been the deciding on what content is good or bad, correct or incorrect for charting in the goal analysis. At the start, everyone except James wanted to jump into reorganizing the Hospice orientation as we thought it should be, however the assignment called for drawing how the system is currently implemented.

As I sketched out the process of HR orientation with Michelle, we created skill boxes and verbs for what the client wanted to accomplish. Note, what the client wants to accomplish is different from what they are currently presenting, so the charting came to a halt as our group members debated four different interpretations of the assignment. Michelle interpreted the assignment to mean it was possible we were supposed to be sketching how Hospice actually does orientation, now. Since my verbs matched more of an ideal implementation of Hospice, it would have involved a total re-think of the goal analysis. Three of us turned out to be correct anyway, but only in parts. In retrospect, it might have been helpful to have just asked our questions earlier instead of debating our interpretations of the assignment requirements.

One of the most useful things I used during the assignments was the Gagne's list of verbs. I had trouble with adding verbs to the goal analysis because I imagined the verbs had to be some physical action I could observe. I hadn't considered the verb could just as easily been someone speaking a one-word answer to a question. As I started connecting verbal arrows to other boxes in the Visio file I created, I realized I have only a vague understanding of how to create the flow of connections for verbal information. I will need to re-read that section of Dick, Carey, and Carey to properly contribute my input to the team version of the analysis.

In a few partial group discussions, we played with alternative ideas methods for presenting the orientation content in the current program. For example, I think all of my group members believe most, if not all of the paperwork signed during orientation can be done individually, without consuming HR's staff time. By downloading the forms online, receiving them by mail, or coming in to review the current packet on their own shouldn't require as significant amount of time as HR is putting in now. If HR allowed employees alternative methods or opportunities to file personnel paperwork, they could use more orientation time to orient the new employees to the culture of the client's organization.

After reading draft assignments from other students in class, I had a new appreciation for following the flow of charts. Creating the proper breaks in flow for pagination, drawing arrows in the right direction, and picking the best verbs makes a big difference in what information a chart conveys. Even though 2c said the goal statement in the draft I presented in class was acceptable, I believe after re-reading Unit 1 Supplement, it can be improved to better clarify the learner, the real-life context, and the available tools for accomplishing goals. Right now, the goal I stated feels very heavy in what learners will be able to do. Michelle and James far exceeded my expectations of time commitments to this group project, and I have met with them in person and by phone on several occasions outside regularly scheduled face-to-face class meetings. I will be meeting again with James on Monday to clarify terms in the team learner and context analysis.

The attached assignment includes a goal and subskills analysis, and learner and context analysis of a non-profit.

AttachmentSize
HOTC Learner&Context Analysis 20051002 blacked out.pdf64.56 KB
HOTC goal&ssa 20051002 blacked out.pdf56.35 KB
HOTC analysis phase feedback.pdf45.45 KB

Bloom's taxonomy

Measurable Action Verbs for Generating Performance Objectives based on Bloom’s Taxonomy for Learned Outcomes.

Knowledge Level Comprehension Level Application Level

Arrange
Acquire
Define
Distinguish
Duplicate
Identify
Label
List
Match
Memorize
Name
Order
Recognize
Recall
Repeat
Reproduce

Classify
Demonstrate
Describe
Discuss
Distinguish
Explain
Express
Identify
Interpret
Locate
Recognize
Rephrase
Report
Represent
Restate
Review
Select
Sort Tell
Translate
Transform

Apply
Classify
Demonstrate
Dramatize
Develop
Employ
Generalize
Illustrate
Interpret
Operate
Organize
Prepare
Practice
Reconstruct
Relate
Schedule
Sketch
Solve
Transfer
Use

Analysis Level Synthesis Level Evaluation Level

Analyze
Appraise
Calculate
Categorize
Classify
Compare
Contrast
Criticize
Deduce
Detect
Diagram
Differentiate
Discriminate
Distinguish
Examine
Experiment
Inventory
Question
Test

Arrange
Assemble
Collect
Compose
Construct
Create
Derive
Design
Document
Formulate
Manage
Modify
Organize
Plan
Prepare
Produce
Relate
Set up
Synthesize
Tell
Transmit
Write

Agree
Appraise
Argue
Assess
Assume
Attack
Challenge
Choose
Compare
Contrast
Decide
Defend
Estimate
Evaluate
Judge
Predict
Rate
Score
Select
Support
Validate
Value

Chunking instructional units

Alternative Methods for Chunking Units into Lessons based on 5E Instructional Strategy

Instructional Unit 1

    Instructional Event (Engage)

 

Lesson 1

    Instructional Event (Explore)

    Instructional Event (Explain)

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Instructional Unit 2

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Lesson 2.1

    Instructional Event (Explore)

Lesson 2.2

    Instructional Event (Explain)

Lesson 2.3

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

Lesson 2.4

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Lesson 2.5

Instructional Unit 3

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Lesson 3.1

    Instructional Event (Explore)

 

Lesson 3.2

    Instructional Event (Explain)

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Lesson 3.3

Instructional Unit 4

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Lesson 4.1

    Instructional Event (Explore)

    Instructional Event (Explain)

Lesson 4.2

Lesson 4.3

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Lesson 4.4

Instructional Unit 5

    Instructional Event (Engage)

 

Lesson 5.1

 

Lesson 5.2

    Instructional Event (Explore)

    Instructional Event (Explain)

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Instructional Unit 6

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Lesson 6.1

    Instructional Event (Explore)

    Instructional Event (Explain)

 

Lesson 6.2

 

Lesson 6.2

 

Lesson 6.4

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Instructional Unit 7

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Unit Overview

    Instructional Event (Explore)

Lesson 7.1

    Instructional Event (Explain)

Lesson 7.2

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

Lesson 7.3

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Unit Summary

Instructional Unit 8

    Instructional Event (Engage)

Unit Overview

    Instructional Event (Explore)

Lesson
8.1

 

Lesson
8.2

 

Lesson
8.3

    Instructional Event (Explain)

    Instructional Event (Elaborate)

    Instructional Event (Evaluate)

Unit Summary

Defining performance objectives

Dick, Carey, and Carey (2005) outline a set of requirements for performance objectives in an instructional unit, including audience, behavior, condition, and degree. The audience is the target population to complete the assigned objective. Behavior includes an action verb to describe what the learners are expected to know and/or be able to do. Cues, stimuli, tools, scope, and complexity are part of the condition in a performance objective. Finally, the acceptable performance is defined by the degree. A complete objective would have all four components, for example, "provided with a list of insects, first graders will write the list of insects in alphabetical order with 90% accuracy."

Gagne verbs

Domain

Measurable Verbs/Behaviors

Verbal Information
Names, labels, facts or a collection of propositions

Arrange
Acquire
Define
Distinguish
Duplicate
Identify

Label
List
Match
Memorize
Name
Order

Recognize
Recall
Repeat
Reproduce

Concepts
A set of objects, symbols or events grouped on basis of shared characteristics that can be referenced by a name or symbol.

Classify
Describe
Discuss
Distinguish
Explain
Express
Report

Represent
Identify
Interpret
Locate
Recognize
Rephrase
Restate

Review
Select
Sort Tell
Translate
Transform

Procedures & Rules
Relational rules or principals and procedural rules or procedures.

Apply
Classify
Demonstrate
Dramatize
Develop
Employ
Generalize
Illustrate

Interpret
Inventory
Operate
Organize
Prepare
Reconstruct
Relate
Practice

Set up
Schedule
Sketch
Solve
Transfer
Use

Problem Solving
Combine learned principles, procedures, verbal information and cognitive strategies in a unique way within a domain to solve original problems

Analyze
Appraise
Assemble
Calculate
Contrast
Criticize
Compose
Construct
Create

Deduce
Detect
Derive
Diagram
Design
Estimate
Examine
Experiment
Formulate

Hypothesize
Plan
Produce
Question
Synthesize
Test
Validate

Cognitive Strategy
Internally organized skills whose function is to regulate and monitor the utilization of concepts and rules

Agree
Appraise
Argue
Assess
Assume
Attack
Challenge

Choose
Compare
Contrast
Decide
Defend
Evaluate
Judge

Modify
Predict
Rate
Select
Support
Synthesize
Value

Grounded instructional strategies

Designing Alternative e-Learning Environments

Grounded Instructional Strategies

Grounded instructional strategies are rooted in established theories and research in human learning, and form the basis for designing alternative e-learning environments. Table 1 outlines the primary instructional events prescribed by various instructional strategies. Each strategy is grouped according to general approaches. Proceeding pages further details the events associated with each strategy.

Table 1. Primary events associated with grounded instructional strategies

Learner-Centered Approaches

Adaptive Instructional Design
(Schwartz, Lin, Brophy & Bransford, 1992)

1.   Look Ahead & Reflect Back
2.   Present Initial Challenge
3.   Generate Ideas
4.   Present Multiple Perspectives
5.   Research and Revise
6.   Test Your Mettle
7.   Go Public
8.   Progressive Deepening
9.   General Reflection and Decisions
10. Assessment

 

Collaborative
Problem-Solving

(Nelson, 1992)

1.  Build Readiness
2.  Form and Norm Groups
3. Determine Preliminary Problem
4.  Define and Assign Roles
5.  Engage in Problem-Solving
6. Finalize Solution
7.  Synthesize and Reflect
8.  Assess Products and Processes
9. Provide Closure

 

Eight Events of Student-Centered Learning
(Hirumi, 2002, 1998, 1996)

1. Set Learning Challenge
2. Negotiate Goals and Objectives
3. Negotiate Learning Strategy
4. Construct Knowledge
5. Negotiate Performance Criteria
6. Assess Learning
7. Provide Feedback (Steps 1-6)
8. Communicate Results


Inquiry Training
(Joyce, Weil, & Showers, 1992)

1.  Confrontation with the Problem
2.  Data Verification
3.  Data Experimentation
4.  Organizing, Formulating and Explanation
5.  Analysis of inquiry process

 

WebQuest
(Dodge, 1998)

1.  Introduction
2.  Task
3.  Process
4.  Resources
5. Evaluation
6.  Conclusion

 

Constructivist Learning
(Jonassen, 1992)

1.  Select Problem
2.  Provide Related Cases
3.  Provide Information
4.  Provide Cognitive Tools
5.  Provide Conversation Tools
6.  Provide Social Support

 

BSCS 5E Model
(Bybee, 2002)

1.  Engage
2.  Explore
3.  Explain
4.  Elaborate
5.  Evaluate

 

Problem-Based Learning
(Barrows, 1985)

1.   Start New Class
2.   Start a New Problem
3.   Problem Follow-Up
4.   Performance Presentation(s)
5.  After Conclusion of Problem

 

Inductive Thinking
(Taba, 1967)

1.  Concept Formation
2.  Interpretation of Data
3.  Application of Principles

 

Jurisprudential Inquiry
(Oliver & Shaver, 1971)

1.  Orientation to the Case
2.  Identifying the Issues
3.  Taking Positions
4.  Exploring the Stance(s)
5.  Refining and Qualifying the Positions
6.  Testing Factual Assumptions Behind Qualified Positions


Case-Based Reasoning
(Aamodt & Plaza, 1994)

1. Present New Case/Problem
2. Retrieve Similar Cases
3. Reuse Information
4. Revise Proposed Solution
5. Retain Useful Experiences

 

Experiential Approaches


Experiential Learning
(Pfeiffer & Jones, 1975)

1.  Experience
2.  Publish
3.  Process
4.  Internalize
5.  Generalize
6.  Apply

 

Simulation Model
(Joyce, Weil, & Showers, 1992)

1.  Orientation
2.  Participant Training
3.  Simulation Operations
4.  Participant Debriefing
5.  Appraise and redesign the simulation

 

Learning by Doing
(Schank, Berman & Macpherson, 1999)

1.   Define Goals
2.   Set Mission
3.   Present Cover Story
4.   Establish Roles
5.   Operate Scenarios
6.   Provide Resources
7.   Provide Feedback

Teacher-Directed Approaches


Nine Events of Instruction
(Gagne, 1974, 1977)

1.  Gain Attention
2.  Inform Learner of Objective(s)
3.  Recall Prior Knowledge
4.  Present Stimulus Materials
5.  Provide Learning Guidance
6.  Elicit Performance
7.  Provide Feedback
8.  Assess Performance
9.  Enhance Retention and Transfer

 

Direct Instruction
(Joyce, Weil, & Showers, 1992)

1.   Orientation
2.   Presentation
3.   Structured Practice
4.   Guided Practice
5.   Independent Practice

 

 

Elements of Lesson Design
(Hunter, 1990)

1.  Anticipatory Set
2.  Objective and Purpose
3.  Input
4.  Modeling
5. Check for Understanding
6.  Guided Practice
7. Independent Practice

 

Alternative Approaches


4Mat System
(McCarthy, 1987)

1.  Create an experience
2.  Reflect/Analyze experience
3.  Integrate reflective analysis
4.  Develop concepts/skills
5. Practice defined “givens”
6.  Practice adding something
7. Analyze application
8.  Apply to new experience

 

SQR
(Maier, 1996)

1.  Summarize
2.  Question
3.  Response

 

SQ3R
(Robinson, 1961)

1.  Survey
2.  Question
3. Read
4. Recite
5. Review

Learner-Centered Approaches to Teaching and Learning

Adaptive Instructional Design
(Schwartz, Lin, Brophy & Bransford, 1992)

The primary goal of this theory is to teach a deep understanding of disciplines, while simultaneously fostering the skills of problem-solving, collaboration and communication, through the use of problem-based learning, followed by more open-ended project based learning.

1.     Look Ahead and Reflect Back

    • Provides an understanding of the goals, context and challenges
    • Provides an opportunity to try it right now (pretest)
    • Consists of motivational series of images, narrative, and questions
    • Helps students represent a specific problem as an example of a larger set of issues

2.     Present Initial Challenge
2.1       Helps students develop a shared, initial mental model of what’s to be learned
2.2       Challenge selection: Motivating, interesting, invites student-generated ideas
3.     Generate Ideas

    •     Helps students make their own thinking explicit
    •     Helps students see what other students are thinking
    •     Encourages sharing of ideas
    •     Helps teacher assess current state of student knowledge
    •     Provides students with a baseline to more easily see how much they learn

4.     Present Multiple Perspectives

    •     Provide a way to introduce students to vocabulary and perspectives of experts
    •     Allow students to compare their ideas to experts’ ideas
    •     Provide guidance on what students need to learn about
    •     Provide expertise, guidance, models of social practice in the domain
    •     Provide realistic standards of performance
    •     Indicate that multiple perspectives exist in the domain
  • Research and Revise (to help students explore a challenge)
    •     Consult resources
    •     Collaborate with other students
    •     Listen to “just-in-time” lectures
    •     Complete skill-building lessons
    •     Look at legacies left by other students
    •     Conduct simulations and hands-on experiments
  • Test Your Mettle (formative assessment)
    •     Multiple choice tests, checklists, essays, experiments, projects
    •     Feedback suggests which resources to consult to reach target

7.     Go Public

    •     Present best solutions (oral, multimedia, print) and leave legacy of tips and ideas for future students
    •     Makes thinking visible
    •     Helps students learn to assess others and themselves
    •     Helps set standards for achievement
    •     Helps students learn from each other
    •     Motivates students to do well

Collaborative Problem-Solving
(Nelson, 1992)

The goals are to develop content knowledge in complex domains, problem-solving and critical thinking skills, and collaborative skills. It should only be used when those types of learning are paramount and when the students and instructor are receptive to this approach to learning, with its shift in roles and power relationships.

1.     Build Readiness
1.1       Overview of collaborative problem solving process
1.2       Develop an authentic problem or project scenario to anchor instructional and learning activities
1.3       Provide instruction and practice in group process skills
2.     Form and Norm Groups
2.1       Form small heterogeneous work groups
2.2       Encourage groups to establish operational guidelines
3.     Determine Preliminary Problem
3.1       Negotiate a common understanding of the problem
3.2       Identify learning issues and goals
3.3       Brainstorm preliminary solutions or project plans
3.4       Select and develop initial design plan
3.5       Identify sources of needed resources
3.6       Gather preliminary information to validate the design plan
4.     Define and Assign Roles
4.1       Identify the principal roles needed to complete the design plan
4.2       Negotiate the assignment of roles
5.     Engage in Problem-Solving
5.1       Refine and evolve the design plan
5.2       Identify and assign tasks
5.3       Acquire needed information, resources, and expertise
5.4       Collaborate with instructor to acquire additional resources and skills needed
5.5       Disseminate acquired information, resources, and expertise to the other group members
5.6       Engage in solution- or project-development work
5.7       Report regularly on individual contributions and group activities
5.8       Participate in intergroup collaborations and evaluations
5.9       Conduct formative evaluations of the solution or project
6.     Finalize Solution
6.1       Draft the final version of solution or project
6.2       Conduct final evaluation or usability test of the solution or project
6.3       Revise and complete the final version of the solution or project
7.     Synthesize and Reflect
7.1       Identify learning gains
7.2       Debrief experiences and feelings about the process
7.3       Reflect on group and individual learning processes
8.     Assess Products and Processes
8.1       Evaluate the products and artifact created
8.2       Evaluate the processes used
9.     Provide Closure

Eight Events for
Student Centered Learning
(Hirumi, 2002, 1998, 1996)

Based on constructivist theories of human learning, Hirumi presents seven instructional events that occur during a course to help students construct their own meaning based on their own interests and prior knowledge structures, and to promote independent, life-long learning:

1.     Set Learning Challenge (Authentic Problem) for class
2.     Negotiate Learning Goals and Objectives with learners
3.     Negotiate Learning Strategy with learners
4.     Learners Construct Knowledge
5.     Negotiate Performance Criteria with learners
6.     Assess Learning (Self, Peer & Expert Assessment)
7.     Provide Feedback (Throughout Steps 1-6)
8.     Communicate Results

Inquiry
Training Model
(Joyce, Weil, &
Showers, 1992)

This model is designed to promote strategies of inquiry and the values and attitudes that are essential to an inquiring mind including: process skills (e.g., observing, collecting and organizing data), active learning, verbal expression, tolerance of ambiguity, and logical thinking.

1.       Confrontation with the Problem
1.1       Explain inquiry procedures
1.2       Present discrepant event
2.       Data Gathering - Verification
2.1       Verify nature of objects and conditions
2.2       Verify the occurrence of the problem situation
3.       Data Gathering - Experimentation
3.1       Isolate relevant variables
3.2       Hypothesize (and test) casual relationships
4.       Organizing, Formulating and Explanation - Formulate rules or explanations
5.       Analysis of Inquiry Process - Analyze inquiry strategy and develop more effective ones.

WebQuest
(Dodge, 1998)

WebQuest is an inquiry-oriented strategy in which most or all of the information used by learners is drawn from the Web.

1.     The Introduction orients students and captures their interest

  • The Task describes the activity’s end product
  • The Process explains strategies students should use to complete the task
  • The Resources are the Web sites students use to complete the task
  • The Evaluation measures the results of the activity
  • The Conclusion sums up the activity and encourages students to reflect on its process and results

Constructivist Learning
(Jonassen, 1992)

 

The primary goal of this theory is to foster problem-solving and conceptual development. It is intended for ill-defined or ill-structured domains.

1.     Select Problem
1.1       Problem should be interesting, relevant and engaging, to foster learner ownership
1.2       Problem should be ill-defined or ill-structured
1.3       Problem should be authentic (what practitioners do)
1.4       Problem design should address its context, representation, and manipulation space
2.     Provide Related Cases or worked examples to enable case-based reasoning and enhance cognitive flexibility.
3.     Provide Information
3.1       Provide learner-selectable information just-in-time
3.2       Available information should be relevant and easily accessible
4.     Provide Cognitive Tools that scaffold required skills, including problem-representation, knowledge-modeling, performance-support, and information-gathering tools
5.     Provide Conversation and Collaboration Tools to support discourse communities, knowledge-building communities, and/or communities of learners.
6.     Provide Social/Contextual Support for the learning environment

Additional Instructional Activities to Support Learning:

  • Model the performance and the covert cognitive processes
  • Coach learners by providing motivational prompts, monitoring and regulating the learner’s performance, provoking reflection, and/or perturbing learners’ models.
  • Scaffold the learner by adjusting task difficulty, restructuring the task, and/or providing alternative assessments

BSCS 5E Model
(Bybee, 2002)

The natural inquiry of children and problem-solving of adults follow a pattern of initial engagement, exploration of alternatives, formation of explanations, use of the explanations, and evaluation of the explanations based on efficacy and responses from others.  Activities encourage conceptual change and a progressive re-forming of ideas.

1.     Engage activities provide the opportunity for teachers to identify students’ current concepts and misconceptions. Although provided by a teacher or structured by curriculum materials, these activities introduce major ideas in problem situations. How do students’ explain this situation?
2.     Explore activities provide a common set of experiences for students and opportunities for them to “test” their ideas with their own experiences and those of peers and the teacher.  How do students’ exploration and explanation of experiences compare with others?
3.     Explain activities provide opportunities for students to use their previous experiences to recognize misconceptions and to begin making conceptual sense of the activities through construction of new ideas and understandings. Allows introduction of formal language, terms and content information that makes students’ previous experiences easier to describe and explain.
4.     Elaborate activities apply or extend the student’s developing concepts in new activities and relate their previous experiences to the current activities. How does the new explanation work in a different situation?
5.     Evaluate activities serve as a summative assessment of what students know and can do. How do students understand and apply concepts and abilities?

Problem-Based Learning
(Barrows, 1985)

Disenchanted with medical students’ ability to apply information learned from lectures, Barrow’s developed this model to enhance transfer.

1.     Start New Class
1.1       Introductions
1.2       Climate Setting (including teacher/tutor role)
2.     Start New Problem
2.1       Set problem
2.2       Bring problem home
2.3       Describe the product/performance required
2.4       Assign tasks
2.5       Reason through the problem (i.e., ideas/hypotheses, facts, learning issues and action plan).
2.6       Commitment as to probable outcome
2.7       Learning issues shaping/assignment
2.8       Resource identification
2.9       Schedule follow-up
3.     Problem Follow-Up
3.1       Resources used and their critique
3.2       Reassess the problem (i.e., ideas/hypotheses, facts, learning issues and action plan).
4.     Performance Presentation(s)
5.     After Conclusion of Problem
5.1       Knowledge abstraction and summary
5.2       Self-evaluation

Inductive-Thinking Model
(Taba, 1967)

Based on information-processing theories of human learning, the inductive-thinking model was developed to enhance students’ acquisition of concepts, information processing skills as well as their convergent use of information to solve problems.

1.     Concept Formation
1.1       Enumeration and listing
1.2       Grouping
1.3       Labeling, Categorizing
2.     Interpretation of Data
2.1       Identify critical relationships
2.2       Explore relationships
2.3       Make inferences
3.     Application of Principles
3.1       Predicting consequences, explaining unfamiliar phenomena, hypothesizing
3.2       Explaining and/or supporting the predictions and hypotheses
3.3       Verifying predictions

Jurisprudential
Inquiry Approach
(Oliver & Shaver, 1971)

Based on Socratic modes of discussion, the purpose of this model is to help students resolve complex, controversial issues within the context of a productive social order:

1.     Orientation to the Case
2.     Identifying the Issues
3.     Taking Positions
4.     Exploring the Stance(s), patterns of argumentation
5.     Refining and Qualifying the positions
6.     Testing Factual Assumptions behind qualified positions


Case-Based Reasoning
(Aamodt & Plaza, 1994)

 

Case-based reasoning is a problem solving paradigm that utilizes the specific knowledge of previously experienced, concrete problem situations (cases). A new problem is solved by finding a similar past case, and reusing it in the new problem situation.

  • Present: new case or problem
  • Retrieve: Given a target problem, retrieve cases from memory that are relevant to solving it. A case consists of a problem, its solution, and, typically, annotations about how the solution was derived. For example, suppose Fred wants to prepare blueberry pancakes. Being a novice cook, the most relevant experience he can recall is one in which he successfully made plain pancakes. The procedure he followed for making the plain pancakes, together with justifications for decisions made along the way, constitutes Fred's retrieved case.
  • Reuse: Map the solution from the previous case to the target problem. This may involve adapting the solution as needed to fit the new situation. In the pancake example, Fred must adapt his retrieved solution to include the addition of blueberries.
  • Revise: Having mapped the previous solution to the target situation, test the new solution in the real world (or a simulation) and, if necessary, revise. Suppose Fred adapted his pancake solution by adding blueberries to the batter. After mixing, he discovers that the batter has turned blue -- an undesired effect. This suggests the following revision: delay the addition of blueberries until after the batter has been ladled into the pan.
  • Retain: After the solution has been successfully adapted to the target problem, store the resulting experience as a new case in memory. Fred, accordingly, records his newfound procedure for making blueberry pancakes, thereby enriching his set of stored experiences, and better preparing him for future pancake-making demands.

Experiential Approaches to Teaching and Learning

Experiential
Learning Model
(Pfeiffer & Jones, 1975)

Based on the belief that people learn best by doing, the experiential learning model can start with didactic (passive) forms of instruction but soon progresses to experiential (active) forms of learning.

  1. Experience – Immerse learner in “authentic” experience (e.g., real or simulated job task).
  2. Publish – Talking or writing about experience. Sharing observations, thoughts, and feelings.
  3. Process – Debrief: Interpret published information, defining patterns, discrepancies and overall dynamics, making sense of the information generated by group.
  4. Internalize – Private process, learner reflects on lessons learned, means of managing conflicting data and requirements for future learning.
  5. Generalize – Develop hypotheses, form generalizations and reach conclusions from information and knowledge gained from lesson.
  6. Apply – Use information and knowledge gained from lesson to make decisions and solve problems.

Simulation
Model
(Joyce, Weil, &
Showers, 1992)

Based on the application of cybernetic principles to education, the purpose of this model is to help students develop skills and knowledge by examining the consequences of their actions.

1.     Orientation

    1.     Present broad topic of simulation and major concepts
    2.     Explain simulation and gaming

1.3       Give overview of the simulation
2.     Participant Training
2.1       Set-up scenario (rules, roles, procedures, scoring, types of decisions, goals)
2.2       Assign roles
2.3       Hold abbreviated practice session
3.     Simulation Operations
3.1       Conduct game activity and game administration
3.2       Feedback and evaluation (of performance and effects of decisions)
3.3       Clarify misconceptions
3.4       Continue simulation
4.     Participant Debriefing
4.1       Summarize events and perceptions
4.2       Summarize difficulties and insights
4.3       Analyze process
4.4       Compare simulation activity to the real world

    1.     Appraise and redesign the simulation

Learning by Doing
(Schank, Berman & Macpherson, 1999)

The primary goal is to foster skill development and the learning of factual information in the context of how it will be used. Assumes that learning occurs best in context of a goal that is relevant, meaningful, and interesting to students, and when content knowledge is learned in context of relevant tasks closely related to how students will use it outside of the learning environment.

1.     Define Goals
1.1       Process knowledge goals
1.2       Content knowledge goals
2.     Set Mission
2.1       Must be motivational
2.2       Must be somewhat realistic
3.     Present Cover Story
3.1       Must be motivating and create the need for the mission
3.2       Must allow enough opportunities to practice the skills and seek the knowledge
4.     Establish Roles (who the students will play)
4.1       Must be one who uses the necessary skills and knowledge
4.2       Must be motivating
5.     Operate Scenarios
5.1       Must be closely related to both the mission and the goals
5.2       Must have decision points with consequences that become evident
5.3       The consequences must indicate progress toward completing the mission
5.4       A negative consequence must be understand as an expectation failure
5.5       Must be plenty of operations for the student to do (to spent most of their time practicing skills)
5.6       Should not require more than what the goals call for
6.     Provide Resources
6.1       Must provide the information the students need to succeed in their mission
6.2       Information must be well organized and readily accessible
6.3       Information is often best provided in the form of stories
7.     Provide Feedback
7.1       Must be situated, so it is indexed properly as an expectation failure
7.2       Must be just-in-time, so the student will use it
7.3       Can be given in three ways (a) consequences of actions, (b) coaches, (c) domain experts’ stories about similar experiences.

 

Teacher-Directed Approaches to Teaching and Learning

Nine Events of Instruction
(Gagne, 1974, 1977; Gagne & Medsker, 1996)

Based on information processing theories and models of human learning, Gagne posits that every unit of instruction should contain the following nine events to facilitate student learning:

1.     Gain Attention
2.     Inform Learners of Objective(s)
3.     Stimulate Recall of Prior Knowledge
4.     Present Stimulus Materials
5.     Provide Learning Guidance
6.     Elicit Performance
7.     Provide Feedback about Performance
8.     Assess Performance
9.     Enhance Retention and Transfer

Direct Instruction Model

(Joyce, Weil, &
Showers, 1992)

Based on behaviorist theories of human learning, this model is designed to facilitate learning through stimulus-response conditioning and is said to generate and sustain motivation through pacing and reinforcement.

1.     Orientation
1.1       Establish lesson content
1.2       Review previous learning
1.3       Establish lesson objectives
1.4       Establish lesson procedures
2.     Presentation
2.1       Explain/demonstrate new concept or skill
2.2       Provide visual representation of task
2.3       Check for understanding
3.     Structured Practice
3.1       Lead group through practice example in lock step
3.2       Students respond to questions
3.3       Provide corrective feedback for errors and reinforce correct practice
4.     Guided Practice
4.1       Students practice semi-independently
4.2       Circulate, monitor student practice
4.3       Provide feedback through praise, prompt, and leave
5.     Independent Practice
5.1       Students practice independently at home or in class
5.2       Provide delayed feedback

Elements of
Lesson Design
(Hunter, 1990)

Widely known model for preparing lesson plans taught to pre-service teachers. Often used to evaluate lesson plans prepared by practicing educators.

  1. Anticipatory Set – How will students’ attention be focused?
  2. Objective and Purpose – What will students learn and why?
  3. Input – What new information will be discussed?
  4. Modeling – How can teacher illustrate new skill or content?
  5. Check for Understanding – How can teacher determine if students are learning?
  6. Guided Practice – What opportunities are given to practice new materials?
  7. Independent Practice – How can assignments be used for retention and transfer?

 



Alternative Approaches to Teaching and Learning

4Mat
System Model


(McCarthy, 1987)

Based on research and literature on learning styles, this eight-step cycle of instruction is meant to capitalize on students’ learning styles and brain dominance processing strengths. Rather than focus on one learning style, this method encourages students to examine and experience all learning styles.

1.     Create an experience
2.     Reflect/Analyze Experience
3.     Integrate reflective analysis into concepts
4.     Develop concepts/skills
5.     Practice defined “givens”
6.     Practice adding something of oneself
7.     Analyze application for relevance, usefulness
8.     Apply to new more complex experience

SQR Model
(Maier, 1996)

This strategy is designed to encourage students’ to take responsibility for their learning and to give students a way to generate their own ideas. In general, this strategy is geared toward enhancing student learning from reading, but may be applied in other context.

1.     Summarize
1.1       Read materials
1.2       Write a summary of the materials in journal
2.     Question
2.1       Write question on the materials in journal
2.2       Discuss summaries and questions in small group
2.3       Select “best” question to share with whole class based on ability to provoke engaging discussions
2.4       Discuss “best” questions with whole class utilizing questioning techniques
3.     Response - Write a response to the small group or whole group class discussion (summary of main points)

SQ3R Study Strategy
(Robinson, 1961)

This strategy is designed to help students develop their study skills, particularly in relation to reading assignments.

1.     Survey - Readers preview materials to develop general outline for organizing information.
2.     Question - Reader raises questions with expectation of finding answers in materials
3.     Read - Reader attempts to answer questions by reading
4.     Recite - Reader answers questions out loud or in writing
5.     Review - Reader rereads portions of materials to verify answers given during previous step

 

References

Aamodt, A. & Plaza, E. (1994). Case-Based Reasoning: Foundational Issues, Methodological Variations, and Systems Approaches. Artificial Intelligence Communications, 7(1), 39-59. Retrieved March 15, 2005 from the World Wide Web: http://www.lai-cbr.org/theindex.html.

Barrows, H. S. (1985). How to design a problem based curriculum for the preclinical years. New York: Springer Publishing Co.

Bybee, R. W. (2002). Scientific inquiry, student learning, and the science curriculum. In R. W. Bybee (Ed.). Learning Science and the Science of Learning (pp. 25-36). Arlington, VA: NSTA Press.

Dodge, B. (1998). The WebQuest Page. Retrieved  April 3, 2000 from the World Wide Web: http://edweb.sdsu.edu/webquest/webquest.html

Gagne, R.M. (1977). The Conditions of Learning (3rd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston.

Gagne, R.M. (1974). Principles of Instructional Design. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

Gagne, R.M., Medsker, K.L. (1996). The conditions of learning: Training applications. Orlando, FL: Harcourt Brace College Publishers.

Hirumi, A. (2002). Student-centered, technology-rich, learning environments (SCenTRLE): Operationalizing constructivist approaches to teaching and learning. Journal for Technology and Teacher Education, 10(4), 497-537.

Hirumi, A. (1998, March). The Systematic Design of Student-Centered, Technology-Rich Learning Environments. Invited guest presentation given at the first Education Graduate Students and Academic Staff Regional Meeting, Guadalajara, Mexico.

Hirumi, A. (1996, February). Student-Centered, Technology-Rich Learning environments: A cognitive-constructivist approach. Concurrent session held at the Association for Educational Communication and Technology Conference, Indianapolis, Indiana.

Hunter, M. (1990). Lesson Design Helps Achieve the Goals of Science Instruction. Educational Leadership. 48(4), 79-81.

Jonassen, D. (1992). Designing constructivist learning environments. In C. M. Reigeluth (Ed.). Instructional Design Theories and Models: A New Paradigm of Instructional Theory (pp. 215-239). Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Joyce, B., Weil, M., & Showers, B. (1992). Models of Teaching (4th ed.). Needham Heights, MA: Allyn and Bacon.

McCarthy, B. (1987). The 4MAT System: Teaching to Learning Styles with Right/Left Mode Techniques. Barrington, Ill.: Excel, Inc.

Nelson, L. (1992). Collaborative Problem-Solving. In C. M. Reigeluth (Ed.). Instructional Design Theories and Models: A New Paradigm of Instructional Theory (pp. 241-267). Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Oliver, D., & Shaver, J. (1971). Cases and Controversy: A Guide to Teaching the Public Issues Series. Middletown, CT: American Education Publishers.

Pfeiffer, J.W., & Jones, J.E. (1975) Introduction to the structured experiences section. In J.E. Jones & J.W. Pfeiffer (Eds.). The 1975 annual handbook for group facilitators. La Jolla, CA: University Associates.

Shank, R. C., Berman, T. R., & Macpherson, K. A. (1992). Learning by doing. In C. M. Reigeluth (Ed). Instructional Design Theories and Models: A New Paradigm of Instructional Theory (pp. 161-179). Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Schwartz, Lin, Brophy, S., & Bransford, J. D. (1992). Toward the development of flexibly adaptive instructional designs. In C. M. Reigeluth (Ed). Instructional Design Theories and Models: A New Paradigm of Instructional Theory (pp. 183-213). Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Taba, H. (1967). Teacher's Handbook for Elementary School Social Studies. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Inc.

Online Examples

Adaptive Instructional Design (Schwartz, Lin, Brophy & Bransford, 1992):
http://www.personal.psu.edu/users/h/x/hxk208/INSYS525/K_base4.htm

BSCS 5E Model (Bybee, 2002):
http://cte.jhu.edu/techacademy/fellows/ullrich/webquest/ScienceLesson.html

Case-based reasoning (Aamodt & Plaza, 1994):
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Case-based_reasoning

Collaborative Problem-Solving (Nelson, 1992):
http://www.personal.psu.edu/users/m/x/mxm939/Prob3.html

Constructivist Learning (Jonassen, 1992):
http://tiger.coe.missouri.edu/~jonassen/courses/CLE/index.html

Elements of Lesson Design (Hunter, 1990):
http://www.huntington.edu/education/lessonplanning/Hunter.html

Inductive Thinking (Taba, 1967):
http://imet.csus.edu/fundamentals/inductive/

Inquiry training (Joyce, Weil, & Showers, 1992):
http://www.sasked.gov.sk.ca/docs/policy/incel/section_4.html

Jurisprudential Inquiry (Oliver & Shaver, 1971):
http://www.tki.org.nz/r/health/cia/olympic/learn_e/own_e.php

Learning by doing (Schank et al, 1999):
http://www.engines4ed.org/hyperbook/nodes/NODE-121-pg.html

Nine Events of Instruction (Gagne, 1974, 1977):
http://tip.psychology.org/gagne.html

Problem-Based Learning (Barrows, 1985):
http://www.usc.edu/hsc/dental/ccmb/usc-csp/titlproclanelle.htm

Simulation model (Joyce, Weil, & Showers, 1992):
http://imet.csus.edu/imet6/morte/classes/281/Simulations.htm

SQR (Maier, 1996):
http://www.readingonline.org/electronic/nasa/sqr.htm

SQ3R (Robinson, 1961):
http://www.ncrel.org/litweb/adolescent/strategies/sq3r.php

WebQuest (Dodge, 1998):
http://projects.edtech.sandi.net/staffdev/buildingblocks/p-index.htm

4Mat System (McCarthy, 1987):
http://www.geocities.com/jeniskanen/4mat2.htm

Instructional Treatment Plan

The instructional treatment plan builds on the analysis phase of the instructional design process. Some of the elements of the subskills analysis could be plugged right into the assessment alignment table. The organization I've been working with has an uncommon element of attitudinal and emotional importance, therefore the objectives of this plan include attitudinal elements otherwise not seen in a "proper" instructional treatment plan. Version 2.1 is a draft and the name of the organization has been removed since I didn't ask them about posting this to the internet.

One of the major stumbling blocks in completing this assignment was choosing a grounded instructional strategy. The assignment had a template, however the default Gagné instructional strategy seemed to be better suited for classroom, face-to-face instruction. Part of the effort in this project has been to present a large part of the orientation material in a web-based form, and WebQuests, paired with job aids, seemed like the closest grounded instructional strategy to our goal.

In the process of researching WebQuests, I developed a list of helpful resources such as the WebQuest template. I even signed up for a QuestGarden account, a PHP-based site for generating WebQuests. My professor, Dr. Hirumi, studied under faculty at SDSU. A guide on the building blocks of a WebQuest was also helpful in guiding the instructional strategy details for the treatment plan in my assignment.

During this assignment, I realized I'm rusty on rules for creating surveys. I used to know some good tips on trying to dumb-proof surveys, but I need a refresher. I think the Ph.D. program will have a survey course later in my plan of study. During the implementation of assessment tools later in this project, I may need to refer to my old marketing research textbook for some of those rules on survey creation. All I remembered to do was to not make the feelings about HR a double-barreled question.

After receiving feedback from Dr. Hirumi about version 2.2 of the instructional treatment plan, it was easier to see just how much the WebQuest instructional strategy was being modified to fit the objectives of the instructional unit. Tracy gave an example of a WebQuest she had used before. The task was to research George Washington. The process was to visit a website, read about George, answer some questions, and write an essay. The resources were the initial links provided to the learner, and the evaluation was over the essay. In the case of the client for this project, much of the "questing" is just browsing documentation prepared specifically to guide the learner through filling out their new hire paperwork.

As a result of the feedback from Dr. Hirumi, each part of the plan received some sort of significant modification. Initially, the plan included content to teach some attitudinal content, but that was removed in the final version, because we thought it would be better to allow hospice culture subject matter experts to develop a face-to-face presentation on what they wanted new employees to know. The initial objectives were choppy, and didn't follow 2c's ABCD rule for objectives. The instructional plan also lacked some sort of activity to reinforce the information in the readings. What I imagine for the Accident/Incident Report lesson is to present the new employee with three scenarios. They will need to identify which one requires an Accident/Incident report, then take information from the scenario to fill out a practice form.

The important thing to monitor as revisions were made to the plan is continuity from one part to another. At one point during the revision process, the objective for the learning about the employee assistance program only required learners to identify uses of the program, when in fact the learner also needed to know it was free, voluntary, and confidential.

The other continuity problem surfaced during revisions when we added scenario activities to the process. The objectives only accounted for making choices based on the Hepatitis B information sheet. Since the learners should know from the objectives they will have to apply information from a scenario in addition to the Hepatitis B information page, it was necessary to go back and amend the objectives. There was some discussion during the revision that adding all that information to the objectives "isn't how things are normally done". That was the problem though, the way people normally write objectives is incomplete and/or doesn't align the instruction and evaluation. At this point, the one bit of knowledge of aligning objectives is a reoccurring issue that will probably be one of the educational highlights of this Ph.D. program.

AttachmentSize
EME6613_HOTC_Instructional_Treatment_Plan_2.2_blacked_out.html14.64 KB
EME6613_Instructional_Plan_Final_Feedback.doc90.5 KB
EME6613_Instructional_Plan_Preliminary_Feedback.doc76 KB

Sample instructional treatment plan

Unit Descriptors

Designer's Notes: The objectives listed in this instructional treatment plan are based on the subordinate skills analysis conducted on [removed]'s new employee orientation. This treatment plan focuses on the goal analysis item 1.0, "Follow policy and procedures mandated by Human Resources." Proof to work in the United States should include a link to valid forms of identification on a website such as IRS.gov or an internal webpage.

Course title: Orientation for New Employees of [removed]

Unit Number and Title: Unit 1.0 - Human Resources Pre-orientation

Terminal Objective: Given new employee materials, complete all tasks assigned by Human Resources.

Enabling Objectives: When provided instructional resources, scenarios, and job aids, you should be able to:

  • Choose to receive or decline a Hepatitis B vaccination.
  • Identify characteristics of the Employee Assistance Program on a quiz with 100% accuracy.
  • File a sample incident report with 100% accuracy.
  • Prepare and submit all completed personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation.

Prerequisites: Present an original of the following items to a Human Resources representative, who will visually verify and copy all items:

  • government issued identification
  • social security card or other proof to work in United States as stated in the instructions of IRS form W-7, USCIS Form I-9, and/or the USCIS Handbook for Employers, M-274.

 

  • Entry behaviors
    • minimum 6th grade ability in reading and comprehension
    • minimum 6th grade ability in mathematics
    • ability to navigate and print websites on the Internet
  • Optional:
    • voided personal check
    • Hepatitis B vaccination records

Time Requirements: Approximately 1 hour

Instructional Strategy and Media Selection

Designer's Notes: WebQuest

This unit does not cover attitudinal parts of the orientation to give the [removed] culture subject matter experts an opportunity to develop a face-to-face presentation on [removed] culture. The WebQuest grounded instructional strategy has been modified to meet the needs of [removed] pre-orientation paperwork requirements. WebQuests are an inquiry-based strategy in which most or all of the information used by the learners is electronic. They focus learners' time and attention on using rather than looking for information. They are also used to support learners' effort to analyze, synthesize, and evaluate. The critical attributes are pulled from the WebQuest template. This portion of the training is intended to be completely web-based.

Unit 1 Instructional Strategy

Instructional Events Description Media & Tool Selection
Introduction

Prepare and hook the reader and provide a short overview. Stress the importance of completing this unit and illustrate to new employees how this unit will enable employees to start work. Learners will be provided with an overview of each unit that clearly notes benefits and importance of each unit as well as identifies problems and limitations associated with failing to address related skills and/or knowledge.

Overview: Many of you may have some experience filling out Human Resources paperwork. This paperwork is important for starting work. This unit will provide an overview of Hepatitis B, the Employee Assistance Program (EAP), and Accident/Incident Reports. Human Resources paperwork provides [removed] with information to pay you. This unit is relatively short and should take you approximately one hour to complete.

Web page
Task

Describe the end result of what the learners' activities will be. This section should list the aforementioned enabling objectives included in this design document. Prerequisites should also be listed here, including what materials learners will need.

  • Given information and a practice scenario about Hepatitis B, you should be able to choose to receive or decline a Hepatitis B vaccination.
  • Given information and a practice scenario about the Employee Assistance Program, you should be able to identify characteristics of the Employee Assistance Program in a quiz with 100% accuracy.
  • Given information and a practice accident scenario, you should be able to accurately file an incident report with 100% accuracy.
  • Given job aids, you should be able to accurately complete and submit all personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation.

For this unit you will need:

  • government issued identification
  • social security card or other proof to work in United States as stated in the instructions of IRS form W-7, USCIS Form I-9, and/or the USCIS Handbook for Employers, M-274.
  • minimum 6th grade ability in reading and comprehension
  • minimum 6th grade ability in mathematics
  • ability to navigate and print websites on the Internet
  • Optional:
    • voided personal check
    • Hepatitis B vaccination records

 

Web page
Process

What steps should the learners go through? Use a numbered list here to show the flow of the instruction. Providing the checklist here is recommended in the WebQuest template. Learners will be prompted with links to resources about Hepatitis B, the Employee Assistance Program, Accident/Incident Report, and job aids.

You will be provided with instructional resources, scenarios, and job aids. During this pre-orientation you will complete the following processes:

  1. You will read about Hepatitis B
  2. Once you have read the Hepatitis B information, you will be presented with a scenario
  3. You will answer a question about the scenario
  4. Using information learned in the scenario, you will complete the Hepatitis B vaccination form
  5. Next, you will read about the Employee Assistance Program
  6. Once you have read about the Employee Assistance Program, you will be presented with a scenario
  7. You will answer questions about the scenario
  8. Using information learned from the scenario, you will identify uses of the Employee Assistance Program
  9. Next, you will read about filing an Accident/Incident Report
  10. Once you have read about the Accident/Incident Report, you will be presented with a scenario
  11. You will answer a question about the scenario
  12. Using information learned from the scenario, you will identify the correct sample scenario from a list and use the scenario information to fill out an Accident/Incident Report
  13. You will then be directed to a list of required paperwork and identification for starting work
  14. You will complete the required paperwork for your personnel file.

 

New Employee Checklist

Use this checklist as a guide for which documents must be completed, signed, and submitted to the Human Resources office.

Criteria Yes No Comments
W-4 boxes 1-7 completed      
W-4 signed and dated      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character county blank says "Seminole"      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character employee name in second blank      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character employment blank says "[removed]"      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character signed by new employee in AFFIANT blank      
Criminal Activity Policy is signed and dated      
Receipt and Acknowledgement of Understanding of the Sexual Abuse Policy has employee name printed and signed      
Notice of Privacy Practices Acknowledgement form is signed, name is printed, and dated in the "[removed] Employee/Volunteer/Other Signature" blank      
Notice of Privacy Practices Acknowledgement form reads "[removed]" in the "Company Name" area of the signature line      
Statement of Privacy/Confidentiality is signed, name is printed, and dated      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication has employee name printed in the "Print Name of Person Giving Authorization" blank      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication has a check for "may" or "may not" to authorize media rep      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication is signed and dated by employee      

Conflict of Interest form lists new employee name in the blank after "I"

     
Conflict of Interest employee, volunteer, or member checkbox is checked      
Conflict of Interest form has checks in the check blanks in items 1-3      
Conflict of Interest form is signed, dated, and name is printed      
Consent for Drug Testing is dated, signed, and name is printed      
Full, Part-Time, Temporary, and Per-Diem Compliance Form has initial assignment date, employee name, social security number, signature, and date      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine name and department are completed      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine contraindications paragraph is initialed      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine agreement is signed and dated three times OR vaccination refusal agreement is initialed, signed, and dated      
Electronic Authentication Policy Acknowledgement Form name is printed, signed and dated.      
When to complete an Accident/Incident Form is signed and dated      
Electronic Communications Systems Employee Acknowledgement Form is printed, signed and dated.      
OPTIONAL: Direct Deposit Form is filled out with name and social security number submitted with a voided check      
OPTIONAL: Employee Charitable Fund Donation Form is signed with an election for charitable donation amount.      

 

All checklist items are turned in to Human Resources and accepted as complete

__________ Initials of Human Resources Representative

_____/______/_____ Date

 

 

Web page
Resources

Resources will be internally linked webpage's listing information about Hepatitis B, Employee Assistance Program, Accident/Incident Reports, and help documents for instructions on filling out each personnel file document. Each document for Hepatitis B, Employee Assistance Program, and Accident/Incident Report will have one or more scenarios to give learners practice with each area. Some type of webform will be used to allow users to answer questions about each scenario. Type and features of webform will be determined at a later date. Job aids will need to be designed to explain how to properly complete each form. A webpage describing acceptable Governmental IDs will be provided in this section. A link to IRS form W-7 and USCIS Form I-9 will be provided as a resource of acceptable Governmental IDs.

[contact information removed]

Web page
Evaluation New employees will complete the checklist of items and turn it in to Human Resources. Checklist is included as part of the process of the instructional strategy and in the appendix of this document. Checklist and multiple choice survey
Conclusion A couple sentences here will summarize what the new employees have accomplished during the orientation. Including some rhetorical questions and additional links is recommended by the WebQuest template for extending the experience beyond orientation. Web page

Media Selection Rationale

Webpages were selected o deliver most instructional events for a number of reasons:

  • First and foremost, the context analysis indicated that the material is to be delivered via the Internet. As such, the webpages provide the most accessible means of providing a combination of audio, video, text and graphics.
  • The content and learning objectives for this unit is primarily focused on the acquisition and use of verbal information and filling out of forms. As such, the use of text and graphics are most essential which the webpages support in an effective manner, particularly with the availability of using hypertext links.
  • No face-to-face interaction is necessary for the web based events.
  • Allows for a student centered approach and will allow time for Human Resources to focus on culture and attitudinal goals in a face-to-face meeting.
  • Provides a dynamic environment to present orientation materials and multimedia. No longer will Human Resources need to keep stacks of pre-sorted photocopies and re-arrange prepared packets for information updates.
  • Serves as a job aid for future reference. Employees can refer to it for the most updated information whereas information from the new hire packet in paper form can become outdated.
  • Focuses on the dissemination of information. Hypertext links can be beneficial in communicating extra information.
  • Allows for immediate feedback.
  • Face-to-face time requirements are reduced for Human Resources staff.

Unit 1 Learner Assessment Alignment Table

Designer's Notes: The enabling objectives for Unit 1.0 focus on the acquisition of verbal information, declarative knowledge, and attitudes rather than higher order thinking skills, therefore a checklist is suitable for assessing new employee success in orientation. The terminal objectives for the new hire orientation focus on conceptual, verbal, and attitudinal domains. Each objective addresses the audience, required behavior, condition, and criteria or degree to which the performance will be measured.

Unit 1 Learner Assessment Alignment Table

Skill Objective Domain Method Item/Criteria
Turn in required personnel paperwork to Human Resources Terminal objective: 1.0 - Given new employee materials complete all tasks assigned by Human Resources. Rules Post test: New employee checklist

Checklist item:

___ New employee paperwork complete

Make an informed choice about receiving a Hepatitis B vaccination

Enabling objective: 1.1 - Given information and a practice scenario about Hepatitis B, new employees will choose to receive or decline a Hepatitis B vaccination. Cognitive Post test: Assessment Rubric

Assessment Rubric is listed below

Identify characteristics of the Employee Assistance Program

Enabling objective 1.2 - Given information and a practice scenario about the Employee Assistance Program, you should be able to identify characteristics of the Employee Assistance Program in a quiz with 100% accuracy. Verbal

Post test: true/false quiz

T/F - Family members can participate in EAP
T/F - EAP is voluntary
T/F - EAP is not free
T/F - EAP is not confidential
T/F - EAP may be consulted for any problems an employee encounters

File an Accident/Incident Report

Enabling objective 1.3 - Given information and a practice accident scenario, you should be able to accurately file an incident report with 100% accuracy. Rules Post test: Paperwork checklist

Checklist item:

___ Sample practice Accident/Incident Report

Complete and submit all personnel file paperwork Enabling objective 1.4 - Given job aids, you should be able to accurately complete and submit all personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation. Rules Post test: Paperwork checklist

Checklist item:

___ All checklist items are turned in to Human Resources and accepted as complete

Appendix: Sample Assessment Instruments

Designer's Notes: Sample assessments are a compilation of the assessment items listed in the assessment alignment table. The assessment items specified for enabling objectives 1.1-1.4 were compiled to generate checklists to measure the achievement of the terminal objective 1.0. Contact information on how to submit paperwork to Human Resources could be included in the checklist instructions.

 

New Employee Checklist

Use this checklist as a guide for which documents must be completed, signed, and submitted to the Human Resources office.

Criteria Yes No Comments
W-4 boxes 1-7 completed      
W-4 signed and dated      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character county blank says "Seminole"      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character employee name in second blank      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character employment blank says "[removed]"      
Affidavit of Good Moral Character signed by new employee in AFFIANT blank      
Criminal Activity Policy is signed and dated      
Receipt and Acknowledgement of Understanding of the Sexual Abuse Policy has employee name printed and signed      
Notice of Privacy Practices Acknowledgement form is signed, name is printed, and dated in the "[removed] Employee/Volunteer/Other Signature" blank      
Notice of Privacy Practices Acknowledgement form reads "[removed]" in the "Company Name" area of the signature line      
Statement of Privacy/Confidentiality is signed, name is printed, and dated      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication has employee name printed in the "Print Name of Person Giving Authorization" blank      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication has a check for "may" or "may not" to authorize media rep      
Authorization for Media Use/Publication is signed and dated by employee      

Conflict of Interest form lists new employee name in the blank after "I"

     
Conflict of Interest employee, volunteer, or member checkbox is checked      
Conflict of Interest form has checks in the check blanks in items 1-3      
Conflict of Interest form is signed, dated, and name is printed      
Consent for Drug Testing is dated, signed, and name is printed      
Full, Part-Time, Temporary, and Per-Diem Compliance Form has initial assignment date, employee name, social security number, signature, and date      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine name and department are completed      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine contraindications paragraph is initialed      
Acceptance/Declination Hepatitis B Virus Vaccine agreement is signed and dated three times OR vaccination refusal agreement is initialed, signed, and dated      
Electronic Authentication Policy Acknowledgement Form name is printed, signed and dated.      
When to complete an Accident/Incident Form is signed and dated      
Electronic Communications Systems Employee Acknowledgement Form is printed, signed and dated.      
OPTIONAL: Direct Deposit Form is filled out with name and social security number submitted with a voided check      
OPTIONAL: Employee Charitable Fund Donation Form is signed with an election for charitable donation amount.      

 

All checklist items are turned in to Human Resources and accepted as complete

__________ Initials of Human Resources Representative

_____/______/_____ Date

 

 

Sample Assessment Rubric for measuring achievement of terminal unit objective Unit 1

Complete success
  • New employee completed all tasks assigned by Human Resources.
  • New employee made an informed decision about electing to receive a Hepatitis B vaccination.
  • New employee correctly identified uses of the Employee Assistance Program.
  • New employee accurately filed a sample incident report.
  • New employee accurately completed and submitted all personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation using job aids.
Marginal success
  • New employee did not complete all tasks assigned by Human Resources.
  • New employee submitted an incomplete Hepatitis B vaccination Acceptance/Declination form.
  • New employee did not correctly identify uses of the Employee Assistance Program.
  • New employee did not accurately fill out a sample incident report.
  • New employee did not accurately complete and submit all personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation.
Incomplete file
  • New employee did not complete any tasks assigned by Human Resources.
  • New employee did not elect or decline the Hepatitis B vaccination.
  • New employee did not submit quiz regarding characteristics of the Employee Assistance Program.
  • New employee did not submit a sample incident report.
  • New employee did not accurately complete and submit any personnel file paperwork and supporting documentation.

 

Sample Assessment Rubric for measuring achievement of Enabling objective: 1.1 - Given information and a practice scenario about Hepatitis B, new employees will choose to receive or decline a Hepatitis B vaccination.

Accepted
  • Having read the information about Hepatitis B, you have decided to protect yourself and get the Hepatitis B vaccine shot series.
Declined
  • Having read the information about Hepatitis B, you have decided to decline the Hepatitis B vaccine shot series. You have been provided with valuable information but still choose to decline the Hepatitis B series and fully understand the risks.
  • Having read the information about Hepatitis B, you have decided to decline the Hepatitis B vaccine shot series. You have already received the complete Hepatitis B series vaccine.
Prohibited
  • Having read the information about Hepatitis B, you see the value of the Hepatitis B vaccine but have decided to decline the series due to existing health conflicts.
Undecided
  • Having read the information about Hepatitis B, you have not made a decision about receiving the Hepatitis B vaccine series.

International Trends in Instructional Systems

Course description: International and multicultural issues and how they affect the global impact of technology in education, training, and quality management.

AttachmentSize
IDS6503 David Norman cross cultural training trends and issues.pdf38.58 KB
IDS6503 David Norman evaluate cross cultural training design.pdf30.3 KB
IDS6503 David Norman international trends and issues.pdf22.89 KB

Cross cultural training elements

Cross Cultural Communication by Lewis (1999) is a good resource for general, albeit stereotyped, representations of communication behaviors and interactions for many international cultures in the areas of communication patterns, listening habits, audience expectations, leadership styles, and the language of management. Lewis suggests training is needed in each area to know the context in which to consider a message, the possible filters created between speaker and listener, expectations of each party, and the resulting message.

The internet provides many educational opportunities, but is not the answer. It should never replace face-to-face instruction (Gorski, 2001).

Gorski mentions multicultural, web-based training evaluation models, such as Bruce Leland's Evaluating Web Sites: A Guide for Writers (1998), Joe Landsberger's Evaluating Website Content (1999), and Elizabeth E. Kirk's Evaluating Information Found on the Internet (1999), rely on Authority, Currency, Bias, Accuracy, and Credibility. Schrock's Teaching Literacy in the Age of the Internet (1999) contains a list of evaluation criteria for teachers including:

  • Dates: Does the site include a notation about when information was placed online or updated?
  • Efficiency: How quickly does the page load on the screen?
  • Links: Does the site contain original resources, or just links to other original resources? Are links appropriate?
  • Navigability: is the site organization obvious?
  • Quantity of Information: Is the site interactive, and will it be necessary to return to the site periodically for updated information?
  • Requirements: Does the site insist on requirements or registration?
  • Uniqueness: Are the unique qualities of the Web a strength or a weakness of the site?

The Executive Training Program in Japan (Lievens, Harris, Van Keer, & Bisqueret, 2003, p. 477)

The Executive Training Program (ETP) is a 12 month training program in Japan aimed at training Europeans managers Japanese business-related practices . The program consists of intensive language courses, university seminars, company visits, and in-house training as a mix of experiential and analytical training methods. Learning is typically in small groups (e.g. "language learning occurs in groups of three"). After the 12 month program, participants work in Japanese host companies for 6 months alongside Japanese coworkers and supervisors to demonstrate their success with the training program.

The Interchange Institute Program (Copeland, 2005)

Goals Of Multicultural Training:

  • To maximize the cultural sensitivity
  • To learn how to avoid misunderstandings based on cultural differences
  • To learn how to communicate verbally and non-verbally with colleagues in other cultures

Methods Used In Multicultural Workgroup Training:

  • Short lectures
  • Perspective-taking exercises
  • Role plays
  • Simulation game
  • Self-reflection and assessments
  • Small group discussion
  • Group problem-solving and card-sorting activity
  • Question and Answer period
  • Action Planning (application of training to trainees' own situation)

Sample One-Day Multicultural Workgroup Program:

  • Introduction and Establishment of Expectations and Needs
  • What We Do (and Don't) Mean by the Word "Culture"
  • Classic Models of the Meaning of Culture
  • How Others See US Americans and How Will Others See Me?
  • Brief Overview of How Cultural Values Affect Workplace Issues, with emphasis on expectations about leadership, negotiation style, conduct of meetings, and business writing
  • Cultural Differences in the Workplace: Data and Application from Around the World
  • Communication Styles: The Dangers of Not Understanding the Role of Culture
  • Tips for Business Travelers to Host Country
  • Application of Training: Analysis of trainees' own management approaches in light of their own cultural values, communication styles, and learning styles, and in light of current multicultural situations
  • "Ask the Expert" Question and Answer period for covering any unanswered questions
  • Wrap-Up and Evaluation

Contrast-American Method (Bhawuk & Brislin, 2000)

According to Bhawuk and Brislin (2000), the Contrast-American Method is a culture self-awareness method where the trainees see a demonstration of a behavior completely different to to one in their own culture. In this method, trainees are videotaped during the training session and debriefed after the session by the trainer. The method has three steps: "it helps the trainees to recognize their own cultural values; they then analyze the contrasts with other cultures; they then finally apply the insight to intercultural interaction. An obvious weakness of the method is that it does not necessarily help the trainees to learn anything specific about the host culture(s) in which they will be interacting" (¶ 8). The learning objective is to develop cultural self-awareness. The authors believe changes in behavior as a result of observing the host country's behaviors will result in the most success in the host country.

Cross Cultural Workshops and Seminars (Delany-Barmann & Minner, 1996)

Three approaches to cross-cultural training are described by Delany-Barmann and Minner (1996) in Table 2.1. Each training workshop is designed for between 12 and 40 participants over age 15. The workshops are intended to establish a foundation for further discussion and training, not necessarily a well rounded preparation for sojourners. Other than discussion and debriefing, there is no other type of evaluation mentioned for the workshops.

Table 2.1
Training Workshops (Delany-Barmann & Minner, 1996)
  Goals and Objectives Description
Bafa Bafa (¶ 10)
  1. Enhance teaching and learning in a culturally diverse classroom environment
  2. Promote and manage cultural diversity within organizations
  3. Manage and prevent incidents of racial and ethnic conflict
  4. Understand and respond to the needs of different racial and ethnic groups
  5. Learn that a person should make up his or her own mind about a culture and not rely on the reports and experiences of others
  • Divides participants into groups
  • Each group is briefed on their own group's norms, customs, and values
  • Observers from each group visit the other group and return to their group with a report on the opposing culture
BARNGA (¶ 15)
  1. Demonstrate how obvious similarities among people and cultures can be misleading
  2. Demonstrate how interpersonal conflict can result unless we acknowledge and respect the distinct underlying assumptions of our actions
  • Involves a card tournament called Five Tricks for between 12 and 40 participants
  • Communication problems are simulated by having the players interact nonverbally
  • Teams at each table receive different versions of the game rules
  • Works on the principle that participants are not aware of differences between groups until it suddenly surprises them
Tribal Talk (¶ 18)
  1. Focus on communication skills
  2. Understand and respond to different ways of communicating
  3. Promote and encourage cultural diversity within organizations
  4. Create an environment where the needs of different racial and ethnic groups can be understood and met
Groups are asked to work together in tribes and develop their own oral language.
Each language should include the following:

  1. a greeting
  2. a description of an object or person
  3. an evaluative statement
  4. two sentences referring to basic needs (e.g., food, water, shelter)
  5. a farewell

After the tribes have developed languages, each member numbers him or herself in sequence (1, 2, 3, 4, etc). All the 1s from each tribe form a new group. The other groups do the same. Within each new group, each member must teach the other members their original tribal language. This is to be done using no English or any other recognizable language.

Self-reference Criterion Method (Bhawuk & Brislin, 2000)

Bhawuk and Brislin (2000) also discuss a reference to Lee (1966), the creator of Self-Reference Criterion (SRC). SRC is defined as "the unconscious reference to one's own cultural values in communicating with people who are from other cultures" (¶ 9). The desire to overcome the SRC resulted in the creation of Lee's (1966) cultural analysis system. The four steps in the SRC Method are:

  1. Define and evaluate the business problem faced by the sojourner's culture
  2. Define and evaluate the business problem faced by the host culture
  3. Isolate the SRC influence in the problem and examine how it complicates the interaction
  4. Redefine the problem without the SRC influence and find a solution for the optimum business goal situation

Table 2.2 summarizes common features between training programs. Simulation is the most popular method of training. Language training was likely only mentioned in ETP because many other training programs are focused on completing the training in a short time period. Collaborative problem solving and experiential learning approaches were the most common grounded strategies found in the research. All the training has the common objective of trying to get the participants to realize they will have to make an effort to observe, internalize, and adapt to their new host culture.

Table 2.2
CCTP Comparison
  ETP Interchange Institute Contrast-American Bafa Bafa BARNGA Tribal Talk SRC
Lectures
X
X
     
Role playing
X
X
     
Simulation
X
X
X X X
Self-reflection
X
X
X   X
Small Group Discussion
X
X
X   X
Group Problem Solving
X
  X X
X
Internship
X
X
     
Language Training
X
     

References

Bhawuk, D., & Brislin, R. (2000, Jan). Cross Cultural Training: A Review [Electronic version]. Applied Psychology: An International Review. 49(1), 162-192. Retrieved on May 21, 2005, from http://www.epnet.com/

Copeland, A. P. (2005). Cross-Cultural Training. The Interchange Institute. Retrieved on May 21, 2005, from http://www.interchangeinstitute.org/html/cross_cultural.htm#Workgroups

Delany-Barmann, G., & Minner, S. (1996). Cross-Cultural Workshops and Simulations for Teachers. The Teacher Educator, 32, 37-47.

Gorski, P. C. (2001). Multicultural Education and the Internet: Intersections and Integrations. New York, NY: McGraw Hill.

Lewis, R. D. (1999). Cross Cultural Communication: A Visual Approach. Warnford, NH: Transcreen Publications.

Lievens, F., Harris, M. M., Van Keer, E., Bisqueret, Claire. (2003, June). Predicting Cross-Cultural Training Performance: The Validity of Personality, Cognitive Ability, and Dimensions Measured by an Assessment Center and a Behavior Description Interview [Electronic version]. Journal of Applied Psychology, 88(3), 476-488. Retrieved on May 21, 2005, from http://www.epnet.com/

Philcox, W. (2001). Cross-Cultural Training. National Culinary Review, 27-32. Retrieved on May 21, 2005, from http://www.acfchefs.org/trends/crosscultural.html

Cross-Cultural Training Trends and Issues

According to Chang, the trend of globalization is a driver for the need to "understand the nature of work-related adult education programs crossing international boundaries and has affected those who are responsible for developing international training activities" (p. 174). One of the problems he identified for training was communication problems. The communication problems lead to misunderstood needs for education. He cited Biggs (1996) by suggesting that understanding the cultural roots for observed behaviors while a native teaches other natives is essential to successful training (p. 175). Three techniques he identified for teaching to pursue course objectives are asking questions to provide opportunities for two-way communication, telling stories and sharing real examples, and using classmates as a learning resource by having them share topic-related stories (p. 185). Each method was successful in his case study.

Shim and Paprock agree with Chang on the trend of globalization as a driver for cross-cultural training (p. 13). They say employees fail on work assignments in other countries because they have an inability to adapt to the foreign culture. "Only 30 percent of US managers sent on overseas assignments receive even minimal cross-cultural training prior to departure" (p. 15). The issue involved with getting trained in the first place is convincing corporate policymakers just because someone is successful in the United States does not mean they will be successful elsewhere. They identified four effective methods of cross-cultural training for sojourners from research done by Kealey and Protheroe:

  1. to provide the practical information on living conditions in the host country;
  2. to study political, economic, and cultural facts about the host country;
  3. to obtain cultural awareness information on the host culture;
  4. experiential learning activities that combine cognitive and behavioral techniques.

Making expatriates become aware of how certain assumptions can constrain their success in the host culture is important to making choices and acting upon new understandings in the host country (Shim & Paprock, pp. 16-17). Statistical analysis identified learning the language of the host country and using it while there had a strong significance in the success of the expatriates in the study (Shim & Paprock, p. 17). The exact amount and content of the cross-cultural training in the Shim and Paprock study wasn't detailed, but their statistics showed having some sort of cross-cultural training prior to arrival, along with language training were the most significant factors in the success of expatriates.

Lievens, Harris, Keer, and Bisqueret (2003) suggest identifying managers with the highest capacity to master cross-cultural training will result in the most successful expatriate assignments. The issue involved is the consistent process of using intuition and unsystematic methods for selecting expatriates. They classify candidates who have the requisite personality characteristics for successful cross-cultural training have above average verbal, numerical reasoning, and general cognitive ability. Although their research did not support any hard statistical links, other than strong cognitive ability as a training requirement, Lievens et al. predict in the future cross-cultural training will involve more selection procedures utilizing assessment center exercises and behavior description interviews.

Cusher, Robertson, Kirca, and Cakmak identified a trend in Turkey by local trainers to develop training materials for outsiders (p. 614). The focus of the training in their study was to help participants understand "key concepts in cross-cultural communication, help participants understand the relationships between culture, communication and language, as well as the role of such concepts as stereotypes and cultural values in the process of making intercultural decisions" (p. 615). Evaluations of the training program identified prejudice and educational differences as major causes of difficulty in cross-cultural communication. A notable fact was the exclusion of religion as an important contributing factor in intercultural communication conflicts (p. 616). In the conclusions, Cusher et al. identified a little-discussed problem with returning expatriates and the concepts of re-entry:

Many individuals who have received training and/or have spent a considerable amount of time living or working for an extended period of time with people different from themselves experience a significant shift in perception of self and others. Returning to one's home community espousing ideas and practices that may be in conflict with traditional beliefs and values can create unexpected obstacles and stress. (p. 625)

Clegg and Gray found a trend with US and European companies using home-country nationals in nations that were less-developed, preferring to use host-country nationals in only in nations that were classified as developed (p. 599). Companies tend to send home-country nationals "to start up operations" and when special technical expertise is needed. Key expatriate skills identified from Mendenhall and Oddou cited by Clegg and Gray were the ability to manage cultural differences, versatility in problem solving methods, and a superior understanding of the organization and its global entirety (p. 601). They make references to the same cultural management issues identified by Shim and Paprock. The explanation is simple in their eyes: a lack of cross-cultural training since companies often send people overseas because of their technical skills, intending to stay for a short term. As a result, the un-trained expatriates often fail at the single assignment they were designated to complete.

Magnini and Honeycutt reinforce Clegg and Gray in their details of required technical expertise for expatriates. For the hotel firms surveyed in the Magnini and Honeycutt study, Chinese firms indicated "ability to adapt" as their leading selection criterion for expatriate hotel managers. The issue for the hotel companies is how to measure "ability to adapt" before assigning a manager to an expatriate position. As part of the research, they developed the surveys noted in Table 4.1 to predict and measure the potential success of managers entering training programs. The statements of the survey are judged on a Likert scale of strongly disagree (1) to strongly agree (7). Only trainees with high scores on the surveys should be assigned overseas.

Table 4.1
Expatriate candidate goal orientation survey (Magnini & Honeycutt, p. 273)

Performance goal orientation
  • I prefer to do things that I can do well rather than things I do poorly.
  • I'm happiest at work when I perform tasks on which I know that I won't make any errors.
  • The things that I enjoy the most are the things that I do best.
  • The opinions others have about how well I can do certain things are important to me.
  • I feel smart when I do something without making mistakes.
  • I like to be fairly confident that I can successfully perform any task before I attempt it.
  • I like to work on tasks that I have done well on in the past.
  • I fell smart when I can do something better than most other people.
  • I fell that there aren't a lot of new things to learn about managing a hotel.
  • I spend a lot of time thinking about how my performance compares with that of other hotel managers.
  • I always try to communicate my achievements to the corporate office.
  • I fell very good when I have outperformed other managers in my company.
  • It is very important that the corporate office sees me as a good manager.
Learning goal orientation
  • The opportunity to do challenging work is important to me.
  • When I fail to complete a difficult task, I plan to try harder the next time that I work on it.
  • I prefer to work on tasks that force me to learn new things.
  • The opportunity to learn new things is important to me.
  • I do my best when I am working on a fairly difficult task.
  • I try hard to improve on my past performance.
  • The opportunity to extend the range of my ability is important to me.
  • When I have difficulty solving a problem, I enjoy trying different approaches to see which one will work.
  • It is worth spending a lot of time learning new approaches for dealing with hotel guests.
  • An important part of being a hotel manager is continually improving your management skills.
  • I put a great deal of effort in order to learn something new about managing.
  • It is important for me to learn from every management experience I have.
  • Learning how to be a better manager is of fundamental importance to me.

Conclusion

Overall, trends include the following:

  1. the use of screening surveys to find ideal expatriates;
  2. the use of local trainers to create training materials;
  3. storytelling as a classroom method of instruction;
  4. and a push to provide expatriates with some minimal amount of training before departure, preferably including language training.

Common issues discussed include:

  1. convincing policymakers cross-cultural training is important for every person, not just long-term assignments;
  2. overcoming prejudice and stereotypes;
  3. identifying communication problems before they create other problems;
  4. and identifying expatriates with the highest likelihood of success in cultural training and adaptation in the host country.

References

Chang, W. (2004). A Cross-Cultural Case Study of a Multinational Training Program in the United States and Taiwan. Adult Education Quarterly, 54(3), 174-192.

Clegg, B. & Gray, S. J. (2002). Australian expatriates in Thailand: some insights for expatriate management policies. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 13(4), 598-623.

Cushner, K., Robertson, L., Kirca, S., & Cakmak, M. (2003). A cross-cultural material development project to train Turkish development personnel in the Southeastern Anatolia Regional Development Project (GAP). International Journal of Intercultural Relations, 27, 609-626.

Lievens, F., Harris, M. M., Keer, E. V., & Bisqueret, C. (2003). Predicting Cross-Cultural Training Performance: The Validity of Personality, Cognitive Ability, and Dimensions Measured by an Assessment Center and a Behavior Description Interview. Journal of Applied Psychology, 88(3), 476-489.

Magnini, V. P. & Honeycutt, E. D. (2003). Learning orientation and the hotel expatriate manager experience. Hospitality Management, 22, 267-280.

Shim, I. & Paprock, K. E. (2002). A study focusing on American expatriates' learning in host countries. International Journal of Training and Development, 6(1), 13-24.

International Trends and Issues

Jenkins (2005) wrote with a liberal slanted article that predicts the US will fall behind the education of the rest of the world due to a trend in the federal government to cut funding for public schools. According to the article, students will be consigned "to low employment opportunities and poverty" (¶ 4). Jenkins is concerned about the possible elimination of the Perkins Loan program. Rotberg explains the political changes as a natural, unpleasant, tradeoff. Rothberg (2005) illustrates the tradeoff by making the point, "there is [...] an unspoken premise that countries with effective education systems [...] have gotten it right without ever having had to make difficult choices or cope with negative consequences" (¶ 2).

The applicable trend in Rothberg's paper is the change in South Africa of distributing education funds in equal amounts to each student rather than by race. The tradeoff, or issue, involved the high- and middle-class white students getting a poorer education. The application of this type change in the US has been a similar trend for more affluent families to send their children to private school. South Africa has been able to curtail some mid-class families moving to private school by encouraging the families to contribute to the public school. China and Russia are also given as examples, as countries who recently decentralized their education systems. Just as China now has funding inequality, so would a parent rather send their child to a Seminole County, FL school over a Orange County, FL school since Seminole County has a higher-income tax base to fund the school district.

Berman and Singer (2005) reported on a business trend. Boards of major corporations are more cautious when voting on corporate mergers. Accounting "corrections" by the likes of Enron and MCI have made the boards fearful of inheriting hidden accounting problems. Even though the most famous accounting blunders have been based in the US, it has created merger hesitation on a global scale. The US CPA license now requires public accountants to take an additional test on ethics before becoming certified. Training and education in the US will require better indoctrination of ethics and moral code.

A loss of foreign talent in the US is McGrath's (2004) concern. She documented a significant decrease in the number of international students attending graduate programs in several popular US-based universities. China and Australia have recently had much more popular higher education programs than in the past, during the US's "post-World War II period as a magnet for worldwide talent" (McGrath, 2004, ¶ 2). The US will likely have to respond by expediting student visas and making graduate assistantships easier to attain.

The speech by Wishard concentrates on globalization, as does the paper by Mahler (2004). The solution in the speech is to develop a far more common view of the world than "my nation", "my race", or "my religion" (Wishard). Much of the speech is a history lesson which does not outline how to develop a common world view, though certainly learning about other cultures is one of the first steps to understanding why one culture hates another or why two people don't get along. Wishard also identifies developments in technology and spiritual orientations as areas, that with understanding could become unifying elements of the world. Who knows, perhaps one day a common world view would result in the combined views of Christians, Muslims, and Jews as a unified mish-mash of the best parts of each background. Certainly at some point, globalization will result in a common form of government to accommodate efficient global business transactions.

Mahler (2004) is more concerned with new competition as a result of globalization, which was also identified by Alan Greenspan (2005) in his recent testimony. Both see a brighter side of competition as companies are forced to work harder and be more creative to develop new innovations. The demand of more competition will be based on the quality of training and education people have to use as tools. Greenspan recognized the proposed cut in federal education funding, then compared it to politics of his youth. He reminisced about time 40 years ago when politicians predicted the crumbling of the US in the wake of other countries' development. Instead, the US has overcome major problems and remains a leader in the world.

Summary:

Trends identified in the research were as follows:

  1. The US federal government is discussing decreases in budgeting for public education while the United Nations is emphasizing education
  2. Economic and cultural inequalities are creating inequalities in educational resources
  3. Corporate accounting falsifications have created hesitancy in corporate mergers
  4. Non-US nations are more attractive as centers for graduate education
  5. Globalization will result in the development of more common world views
  6. Globalization will place a higher demand on education and training

Issues include:

  1. Inequalities in education funding
  2. Poor corporate ethics decisions have lead to the hurting of others

References

Berman, D. K. & Singer, J. (2005, Jan 31). Big Deals Are Back; P&G-Gillette Is Latest Signal That Firms Will Spend Again, But With Caution In Mind. Wall Street Journal, C1.

Greenspan, A. (2005, June 9). Fed. Chair Alan Greenspan at House Joint Economic Committee Hearing [Television broadcast]. Washington, DC: C-SPAN.

Jenkins, K. (2005, March 24). Budget Cuts Leave U.S. Out of Global Progress. Black Issues in Higher Education, 22(3), 36.

Mahler, V. A. (2004, November). Economic Globalization, Domestic Politics, and Income Inequality in the Developed Countries: A Cross-National Study. Comparative Political Studies, 37(9), 1025-1053.

McGrath, A. (2004, November 11). A Loss of foreign talent. U.S. News & World Report, 137(18), 76.

Rotberg, I. C. (2005, April). A Special Section of International Education - Tradeoffs, Societal Values, and School Reform. Phi Delta Kappan, 86(8), 661.

Wishard, V. (2005, May). Understanding our Moment in History. Vital Speeches of the Day, 71(14), 442-448.

Summary of cross cultural training elements papers from other students

The cross-cultural training programs have a common goal, to assist in the acculturation of their clientele; however, the mediums and their individual focuses differ between the training programs. Many programs use a combination of different mediums to effectively train their clients while others focus on a specific medium. Some programs even use mixed modes in order to provide both a classroom setting and online training modules. In addition some programs instead of focusing on the acculturation will focus on the practicalities of the different cultures in order to provide information necessary for survival in society.

Important aspects common to all training programs include pre-training assessments of language and culture, relocation counseling and face to face instruction. Worldwork, Vital International, and VIP all use modes such a role-playing, simulations, group discussions, and games in order to provide their clientele with several different methods which individuals can learn. In comparison, Cg Associates concentrates on seminars and Window of the World uses a mixed mode of online modules and face to face interactions. Some programs focus on the practicality instead of the actual acculturation. This can be found especially in the University setting where the focus is on financial necessities and information pertinent to survival such as health care, employment, and transportation. Universities instead of providing seminars, or actual training sessions provide a guideline booklet to assist in international students arrivals to the new country. Worldwork and Cg Associates differed drastically in their instruction method between active workshops for Worldwork and passive lectures for Cg Associates. Likely, the optimal solution is to reinforce passive lectures with some sort of hands-on demonstration of knowledge.

Cross-cultural training programs also differ in their evaluation of their clientele. Olive Garden sends employees to train in Tuscany and upon completion trainees are required to demonstrate their training by preparing a meal. This is similar to the Executive Training Program in Japan where trainees must demonstrate their knowledge of Japanese language and culture by working in Japan. The Institute for Medical Education uses testing to determine if their clients have acculturated. Multi Lingua uses language tests to evaluate where students need help, then they offer on-the-spot assistance with phrase translation. One of the assignments predicted increased use of the internet for training and instruction.

Issues & Research in Education

Course description: An examination of major issues impacting education and related practical and methodological issues in research.

This is a seminar course. We had three debates on educational issues. I wrote structured inquiries and reflective papers over research I did in the field of education.

AttachmentSize
High_Stakes_Testing_Debate_Presentation.pdf544.18 KB
Sex_Ed_debate_con.pdf1.21 MB

Measurement & Evaluation in Education

Course description: Concepts of measurement and evaluation, classroom test construction, creation and use of derived scores, selection and use of published measurement instruments, current issues. Educational Testing and Measurement was the textbook for the course.

AttachmentSize
EDF6432 David Norman create objective test questions.pdf20.45 KB

Argument for testing in schools

Disclaimer: I was tasked with taking a side in a debate, and did so. I did not come to an end conclusion in my own thinking as to the validity of certain tests in K-12 or university level schooling

As a graduate of the Texas public education system, I was required, starting in 3rd grade, to pass the Texas Assessment of Academic Skills (TAAS) test for grade advancement and Texas Academic Skills Program (TASP) for entry into The University of Texas for my bachelors degree. I have been in the midst of students who did not pass one or both exams. Opponents of school testing cite research showing long-term damage to students who are retained. In place of standardized tests, strong support systems, high expectations, caring, and more long-term, concept mastery evaluations are suggested (White, 2005, ¶9). I thought in grade school, and continue to think now, the high-profile exams I was required to pass were appropriate queries of my knowledge.

Thesis

Criterion-referenced tests are essential to create credibility and value for diplomas.

Proof

High-stakes tests impact many important decisions including grade promotion, high school graduation, administrative incentives and penalties, and teacher placement (Kubiszyn & Borich, 2003, p. 21). An increasing number of states are requiring students to pass a test to graduate high school, without necessarily providing remediation for students who fail (Kubiszyn & Borich, 2003, p. 21).

Texas has established the Texas Essential Knowledge and Skills (TEKS) academic standards for reading, math, writing, science, and social studies (Student Assessment, Texas Education Agency). In the past, Texas administered the TAAS, and now administers the TAKS test on a criterion-referenced basis. Students and parents receive a report outlining the strengths and weaknesses of the student and a "pass", "pass with academic recognition", or "fail" result for each subject area. Students, parents, and teachers are able to better pinpoint where students and teachers need to concentrate. Over an eight year period, Texas was able to demonstrate, through the TAAS test, an increase in the percent of students meeting minimum state, academic expectations in reading, mathematics, and writing (Texas Assessment of Academic Skills, 2002).

Teachers should be encouraged to break from their bubble of subject-area focus they have traditionally been stuck in from teaching models of the industrial age (Marshak, 2003). A case study in co-teaching revealed how teachers were influenced in states with high-stakes tests and felt compelled to teach only test-related material (Mastropieri, M. A., Scruggs, T. E., Graetz, J., Norland, J., Gardizi, W., & McDuffie, K., 2005). Instead of leaving out non-test teaching materials, teachers communicated with each other to compound educational value in classroom activities, in this case, computer class. In addition to teaching computer modeling, the computer teacher was able to create an activity that used computer modeling to teach world history. Students' test scores improved as a result and students requested copies of the software to take home for additional practice with other subject areas.

Refutation

Opponents of high-stakes testing work on the assumption where high standards are meant to drive low-performing disadvantaged students to work harder. The assumption of the high standards argument is students are all qualified to obtain high school diplomas. While an ideal education system would cycle all students through as educated graduates, not all students have the mental capacity, the personal motivation and persistence, or willingness to fulfill the requirements set forth by the education system. Deficient students are given the opportunity to re-take high-stake tests and should not graduate simply because they showed improvement, a capacity to learn, a willingness to participate, or the persistence to re-take tests and fail. The high school diploma should represent the ability to read, write, and do math for students who can demonstrate their mastery of state academic standards.

An Education Week survey showed "66 percent of teachers thought state tests were forcing them to concentrate too much on what was tested to the detriment of other important topics, and nearly half said they spent a 'great deal of time' helping students prepare for tests" (Doherty, 2002, ¶7). While students should learn more than what is on state tests, it is important for students to master essential, basic subject areas. The requirements on state exams should indeed supersede the education interests of individual teachers.

The American Educational Research Association made a statement concerning high-stakes testing, suggesting accommodations should be made for students not proficient in English (Kubiszyn & Borich, 2003, p. 21). In a country where government, business, and educational transactions are primarily English, high-stakes tests double as an assessment not only of content mastery, but communication skills. The added communication assessment is important, not something to protest. Surveys and research conducted by the government of Manitoba Canada, The Wall Street Journal, and the Association of Legal Administrators found communication and inter-personal skills among the highest demand skills of job applicants (Johnstone & Williams, 2003; Perry, 2002; The Association of Legal Administrators Competency-Based Education Job/Needs Analysis, 2004). Enabling students to avoid gaining proficiency in English does not benefit industries with shortages of job applicants nor the applicants in those industries. Knowing algebra is worthless if you don't understand the question where the details of the algebraic problem is explained.

Conclusion

Criterion-referenced testing is appropriate for schools when linked to the state's academic standards. Teachers can collaborate with others to compound educational activities to make up for time where education is spent directed on passing high-stakes tests. Texas has proven when test content is linked to state academic objectives, teachers and students are able to work together to improve education.

References

The Association of Legal Administrators Competency-Based Education Job/Needs Analysis. (2004, June 28). Association of Legal Administrators. Retrieved on June 27, 2005, from http://www.alanet.org/education/knowledgesurvey.html

Doherty, K. M. (2002, February 27). Assessment. Education Week on the Web. Retrieved June 27, 2005, from http://www.edweek.org/rc/issues/assessment/

Johnstone, P., & Williams, A. (2003, June 19). Manitoba Employer Survey 2000. Government of Canada. Retrieved on June 27, 2005, from http://www.hrsdc.gc.ca/en/mb/survey/employer-shortage.shtml

Kubiszyn, T., & Borich, G. (2003). Educational Testing and Measurement: Classroom Application and Practice (7th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Marshak, D. (2003, Nov). No Child Left Behind: A Foolish Race Into the Past. Phi Delta Kappan, 8(3), 229-231.

Mastropieri, M. A., Scruggs, T. E., Graetz, J., Norland, J., Gardizi, W., & McDuffie, K. (2005, May). Case Studies in Co-Teaching in Content Areas: Successes, Failures, and Challenges. Intervention in School and Clinc, 40(5), 260-270.

Perry, D. (2002, May 20). Do You Have the Skills Most in Demand Today? The Wall Street Journal. Retrieved on June 27, 2005, from http://www.careerjournal.com/columnists/perspective/20020520-fmp.html

Student Assessment. Texas Education Agency. Retrieved on June 28, 2005, from http://www.tea.state.tx.us/student.assessment/

Texas Assessment of Academic Skills. (2002). Texas Education Agency. Retrieved on June 28, 2005, from http://www.tea.state.tx.us/student.assessment/reporting/results/swresults/august/g310nse_au.pdf

White, J. (2005, June 30). Activity 1-Arguement Against Testing [Msg 1]. Message posted to http://webct.ucf.edu/

Different types of reliability

Type of reliability When How What
Internal consitency Assess a single dimension Correlate each individual item score with the total score. All the items on your test assess the same construct.
Interrater Find consistency in the rating of some outcome Examine the percentage of agreement between raters. The reliability coefficient for your test indicates a poor, moderate, or high degree of agreement between respondents.
Parallel Compare several different forms of a test to see if they are equivalent or reliable Correlate the scores from one form of the test with scores from a second form of the same test with the same content. Two forms of your test are equivalent to one other.
Test-retest Reliability over time Correlate the scores from time 1 with the scores of time 2. The test gives the same results even if the participants didn't all take it at the same time.

Portfolios

A good portfolio is both summative and formative in nature. The contributions to the portfolio should be evaluated as the portfolio is being created as well as a final evaluation as part of a continuous process.

Portfolios should reflect the immediate assignment task and the overall area of study. The content should reflect the interests, in addition to the abilities, of the student.

Sample essay question

Cognitive Objective:

The student should be able to:

  • Identify and describe common characteristics of programming frameworks
  • Identify and describe issues related to standardized and open source frameworks in a clear and concise manner
  • Reference and provide a short description of at least two popular PHP frameworks
  • Evaluate the quality of named frameworks

Test Item:

In an article, titled "Why PHP sucks", on bitstorm.org, Edwin Martin complained about not having a standardized framework for PHP. He cited Struts for JSP developers and .Net for ASP developers as models for a standardized framework for PHP. As opposed to a standardized framework, PHP has a multitude of open source frameworks including Midgard, Horde, Blueshoes, Cake, Seagull, Sourdough, binarycloud, SMART, and many others. Compare and contrast having a standardized framework verses multiple privately developed frameworks. Use your analysis to build an argument defending or refuting Martin's complaint. Limit your response to two pages.

Score Scheme:

Points Score Basis
10 Identified and described common characteristics of programming frameworks
10 Identified and described issues relating to standardized and open source frameworks in a clear and concise manner
10 Referenced and provided a short description of at least two popular PHP frameworks
15 Effectively evaluated the quality of named frameworks
10 Essay follows APA style guidelines, contains no spelling or grammatical errors, and is completed on time.
55 Total Points

Sample test blueprint

Test Blueprint

Categories

 

Knowledge

Comprehension

Application

Analysis

Synthesis

Evaluation

Total

(percentage)

Content Outline

(number of items)

1. The student can state the purposes for various string, database, and graphics functions in PHP. (2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9)

6

 

 

 

 

 

6

30

2. Given a line of code, the student will be able to identify parse errors. (1, 4, 7, 10)

 

 

 

4

 

 

4

20

3. The student can distinguish standard from PECL modules. (11, 12)

2

 

 

 

 

 

2

10

4. Given a programmatic situation, the student can apply a PHP function as a solution. (13, 14, 15, 16)

 

 

4

 

 

 

4

20

5. Given generic character types for regular expressions, the student can identify the function of each escape sequence. (17, 18, 19, 20)

4

 

 

 

 

 

4

20

Total

12

0

4

4

0

0

20

 

Percentage

60

 

20

20

 

 

100

 

Directions
Circle the best answer that either correctly completes each statement or correctly answers the questions.

1. Identify the line of code with a parse error.
  1. echo ‘Hello World!’;
  2. echo ‘Hello “World”!’;
  3. echo “Hello World’s!”;
  4. echo ‘Hello World’s’;
2. The purpose of strpos() is to
  1. find the first position of an array in a string
  2. find the first occurrence of a string
  3. insert a string in a specific position of a different string
  4. delete the first occurrence of a string
3. The purpose of join() is to
  1. add two variables together mathematically.
  2. join array elements with a string.
  3. concatenate to strings.
  4. merge two arrays.
4. Identify the line of code with a parse error.
  1. if(strcmp($foo, $bar)) {
  2. if strcmp($foo, $bar) {
  3. if(substr($foo, $bar)) {
  4. if(strtr($foo, $bar)) {
5. The purpose of ksort() is to
  1. sort a string starting with capital letters
  2. sort an array by values
  3. sort an array by keys
  4. reverse sort an array by keys
6. $mysqli = new mysqli(‘localhost’, ‘root’, ‘password’); will
  1. attempt to open a connection to MySQL
  2. return boolean TRUE on success
  3. produce a parse error
  4. return an array of connection information on success
6. The purpose of mysqli_autocommit() is to
  1. turn on or off auto-committing database modifications on InnoDB tables
  2. turn on or off auto-committing database modifications on MyISAM tables
  3. turn on or off auto-committing database modifications on HEAP tables
  4. commit uncommitted SQL transactions
7. Identify the line of code with a parse error.
  1. $stmt = $mysqli->prepare(“SELECT * FROM foo WHERE bar=?”);
  2. $stmt = $mysqli->prepare(‘SELECT * FROM foo WHERE bar=?’);
  3. $stmt = mysqli_prepare($link, “SELECT * FROM foo WHERE bar=?”);
  4. $stmt = mysqli->prepare(‘SELECT * FROM foo WHERE bar=?’);
8. break 3; will _________ of a current for, foreach, while, do-while, or switch structure
  1. end execution for 3 levels
  2. pause execution for 2 levels and resume at the third level
  3. pause execution for 3 seconds
  4. cause a parse error during the execution
9. The require statement
  1. requires a specific variable parameter for continued execution
  2. includes and evaluates a specific file
  3. requires an end user to enter a password
  4. will not cause a parse error on failure
10. Identify the line of code with a parse error.
  1. $i += $factor;
  2. $i *= $factor;
  3. $i #= $factor;
  4. $i |= $factor;

Directions
Each statement is either true or false. Circle True for each statement that is true and False for each statement that is false.

11. GD2 is a standard extension
  1. True
  2. False
12. mailparse is a PECL extension
  1. True
  2. False

Directions.
Write a PHP function answer to each question in the space below each question.

13. What function would most accurately compare two string passwords?
            strcmp()

14. What function would calculate the sha1 hash of a file?
            sha1_file()

15. What function would convert a string into variables?
            str_parse()

16. How would an administrator remove erroneous spaces from the end of a string?
            rtrim()

Directions
Complete each sentence with the missing PCRE character match.

17. \s represents any _________ character/digit
            whitespace

18. \W represents any __________ character/digit
            non-word

19. \d represents any _________ character/digit
            decimal

20. \w represents any __________ character/digit
            word

Planned Change in Instructional Technology

Course description: In-depth study of the processes of planned change and adoption/rejection of innovations in educational settings.

This course focused on performing a needs assessment as part of the instructional design process. Heavy emphasis was put on identifying the optimals, actuals, causes, and solutions of problems in various organizations.

AttachmentSize
EME6607 David Norman Needs Assessment Report blacked out.pdf102.88 KB
EME6607 David Norman Performance Problems Chart.pdf233.64 KB

Qualitative Research in Education

Course description: Introduction to the philosophical and conceptual basis of qualitative research methods, strategies for gathering, analyzing, and interpreting qualitative data, emerging issues.

AttachmentSize
Norman,David_Kent-Final_Poster.pdf74.5 KB

In-class writing: still life

Begin time: 7:47pm
End time: 7:49pm
Date: Sept 5, 2006
Location: Classroom Building 1, Room 113 at University of Central Florida
Observer: David Kent Norman
Frame: Classroom observation exercise

Time

ON Observer Notes

OC Observer Comments

7:47

Shadow

 

 

Grey background

 

 

Brick wall

 

 

Building in background

Broken with three horizontal lines that are white

 

Top hat on shadow figure

Looks like also wearing coat or cloak and is male body build

7:48

Top of building has extra windows

Windows follow a vertical pattern

Solo observation exercise

Assignment Description

Schedule this the week we do not meet on campus. Duration: 15-20 minutes. Decide on a place, a time, and a frame or question to organize your observation. Make sure you provide a map or photo clearly labelled. If you go to observe a speaker or an event and the event is cancelled, either: 1) reschedule your observation or 2) re-frame your frame or question. (Don't write an observation of kids at the zoo after you arrive and find out the zoo is closed!) Feel free to pick a setting that is interesting for you (like the example where the observations were done at a cliff diving location). Please see the rubric which lists other requirements for this assignment which we looked at in class, like the use of a formal heading. Please use OC, ON, and MN which were covered in the class PowerPoint (See the PPT for an example). Please see the samples, but note both the strengths and the weaknesses evident in these samples.

  • Keep in mind the prior work needed to set up the observation
  • Practice OC ON and MN beforehand if that helps you
  • Print our a grid with columns already labeled if that helps you
  • Observe for 15-20 minutes
  • Keep in mind you may feel awkward writing
  • Consider bringing a book or something to write on & shield your writing

Observation fieldnotes

Begin time: 2:43pm
End time: 3:20pm
Date: September 19, 2006
Location: Education Building Lobby at University of Central Florida
Observer: David Kent Norman
Frame: Individual observation exercise

Time

ON Observer Notes

OC Observer Comments

MN Methodological Notes

2:43

Girl in grey shirt standing at bagel checkout

 

 

 

Attendant in orange shirt is preparing food for customer in grey shirt

 

 

 

Attendant says to have a good day and hands food to customer

 

 

 

Another customer pours drink for herself

Looks like coffee container and she has a gold badge on for a UCF employee

 

2:45

Male bagel attendant talks to coworkers while taking money from customer

 

 

2:46

Customer goes around side to pour something in her cup

Looks like she poured cream

 

 

Customer 2 walks back toward elevator

 

 

 

Attendant who checked out customer 2 wipes down appliance

Looks like a microwave

 

 

 

 

Guy in table on m left is talking on a cell phone and making it hard to understand what the bagel attendants are saying to each other

2:47

 

 

A loud gentleman is talking to someone in the gym behind me and overpowering even the guy on the cell phone

 

Customer 3 approaches the bagel shop while talking on a cell phone

 

 

 

Customer 4 skips past Customer 3 in line

 

 

 

Customer 5 pours herself a drink

 

 

2:48

Customer 4 goes to condiment stand to get condiments

Looks like she poured Splenda in her drink from a yellow envelope

 

 

Customer 5 answered her cell phone while the attendant was counting her change

 

 

2:49

The attendant broke open a new roll of coins to give change to Customer 5

 

 

 

Customer 3 left without purchasing anything

 

 

2:50

Customer 6 ordered a bagel

 

I couldn’t understand what she ordered on the bagel

2:51

Customer 5 stirred something into her drink at the condiment station

 

 

 

Customers 4 & 5 left together

 

 

 

 

 

A new male behind me is entering the gym and speaking loudly

2:52

Some people on the other end of the lobby are standing up from their table

Looks like they’re preparing to leave.

 

 

Customer 6 is still waiting for her bagel at the checkout

She said something to the attendant about a quarter

 

2:53

A man in a yellow shirt is talking to one of the ladies that stood up earlier

 

 

 

Customers 7 & 8 are waiting in line to checkout

 

 

2:54

Customer 6 is at the condiment station

 

 

 

Customer 9 stopped a girl walking by her to talk

 

I didn’t catch what they were talking about

 

 

 

Customer 8 might have noticed that I’m observing people

2:55

Customer 9’s bill was $7.85

She purchased a red bottle of something and had a big red bucket attached to her rollaway suitcase

 

2:56

Customer 10 is the guy in the yellow shirt who was talking on his cell phone earlier

He purchased a drink for his female friend at the table he has been sitting at

 

 

Customer 10 went to the condiment station to get a lid for the drink he just purchased and a stir straw

 

 

2:57

Customer 11 is wearing a blue shirt

He asked if they sell just a regular bagel, the attendant asked if that’s all he wanted, and the customer just said he wanted the bread

 

2:58

Customer 11 says he wants turkey and provolone on his bagel

 

 

 

Customer 11 talks to Customer 13 about doing some observation

 

 

 

 

 

Someone in the gym is yelling counts at people bouncing balls

2:59

Customer 12 is female and wearing a brown skirt with green shirt

 

 

 

A man in a blue shirt and brown shorts walked through the lobby and into the CMC room

 

 

3:00

Customer 11 got his bagel and paid

 

 

 

Customer 12 paid while holding an empty cup, then filled up the cup after she paid

 

 

 

Customer 12 poured something into her drink from the condiment station

Looks like she also added Splenda

 

 

Customer 15 skipped in line and filled up his drink without paying

 

 

 

Customer 16 has a tri-fold wallet

She had to unfold the wallet all the way to be able to pay for her food

 

3:02

Customer 17 purchased a diet coke in a plastic bottle

 

 

 

The female attendant brought a cart to the condiment station and moved the condiments to it

 

 

3:03

Customer 18 paid in cash and put her change in hear back right jeans pocket

 

 

 

The male attendant asked the female at the condiment station if she stole his rags

 

 

3:04

The attendant asked Customer 19 if she wanted cheese on her bagel

 

 

 

Female attenant asked man exiting the men’s room if he just got off work

Man nodded his head

 

3:05

 

 

Loud music just started in the gym and a man is yelling numerical counts

 

Customer 20 paid for two bottles of Dasani water with a credit card

 

 

3:06

Customer 21 grabbed a bottle of orange juice from the cooler and put it by the cash register with a brown envelope

 

 

 

 

 

The music in the gym changes songs about every 5 seconds and just got louder

 

Customer 21 asked how the male attendant’s day is going

 

 

 

Customer 22 asked if he could just get a cup of ice

 

 

3:07

 

The counting in the gym seems to only be “1, 2, 3”

 

3:08

Customer 22 is eating something in line

Looks like a candy bar

 

 

Customer 22 asked how much for the cup of ice and the attendant did not charge

 

 

3:09

A girl in a grey shirt and blonde hair exited the gym and is talking on a cell phone by the chairs in front of the gym doors

Something about money

 

 

Customer 23 and 24 are waiting for bagels

 

 

 

Girl on phone is happy she can leave whenever she wants

 

 

3:10

Girl on phone re-enters the gym

 

 

 

Customers 25 and 26 arrive in line at the bagel shop

 

 

 

Customer 25 is holding a bag

Bag looks like it has chips in it

 

 

Customer 25 jogged back to the CMC room with her bag

 

 

 

Customer 26 paid from a small bag

Bag looks like a coin purse

 

3:12

Customer 27 is wearing a pink dress and pouring a drink for herself

Customer 27 appears to sruggle to get money while holding a bag with paper in it under her left arm

 

 

Customer 28 pays for food out of her black backpack

 

 

 

Customer 29 hops up and down

Appears to be excited about something the male attenant said

 

3:13

 

 

A croud of people just walked out of the hallway and is blocking my view of the bagel shop. Many are roudy

3:14

Male in red shirt looks in the gym door window

Walked past me and said “Rafial”

Is speaking loudly behind me to the person he met

3:15

Customer 31 has a large bag on her left shoulder

Bag is black

 

 

Customer 32 purchased a lime Dasani he started drinking in line

 

 

3:16

Customer 34 got a diet coke from the refrigerator

 

 

 

Customer 33 paid from a pink pocketbook

 

 

 

A girl in a gold shirt with UCF on it carried a blue cooler through the lobby and into the gym

Nobody helped her open the door

 

 

4 people followed behind cooler girl into the gym

 

 

3:17

Customer 37 has a purple backpack on her left shoulder with a purse

 

Girl is standing in my view of the bagel shop

3:18

Customer 37 dropped her purple backpack on the ground to put her purse on the counter by the cash register

 

 

 

Customer 37 is bending over by the cash register to fix the cuffs of her pant legs

Male attenant is wearing gloves now to prepare C37’s food

 

 

Male attendant removed his right glove to swipe C37’s credit card

 

 

Observation memo (written from fieldnotes)

Date: September 19, 2006
Location: Education Building Lobby at University of Central Florida
Frame: Individual observation exercise

The male attendant serves customers. The amount of customers fluctuates throughout the day. More than half of the Einstein Bagels customers are female. The bagel stand attendants are familiar with the products and the work environment.

Low level of inference
The female bagel counter attendant appears to be involved with the operations management of the food preparation. She was involved in microwaving food, refilling condiments, restocking drinks in the refrigerator, adding more food to the food preparation area, and taking trash out. The male bagel attendant was concerned more with customer interaction, including taking orders, food preparation, and financial exchanges. Neither attendant seemed to be particularly subordinate to the other.

High level inference
The male attendant appeared to know the menu very well as he would ask customers for additional information about customers' orders without referencing a menu. The female attendant was not interested in customer interaction and was happy and efficient at her support role. She did at times stop to talk to individual customers who seemed like they had a past together; whether it was a past that was class or work related was not clear. The bagel attendant team worked efficiently together; each appeared to do things for the other during each food preparation step without asking the other to do so. The rights for the male attendant to work with money in the cash register and to give away a cup of ice for no charge suggests he has some sort of extra managerial role for the bagel stand. The noise, volume of the apparent coach, and traffic of UCF students in and out of the gym, and the short duration of each repetition from the coach, suggested the participants in the gym were not prepared for what ever they were practicing for. Customer 10, the guy in a yellow shirt, was likely dating the girl he was sitting at the table with judging from their body language and his apparent willingness to get anything she wanted from the bagel stand.

Paired observation exercise

Instructions

Schedule this with a partner this week or the next week (over two weeks) Duration: 15-20 minutes Use: OC, ON, and MN (TN and Spradley’s Matrix, optional) Conduct an observation with a partner Keep fieldnotes, write up your notes into a memo. Exchange your notes and memo via CourseMail. Write a half page to a page responding to your partner’s work (strengths and weaknesses) Submit the Fieldnotes, Memo, and Response from your partner to the HW Box in one document. (Make sure you clearly label the Response with your name and your partner’s name.) Decide on a place, a time, and a common frame or question to organize your observation. Make sure you orient yourselves the same way (for example, label people and the objects in the setting the same way, so that it is easier for you to compare your observations). As with your solo observation, if you go to observe a speaker or an event and the event is cancelled, either: 1) reschedule your observation or 2) reframe your frame or question. (Don’t write an observation of penguins on a glacier after you arrive and find out the glacier has melted!) Feel free to pick a setting that is interesting for you both (like the example where the observations were done in a casino).

  • Keep in mind the prior work needed to set up the observation
  • Practice OC ON and MN beforehand if that helps you
  • Print out a grid with columns already labeled if that helps you
  • Observe for 15-20 minutes
  • Do not talk to each other once you begin your observation
  • You may want to sit apart
  • Keep in mind you may feel awkward writing
  • Consider bringing a book or something to write on and shield your writing

Observation fieldnotes

Begin time: 4:47pm
End time: 5:05pm
Date: September 20, 2006
Location: Breezeway of the Washington Center by Chick-fil-a at University of Central Florida
Observer: David Kent Norman
Frame: Paired observation exercise

Time

ON Observer Notes

OC Observer Comments

MN Methodological Notes

4:47

Lady is washing window with pole at the copy shop

Holding keys in her left hand

 

 

Washer lady is wearing sunglasses

 

 

 

Older gentleman stopped to talk to the window washer and is sitting on concrete wall

 

 

 

Another lady stops to talk to washer lady and gentleman and tells her she can stop washing

Washer lady keeps washing anyway

 

4:49

 

 

Students at picnic table are talking loudly so I can’t understand the conversation with the washer lady and passersby

 

Gentleman walks away from washer lady

 

 

 

Undergrad male walked behind me talking on a cell phone and wearing blue and black backpack

 

 

 

Guy at picnic table yelled at girl passing

Girl named Rockelle

 

 

Rockelle stopped by the table to talk to the guy and the other two girls at the picnic table

 

 

 

4 students passed by the coke machines

Looked like undergrads

 

4:52

3 gentleman passed by the washer lady

One was listening to headphones and all looked like undergrads

 

 

Students at the picnic table are talking about law school

Rockelle is thinking about joining law school program

 

4:53

Rockelle is scared, petrified about her LSATs and can’t focus on her clients

Rockelle seems young to have clients

 

4:54

Older gentleman passes the coke machines

Holding a leather portfolio and looks confused about where he’s going

 

 

Rockelle said she is a “worry wort”

 

 

4:55

3 people passed coke machines

One was older gentleman carrying a gym bag

 

4:55

Guy passes washer woman

Carrying papers on his hip and dressed in a brown suit; looks like undergrad

 

4:56

 

 

The background noise of people talking in the breezeway is making it hard to hear even the people at the picnic table next to me.

4:57

Two people passed the washer woman

One was female, the other male, both looked like young undergrads

 

 

Washer woman steps back from the windows

Looks like she’s inspecting her work

 

4:58

Washer woman walks away from the window, taking her bucket of solution

 

 

4:59

5 people walk by coke machines

4 look like young undergrads; one girl had a brown belt wrapped around her shirt and a neon green skirt

 

5:00

Two girls walked by the copy windows and then through the picnic tables.

One stopped to sit at a picnic table by herself and opened to her cell phone to read something in it

 

 

Four guys walked through the step part of the breezeway

Looked like they weren’t even old enough to be in college

 

5:01

A group of 6 people walked through the step area of the breezeway

All were dressed professionally

 

5:02

Girl who walked through tables and sat down to read phone is staring at me

Might have noticed I’m observing; she is eating some junk food and drinking a coke

 

 

Girl in red shirt walked by coke machines wearing a red shirt with Greek letters on the front

 

 

 

Three older ladies walked by the coke machines

One had a gold badge on like what UCF staff wear

 

Observation memo (written from fieldnotes)

Date: September 20, 2006
Location: Breezeway of the Washington Center by Chick-fil-a at University of Central Florida
Frame: Paired observation exercise

[Copy center windows and washer lady photo]

[Picnic table people and the coke machines photo]

Low level of inference
The traffic for the breezeway travels in specific directions on the sides of the planters, like traffic flow. People walked towards the bookstore on the side of the coke machine, whereas on the other side of the planter, by the copy center, people walked towards the student union. The group of four students at the picnic table, next to my observation table, was interested in law school. Only people walking towards the student union walked between the planters in the breezeway.

High level inference
None of the traffic appeared to be confused about where they were going. The traffic flow on the sides of the planter suggests the observed people walk the path frequently. The older traffic held papers as if they were professors walking from their office to a classroom. Many of the students in the picnic table had comments about how to get accepted to law school, but the disagreement between them makes them look like they don’t really know what they’re talking about. It is easier to walk by the coke machines towards the bookstore than it is to walk on the side of the copy center or between the planters.

Judging from the speed the window washing lady cleaned the windows, she is experienced at window washing. The window washer lady expected to work outside for an extended period of time based on the sunglasses she wore. Both people who stopped to talk to her were friends, close acquaintances, or coworkers since they stopped and sat on the side of the planter near where she was washing.

Article Review: Write-up

The study lead by Judith Correson Caruso (2004) was started as a result of a two part publication by Marc Prensky (2001a, 2001b) where he coined the terms "Digital Native" and "Digital Immigrant" to describe students' use of technology.

Methodology

  • Literature review
  • Review of the 2003 study
  • Quantitative portion of the study included 9350 freshmen and 9050 seniors with 4373 respondents over 13 higher education institutions
  • Qualitative portion had 132 students in focus groups over six institutions

Findings

  • Technology ownership
    • 93.4% of respondents own a computer
    • 70.7% and 57.1% of seniors and freshmen respectively owned a desktop
    • 38.5% and 52.7% of seniors and freshmen respectively owned a laptop
    • 11.9% overall owned PDAs
  • Internet access
    • 82.2% of on campus freshmen had Internet access through their university
    • 56.4% of seniors used a commercial Internet service provider
    • Students' satisfaction with Internet service was based partially on the institutions IT environment
    • Students are often frustrated with crowded computer labs
  • Patterns of technology use
    • The applications students use on their electronic devices are primarily for educational purposes, secondarily for communication, and lastly for presentation
    • Students often used computers for writing documents, sending e-mail, and surfing the Internet simultaneously.
  • Hours of technology use
    • Academic computer use has a strong relationship to students' academic major and class status.
  • Level of skill
    • Students gave themselves high ratings with regards to the skill they had attained with respect to applications for communication, word processing, and the Internet.
    • Seniors ranked themselves higher with regards to tools such as Powerpoint and spreadsheets.
    • Qualitative and quantitative responses differed with regards to the skills students attained. Quantitative results showed students had all the skills they need whereas qualitative results showed students only had enough minimal skills to accomplish specific tasks, with no problem-solving skills or in-depth application knowledge.
  • Information technology in the classroom
    • Students made a note of preference for technology in the classroom
    • Previous positive experiences with technology had a major impact on the preference for classroom technology
    • GPA did not have a significant impact on technology preferences
  • Impact of technology in the classroom
    • The activity with the highest impact was "helped me to better communicate with the instructor".
  • Benefits of the use of technology in the classroom
    • Students identified convenience as one of the primary benefits of using IT in class.
    • Good use of technology helped students learn
  • Barriers to the use of information technology in the classroom
    • 16.7% of students reported using IT in the classroom felt like extra work
    • 14.1% of students reporting having trouble running applications on their computer
    • 13.4% of students had limited access to a printer
    • 9.7% of students had a lack of technical support
  • Course management systems
    • Use of technology was most often defined as using a course management system
    • Students who had a stronger preference for technology in the classroom had a lower preference for using a course management system
    • There was a positive correlation between a higher percentage of students using a course management system with a higher positive assessment of the content management system at that institution.
  • Course management system features used
  • Students Perceived benefits of using a CMS

Future trends

  • Information technology use in the classroom is primarily for convenience rather than for improving learning
  • Six trends are likely to lead the way for improved information technology adoption for instruction:
    • Data mining
    • Increased student and instructor information literacy to pair with academic standards
    • Improvement of information technology quality and usability
    • Proliferation of scholarly information
    • Integration of new technologies, potentially including virtual reality, simulation, video games, or modeling
    • Improved planning and creation of work plans for implementations of technology in learning

Conclusion

  • Technology is primarily being used for convenience, communication, and management
  • Results are only a snapshot
  • Students have a working understanding of technology, but need more in-depth improvements

Caruso, J. B. (2004 September). ECAR study of students and information technology, 2004 Convenience, connection, and control. Educause Center for Applied Research. Retrieved on September 5, 2006, from http://www.usit.uio.no/it/suit/stud2004-rapport/ecar.pdf

Prensky, M. (2001, October). Digital natives, digital immigrants. On the Horizon 9(5). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Prensky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part1.pdf

Prensky, M. (2001, December). Do they really think differently? On the Horizon 9(6). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Presnsky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part2.pdf

Theory: Write-up for Conceptual Framework

In a two part publication by Marc Prensky (2001a, 2001b), he outlined changes he believes have been affecting the decline of education in the US. Prensky makes the assertion that the thinking patterns and brains of today's students have fundamentally and irreversibly changed, to a point where our education system is not designed to teach to the new thinking patterns. "Digital Immigrants," those instructors of the pre-digital age, struggle to teach "Digital Natives," who's "native language" is grounded in electronics. Though Prensky cites some indirect evidence to reinforce his claims, he confesses he had not directly observed Digital Natives (2001b). This study concentrates on investigating Prensky's specific claim that Digital Natives prefer their graphics before text (2001a).

His list of causes for change includes computers, video games, digital music players, video cams, cell phones, and other digital toys. He also makes the claim that students are spending six times more of their time playing video games and watching TV than reading. Prensky named his new breed of student the "Digital Native." The remaining population, who was not born into a digital lifestyle, is conversely named "Digital Immigrant."

The evidence Prensky (2001b) cites for why Digital Natives think differently is based in neuroplasticity, social psychology, and studies of children using games for learning. He discusses psychological malleability, attention span, and the design of games as variables within each respective category of evidence. He claims the difference between Natives and Immigrants is evident in teaching styles and is the cause of why Natives can't pay attention to instructors.

Prensky identifies Digital Immigrants as a population more likely to use the Internet as a secondary resource, print documents rather than review them on a computer screen, and call email recipients to confirm receipt of emails. Part of the claim of difference between Natives and Immigrants is a language barrier, much like children might only know about turntables or phonographs from a history class. Digital Natives are accused of having "the attention span of a gnat" for old ways of learning, favoring instead anything else (2001b). As such, Prensky outlines five generalizations for the preferences of Natives and Immigrants which he thinks affect learning.

Prensky (2001a) believes Digital Natives prefer to receive information quickly, parallel process, and multi-task. He contends Natives prefer random access to resources, graphics in presentations before text, do best when they are networked, and have instant gratification, with frequent rewards. Finally, natives prefer games to "serious" work. Conversely, Prensky's Immigrants prefer performing linear tasks slowly, individually, as part of a serious process.

One explanation Prensky offers for the evolution of digital migration relates back to adoption in cultural migration theory. In cultural migration, children easily adopt new ways of the culture, forcibly resisting the old. It is the older members of the population who are forced to adopt the new ways.

Eggen and Kauchak (1999) say a learning experience involves dispositions and attitudes, metacognition, and general transfer of knowledge. In fact, the more widely recognized process of learning is more complex. The Modal Model (Bruning, Schraw, Norby, & Ronning, 2004; Healy & McNamara, 1996) defines information processing in terms of sensory memory, short-term memory, and long-term memory. Sensory and short-term memory is limited by attention, prior knowledge, and the context in which experiences occur (Bruning et.al., 2004).

Attention is important for converting cues in sensory memory to working memory to be processed for long-term memory (Ormrod, 2006). Without the transfer of inputs from sensory memory to the higher parts of the memory chain, learners cannot rehearse information in short-term memory to remember the inputs in long-term memory (Bruning et.al., 2004; Eggen & Kauchak, 1999). Complaints of students not paying attention in the classroom is not new (Kassinove & Summers, 1968; Wetstone & Friedlander, 1974). Gagné (1969) made his attention research the top-most important part of his instructional strategy. Research of graphics in education before the "digital age," shows evidence that students prefer colors in presentations (Gaines, 1970). The Gaines publication references 29 publications related to color-forms acting as a instinctual stimulus or preference for children. The placement of items on the screen determines the importance of the content; items higher on the screen appear to the viewer to be more important and attract attention (Thorsen, 2006). The content at the top of the screen should be used to grab students' attention.

Schema theory relates to reader expectations for inputs (Garner, 1987). When incoming information fits readers' expectations, the information can be encoded into memory quickly (Garner, 1987). In technical prose, comprehension schemas are based on the extraction of information based on extracting the microstructure from text and deriving a macrostructure to serve as the "gist." The macrostructure parts are stored in memory and are used for future memory expansion, recall, and inferences (Kintsch & van Dijk, 1978). Readers' goals are based on their within-culture "textual-schemata", which can be predicted based on what readers consider relevant based on their existing macrostructure (Garner, 1987). Readers' existing schema classifies all propositions of inputs as either relevant or irrelevant (Kintsch & van Dijk, 1978).

Motivation is a key component behind the dispositions and attitudes of learning situations (Mueller, 1992). The field of behavioral psychology, or more simply Ivan Pavolv's conditioned response study, may serve as some explanation for graphical preferences of Digital Natives. Combined with cognitive psychology, or the relationship between environmental events and their outcomes, organisms learn particular situations produce particular results (Mueller, 1992). Digital Natives' experience with favorable results from graphical activities may also have a link in cognitive psychology.

All living organisms must categorize experiences to survive since not every situation should be treated the same (Smith, 2004). Learners also have a general state of prediction and expectation (Smith, 2004). The result is that we are far more likely to care about what is going to happen in the future than what is happening right now. Smith says prediction is the core of reading because it cuts down on the number of possible alternatives when we decide what to do with what our eyes are looking at. One of the constraints of prediction is prior experience and knowledge (Smith, 2004).

Smith goes on to discuss two sides of reading, which he names visual and non-visual. The more non-visual information a person has, the less visual information they need to understand what their eye are seeing and vice versa. When reading is difficult, it is because of a deficit in one of the two areas of visual or non-visual input, the link between the brain and visual input can be a bottleneck and cause functional blindness. The functional blindness causes critical information for understanding to not be passed down the memory chain: sensory memory, short-term memory, long-term memory. This point is only exasperated by the link to prior experience where Klausmeier, Ghatala, and Frayer (1974) found prior experience can lead subjects to ignore parts of a later task. Here, the preference of Prensky's Digital natives to have graphical presentation first is a result of the failure for the learners to analyze text stimuli in sensory memory as a cue fore relevant response (Mueller, 1992). On the other hand, noise in a message, irrelevant details, or lack of relevant prior knowledge may serve as a distraction, disruption, or activation of the wrong prior knowledge in a learning experience (Clark & Lyon, 2004).

To date, there are no theories or conceptual frameworks to link Prensky's observations with a solid foundation of research. The preferences of learners may be impacted as a result of conditioning to specific environments; however, even with differing backgrounds of electronic exposure, digital immigrants and digital natives should have statistically insignificant differences exposed to a similar, base set of optimal learning conditions which fit the learning abilities of students outside the window of digital aptitude. Clark and Lyons (2004) give a formula of conditions to support learning with six psychological events, which may support higher level framework of learning. They also put differences between learners on the same level of importance for creating optimal learning conditions, citing prior knowledge and special ability as limiting variables. While using Doom, a classic computer game, in a lesson to teach 20-year-olds may not have the same impact on Digital Immigrants, the reason Digital Immigrants may not have similar impact is not because of limited digital experience per-say, but rather that they simply don't share the same prior knowledge as the Digital Natives who played Doom. There would be a similar situation within a group of Digital Natives if some had not played Doom when others had; the link to building on prior knowledge would be different.

References

Bruning, R. H., Schraw, G. J., Norby, M. M., & Ronning, R. R. (2004). Cognitive psychology and instruction (4th ed). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Merrill Prentice Hall.

Clark, R. E. (1994). Media will never influence learning. Educational Technology Research and Development, 42(2), 21-29. Retrieved on July 27, 2006, from the University of Southern Queensland Web site: http://www.usq.edu.au/material/unit/resource/clark/media.htm

Clark, R. C., & Lyons, C. (2004). Graphics for learning: Proven guidelines for planning, designing, and evaluating visuals in training materials. San Francisco, CA: Pfeiffer.

Eggen, P., & Kauchak, D. (1999). Educational psychology: Windows on classrooms (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill Prentice Hall.

Gagne, R. M., & Rohwer, W. D., Jr. (1969). Instructional psychology. Annual Review of Psychology, 20, 381-418.

Gaines, R. (1970 December). Children's selective attention to stimuli: Stage or set? Child Development, 41(4), 979-991.

Garner, R. (1987). Metacognition and reading comprehension. Norwood, NJ: Ablex Publishing Corporation.

Healy, A. F, & McNamara, D. S. (1996). Verbal learning memory: Does the modal model still work? Annual Review of Psychology, 47, 143-172.

Kassinove, H., & Summers, M. (1968 January). The developmental attention test – A preliminary report on an objective test of attention. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 24(1), 76-78.

Kintsch, W., & van Dijk, T. A. (1978). Toward a model of text comprehension and production. Psychological review, 85(5).

Klausmeier, H. J., Chatala, E. S., & Frayer, D. A. (1974). Conceptual learning and development: A cognitive view. New York, NY: Academic Press, Inc.

Mueller, R. J. (1992). Instructional psychology: Principles and practices. Champaign, IL: Stipes Publishing Company.

Ormrod, J. E. (2006). Essentials of educational psychology. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Merrill Prentice Hall.

Prensky, M. (2001, October). Digital natives, digital immigrants. On the Horizon 9(5). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Prensky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part1.pdf

Prensky, M. (2001, December). Do they really think differently? On the Horizon 9(6). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Presnsky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part2.pdf

Smith, F. (2004). Understanding reading: A psycholinguistic analysis of reading and learning to read (6th ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Thorsen, C. (2006). TechTactics: Technology for teachers second edition. Boston, MA: Pearson Education, Inc.

Fieldwork: Interview Transcript and Memo

Instructions: Duration 20 minutes. Interview one person (NOT your partner) using your questions for your mini-study and then share the transcript with your partner for peer review. Here you are: 1) practicing the interview process and 2) testing your questions.

Please follow the rubric and submit (as one document) your transcript, the related memo and any field notes (optional). Clearly label each section. Note that your peer review is a separate assignment. Once you have transcribed your interview, please send the transcription and your memo to your peer for critque, and likewise give them written feedback for their work on the interview. Please see Padgett for details on the transcription.

Interview memo and transcript

The interview process has been related to something I have been working on researching for several semesters. Unfortunately, I have spent much of my discussion time during research talking with other instructional technology academics about the topic of Marc Prensky's Digital Natives and Digital Immigrants. The purpose of this interview was to talk with someone who I viewed as borderline between a Digital Immigrant and Digital Native so they could potentially see both sides of the characteristics between the two. Included is an analytic memo and transcript of the interview.

It also served as a pre-pilot to my mini-pilot study for EDF7475a Qualitative Research in Education. The questions were pre-written and approved by the University of Central Florida IRB committee. The informed consent document was read, for the most part, verbatim from the version the IRB approved, with exceptions for the obvious differences. The original informed consent document was designed for an anonymous, web-based questionnaire.

The overall goal of the questionnaire was get other thoughts about the accuracy of the adjectives Digital Native and Digital Immigrant, coined by Marc Prensky. Prensky's descriptions of each type of person are based in a large part on age, which is why Lollita was a convenient participant, as closely randomly selected as possible. Generally, a Digital Native is named as such because they grew up with video games, mobile phones, the Internet, digital cameras, and so on, whereas Digital Immigrants did not have such technologies as children, so they have had to adapt to incorporate them in their lifestyle.

Before I started the interview, I expected Digital Natives to be more simply defined as a young person and a Digital Immigrant as and old geezer. I was actually concerned the answers to my questions would be so short and matter-of-fact, I wouldn't have much to follow up on. I even got a little adrenaline rush of fear when she asked what a Digital Native was. The interview instantly got a feeling of a difficult exam rather than a casual interview. I've taken plenty of tests where I just have no idea what the answer to a question is, so I was glad with Lollita picked up and ran along with an answer. It was almost like she was thinking aloud, which was great for extracting information from the interview process. She broke the parts of the terminology down to things she was familiar with.

At times, in the interview, she seemed to stray from the topic to tell some sort of personal story I didn't think at the time had much to do with the interview questions. In reflection, I could have probably asked follow-up questions to tie her personal story back to the question and make her talk even more and faster. For example, Prensky suggests Digital Immigrants won't be as successful as Digital Natives unless they make an effort to become Digital Immigrants, as opposed to being digitally ignorant. When Lollita started talking about her Mexican neighbor, I might have been able to tie that in to success; for example, something along the lines of, "How do you think not learning English affected your neighbors' success in life?"

I feel like there should be a set of follow-up questions related to Lollita's line of thinking about resistance to new technology, then saying Digital Immigrants should make multi-dollar business out of it. That might have better helped define the business relationship she was putting on the differences between Digital Natives and Digital Immigrants.

As the interview went on, the conversation turned from an awkward series of pauses, to something more like a free-flowing brainstorm. Getting to the brainstorm stage of the interview, and so quickly, made it kind of disappointing for the interview to end, especially since I have so much of this topic riding on my dissertation.

In terms of inferences, she thought Digital Immigrants were hard-working, self made business owners. Digital Natives were more likely to follow a structured, incremental series of promotions through a corporation. She saw how not every culture or country is digitally fluent. She agreed, in part, with Prensky to say older people would prefer to do things in a more face-to-face manner, whereas a younger person would prefer Internet-enabled methods of communication.

Trying to interview in a noisy restaurant, while your participant is trying to eat, with a limited lunch hour may not have been the best environment for me to have done this interview. The time constraint for their lunch period may have kept her answers shorter than they could have been. That was especially evident at the end of the interview when she politely asked if we could wrap up the interview. Also, asking someone I didn't know makes it hard for me to ask follow-up questions later on. However, on the other hand, the questionnaire and IRB approval are all based on a matter of anonymity in the first place, so I have a better understanding for why a researcher might go through all the extra effort to make a study confidential as opposed to anonymous in nature.

I did not take any notes during the interview. I was trying so hard to keep her attention with eye contact; I didn't feel comfortable with recording and writing things. In retrospect, I probably should have just asked her if doing both was alright with her.


Transcript

1

DKN: Thank you for agreeing to be interviewed today, so I can practice my interviewing for class. The participant asked to be identified as simply Lollita. (.) This interview should take 15 or 20 minutes. Our location is the Panera Bread (.) on uh, (.) in Waterford Lakes. (.) [shuffling paper] I'm going to read a document to you that is important for your own protection.

2

L: Ok. (.) What is it?

3

DKN: The school has a procedure (.) er (.) office or whatever called IRB that's supposed to monitor the studies done at the university to make sure nobody is hurt in any way during research projects. (.) I'm going to read the (.) um (.) disclaimer to you that they had me submit for approval. Ready?

4

L: Yes.

5

DKN: Ok. Just stop me if at any point you don't understand or agree with something (.) I am a graduate student in Instructional Technology at the University of Central Florida. I am conducting a pilot study this fall, the purpose of which is to determine perceptions of how Instructional Technology students think age affects proficiency with using electronics. (.) This research study has been approved by the Institutional Review Board (IRB) at the University of Central Florida (UCF). (.) Your interview will be conducted in via an online survey service. The link is below. The questions will be predetermined. There will be a free response area at the end of the survey where you may suggest topics and opinions in any area you feel is relevant to the topics presented. The survey may be completed at your convenience. (.) In your case, your responses will not be anonymous or confidential. They will she shared with the rest of the students in my class and my professor, and might be used in any papers I publish in the future, even though I'm not quite sure if I would actually include this interview. (.) There are no (.) anticipated risks, compensation or other direct benefits to you as a participant in this interview. The survey should take approximately 15 minutes to complete. You are free to withdraw your consent to participate and may discontinue your participation in the interview at any time without consequence.  If you have any questions about this research project, please contact my faculty supervisor, Dr. Laura Blasi at:  407/823-1761.  Information regarding your rights as a research volunteer may be obtained from: (.) Barbara Ward, Institutional Review Board (IRB) University of Central Florida (UCF) (.) 12202 Research Parkway, Suite 501; Orlando, Florida 32826-3252 Telephone: (407) 823-2901 (.) If you decide to participate in this research study, you must be at least 18 years old and give consent that I can get for archival on this recording. If you agree, go ahead, say you're over 18, say your name, and say you agree.

6

L: My name is Lollita, I'm well over 18, and I'm more than happy to take yer survey.

7

DKN: Ok, then. (.) Question 1. (.) Based just on the label "Digital Immigrant", what skills would you imagine such a person having with electronics?

8

L: Uh (.) A what?

9

DKN: A Digital Immigrant. If I pointed at someone and called them a Digital Immigrant, what skills would you think they had with electronics?

10

L: I guess (.) since it has the word immigrant in it (.) they wouldn't be very experienced with them (.) but then even immigrants have some sort of exposure to a new land. I guess by that you mean someone who is learning electronics so they can adapt to a new environment. I always think of New York when I hear the word immigrant and pictures I've seen of immigrants getting off boats to see the US for the first time. With that mental picture I see someone who wants to learn how to be a US citizen, or in this case, someone who wants to learn how to use electronics, but has kind of an old accent of their old ways. You know (.) as I think about it more (.) there are also Mexican immigrants who I also have noticed don't necessarily even try to learn English. I had a neighbor once who's wife didn't even know English. We just waved at each other in the driveways and I talked to the husband when he was home since he worked in retail. So with that picture, maybe this Digital Immigrant person is resisting new technologies? Could you clarify it for me?

11

DKN: Well, (.) I already have an idea of my own. (.) I'm more interested in what you think about it.

12

L: Alright fine. Uhm (.) In that case, (.) I'm going to hope you have a positive outlook on life (.) and I'll go with the New York images. Then a Digital Immigrant is someone who sees all the new electronics out in the world and wants a piece of the action. I bet it doesn't take them long to be that guy who owns Blockbuster and the football team, who started from nothing, worked hard, and made a multi gazillion dollar business out of it.

13

DKN: Alright (.) I think that covers that question. I'm very curious to hear about the next topic. So question 2. Based solely on the label "Digital Native", what skills would you imagine such a person having with electronics?

14

L: I had a feeling something like that was coming. [chuckle] I don't think a Digital Native would have an appreciation for the things available to them. Cell phones are just a part of their normal, daily life. They just expect email to be there and work. I think of entitlements when I think of natives, but I'm not sure what exactly is an electronic entitlement. I spose the Internet could be an entitlement. It's just always there, it's the basis for a lot of communication and business. They probably get their news off the internet instead of from the TV. Since it's probably just something normal to them, they wouldn't even realize how cool it is to be able to get an old book off the Internet from a library in another continent. They wouldn't have the same attitude to do cool stuff with it like an immigrant would.

15

DKN: Alright (.) now describe how the formal education of a "Digital Immigrant" might differ from a "Digital Native."

16

L: Why does it have to differ? Can't they have the same background?

17

DKN: Well, like I said before, I already have thoughts on the matter. I'll back up then. Do you think a Digital Immigrant would have different formal education than a Digital Native?

18

L: I don't know why they would. Someone in their 20's could get a Ph.D. just the same as someone who's had their Ph.D. since 1960 and they could be in different countries from different colleges of learning, like business and biology. (.) I spose they could have different ways of having done their homework. The old guy probably had to use a card catalog on the library whereas the young one searched Google all the time and complained about their professors in a blog somewhere. (.) You know, I complained about a professor online once and they actually found it and confronted me about it. I don't recommend it. At least wait until after you graduate. By then, you probably won't care about complaining anymore.

19

DKN: I guess I may need to revise that question in the future.

20

L: Yeah, I think so.

21

DKN: Next, describe how you think a 19-year-old college Freshman would prefer to receive their course materials.

22

L: I bet they want everything by email. They probably just want to talk to their professor over Yahoo Messenger or something. You know, I bet all the new students in college that bring laptops to class don't even listen to the lectures. I can see them surfing the internet, checking their email, blogging if that's what it's still called, downloading the newest and coolest new games. Kids are always talking about how bored they are or how tired they are. They probably want to just sleep in till noon every day, goof off in front of the TV, and get to the school junk whenever it's more convenient. Maybe they open an email in the morning and decide not to work on it till after dinner.

23

DKN: Alright, now describe how you think a 19-year-old college Freshman would prefer to collaborate on a group project versus a 60-year-old retiree.

24

L: First, I bet the retiree is the one that takes over the group leadership. They probably try to setup a face-to-face meeting somewhere, exchange phone numbers, addresses, email information. Meanwhile, the 19-year-old is probably thinking to themselves that they just want to meet online. You know, I've heard that before, but I've never really quite understood what it means to meet online. Do people really set up cameras and try to have a screen full of other people's cameras? My thinking outloud is probably driving you nuts, huh.

25

DKN: Absolutely not. You're actually being quite helpful.

26

L: I don't know how, but anyway. The freshman probably wants to write some Office documents and fire them back and forth via email. The old guy probably wants to meet at the library in a study room and draw on the caulk board.

27

DKN: I think that will do for that question. Next, describe how you think a college professor would prefer to generate and present lessons to 19-year-old college freshmen.

28

L: Powerpoint seems like it would be a popular choice. I bet you can even get slides from the book publishers now so you don't even have to create the content yourself. Even if they can't get them from the publishers, they probably copy a bunch of text from the textbooks that the students don't read anyway then read the Powerpoints to the students during class. I guess if they were a really old professor, they could have some overheads or something.

29

DKN: Can you give an example of when a technology boundary negatively affected your success on a project for work or school?

30

L: I procrastinated on an assignment once. It was for a web class where we had to use webct and upload the final work to the homework dropbox thingie. I was ready to turn it in at the last minute, but my internet connection went down. By the time I called Bellsouth, got everything working again, the dropbox thing was closed. I ended up having to email the assignment through webct email, which the professor never checked, and I had a bunch of headaches explaining why the assignment was late, the professor complaining about it not being turned in, in a way that made it organized for them to grade papers, and. It was just a bad experience. I ended up getting 20 points knocked off the assignment, which still makes me mad because I had the work done, it was just my connection and the professor didn't believe me. I did learn not to procrastinate quite as much, though.

31

DKN: Can you give an example of when you perceived age was a boundary in the success of a project at work or school?

32

L: I always like to think I'm smarter than my boss. My boss told me once, though, that I wasn't old enough to have the experience to handle being promoted. I sure didn't like that answer since I thought I was smarter than him in the first place. Who knows, maybe I said something to piss him off. Needless to say, I don't work there anymore or talk to that jerk. I need to go. Can we wrap this up?

33

DKN: Sure, I just have some short questions left. I'm going to read some age categories. Tell me which one yours falls in. Under 25, 25 to 34?

34

L: That one.

35

DKN: 25 to 34?

36

L: Yes.

37

DKN: What is your highest educational degree?

38

L: I have a BA.

39

DKN: Please, could you suggest topics and/or opinions in any area you feel is relevant to the topics presented in this questionnaire.

40

L: Not really. I need to go.

41

DKN: Alright then. (.) Uh. (.) I appreciate the time you gave me.

42

L: No problem. (.) Good luck with the rest of your assignment.

Proposal: Presentation Slideshow

A Pilot Study for EDF 7475: Instructional Technology Students' Perceptions of How Age Impacts Proficiency with Electronics

Problem: Marc Prensky makes his conclusions ("research") based his observation from memory
Question: Are Prensky's observations reproducible in the minds of other educators?
Significance: Impacts presentation of content to learners of different backgrounds.

See our texts...

Lit review: Scarce supply of academic research related to Prensky; industry uses his coined terms
Clark & Lyons (2004) "Graphics for Learning" provides a base conceptual framework
Ask educators if their experience matches Prensky

See our texts and the readings related to the IRB

  • Population: UCF Instructional Technology listserv
  • IT Chair leading research on Prensky
  • Researcher has been studying adult learning theory and how varying display formats affects learning

Data

Triangulate:
Distribute web-based questionnaire
Cite similar studies
Quote existing adult learning theory

Interpretivism:
Why?
No validated instrument exists to measure "digital propensity". Even lead researchers in graphics for learning (Clark & Lyons) don't make a definitive declaration to support or refute Prensky.
How?
Use triangulation to compare the results of the questionnaire to educators with existing similar studies and adult learning theory.

Methodological Limitations

Differential selection and selection maturation interaction: Subscribers to the IT listserv have likely had exposure to the topic from professors and have background that may skew their responses.
Self reporting error and bias
Random sampling error: Questionnaire is available to every subscriber. Only particular people may respond.
Instrumentation: Un-piloted questionnaire may not test what it is meant to test

Next steps

  • Dissertation topic "An investigation of the relationship between insurance employees' digital propensity and their reactions to instruction"
  • Helps form the basis for a hypothesis of the outcome of the dissertation topic

Works Cited

Warne, D. (2006, August 23). Unlock work internet or risk losing staff: Microsoft. APC Magazine. Retrieved on August 23, 2006 from http://www.apcstart.com/site/dwarne/2006/08/1104/unlock-work-internet-or-risk-losing-staff-microsoft

Clark, R. C., & Lyons, C. (2004). Graphics for learning: Proven guidelines for planning, designing, and evaluating visuals in training materials. San Francisco, CA: Pfeiffer.

Prensky, M. (2001, October). Digital natives, digital immigrants. On the Horizon 9(5). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Prensky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part1.pdf

Prensky, M. (2001, December). Do they really think differently? On the Horizon 9(6). Retrieved November 25, 2005, from the Marc Presnsky Web site: http://www.marcprensky.com/writing/Prensky%20-%20Digital%20Natives,%20Digital%20Immigrants%20-%20Part2.pdf

Mini Study Analytic Memos [partial]

The Prensky stuff I have been doing has been planned to be researched on insurance industry professionals. When I piloted the survey instrument for the Digital Propensity Index to a sample of the professionals I had planned on surveying, I only had a 0.4% response rate compared to over 4% for undergrads, 10% for the graduate students, and over an estimated 30% for instructional technology cohort, using the same contact emails. It may be time to re-review the Dillman TDM for the 2007 update on doing surveys. I may also need to ask Howard at CHL Marketing in person if I could use his list of customers as contacts.

The idea behind piloting to the insurance professionals, even though I wanted to save them for my dissertation, was to make sure the DPI questionnaire was valid for them. Unfortunately, I probably will not make that discovery, nor will I get enough responses in my dissertation, using that audience and a quantitative method, to graduate. That may mean it is time to open my realm of considerations to a more mixed-method type of survey.


Dr. Hirumi forwarded an email to the Instructional Technology listserv about a researcher in the UK who is expanding on Prensky's research, and bringing it to the attention of government. Though I thought some of the comments in the article were made for flash and drama, it still had very little real evidence to explain the differences between Digital Immigrants and Digital Natives.

The article discussed having children get more exercise to release good chemicals in the brain. One of the points said children play games before going to sleep, which releases chemicals in the brain to keep them awake longer when they actually do try to fall asleep, then suffer in school from sleep deprivation. While that doesn't have anything to do per say with instructional technology or the design of instruction, it is a notable point of interest to not have your kids playing games right before they go to bed. In fact, I fail to see why any of the article is related to the design of instruction.


Preliminary findings appear to show comments on the following items related to technology, electronics, and digital toys:

Digital Immigrants

Mixed

Digital Natives

  • Telephones
  • Use VCRs
  • Simple computer functions
  • Copy machines
  • Library searches
  • Typing
  • Digital cameras
  • Limited technological proficiency
  • DVD players
  • Basic features of mobile phones
  • Limited knowledge of Microsoft Office
  • Prefer traditional lecture
  • Communicate face-to-face or by conference call
  • Prefer instruction on paper
  • Internet navigation
  • Word processing
  • Forwarding of emails
  • Program VCRs
  • LEET speak
  • Instant messaging
  • MySpace
  • Shortcuts
  • Use of icons and buttons
  • Comfortable with electronics
  • Change ringtones on mobile phones
  • PDAs
  • Blogging
  • Play computerized games
  • Use portable music players (iPods)
  • Full functional knowledge of Microsoft Office
  • Communicate by online chat
  • Prefer web-based instruction
  • Only meet face-to-face to formalize and finalize projects

A recurring theme is how Digital Immigrants use electronics for task completion, whereas Digital Natives additionally use electronics for entertainment.

One downside of interviewing people already potentially familiar with Prensky is how one person preferred to argue with how I asked questions and my use of "Digital Native" and "Digital Immigrant," rather than just answer as I had asked.

I noted one respondent age 60+ said "old school" college processors will deliver course materials as "force fed, instructor delivered, and stale." If older people are truly Immigrants, should they think instruction is stale, even if it is their preference?

AttachmentSize
Norman,David_Kent-Analytic_memos.pdf557.43 KB

Practice interview and memo

The real participant's name has been removed to protect anonymity.

The interview process has been related to something I have been working on researching for several semesters. Unfortunately, I have spent much of my discussion time during research talking with other instructional technology academics about the topic of Marc Prensky's Digital Natives and Digital Immigrants. The purpose of this interview was to talk with someone who I viewed as borderline between a Digital Immigrant and Digital Native so they could potentially see both sides of the characteristics between the two. Included is an analytic memo and transcript of the interview.

It also served as a pre-pilot to my mini-pilot study for EDF7475a Qualitative Research in Education. The questions were pre-written and approved by the University of Central Florida IRB committee. The informed consent document was read, for the most part, verbatim from the version the IRB approved, with exceptions for the obvious differences. The original informed consent document was designed for an anonymous, web-based questionnaire.

The overall goal of the questionnaire was get other thoughts about the accuracy of the adjectives Digital Native and Digital Immigrant, coined by Marc Prensky. Prensky's descriptions of each type of person are based in a large part on age, which is why Anonymous was a convenient participant, as closely randomly selected as possible. Generally, a Digital Native is named as such because they grew up with video games, mobile phones, the Internet, digital cameras, and so on, whereas Digital Immigrants did not have such technologies as children, so they have had to adapt to incorporate them in their lifestyle.

Before I started the interview, I expected Digital Natives to be more simply defined as a young person and a Digital Immigrant as and old geezer. I was actually concerned the answers to my questions would be so short and matter-of-fact, I wouldn't have much to follow up on. I even got a little adrenaline rush of fear when she asked what a Digital Native was. The interview instantly got a feeling of a difficult exam rather than a casual interview. I've taken plenty of tests where I just have no idea what the answer to a question is, so I was glad with Anonymous picked up and ran along with an answer. It was almost like she was thinking aloud, which was great for extracting information from the interview process. She broke the parts of the terminology down to things she was familiar with.

At times, in the interview, she seemed to stray from the topic to tell some sort of personal story I didn't think at the time had much to do with the interview questions. In reflection, I could have probably asked follow-up questions to tie her personal story back to the question and make her talk even more and faster. For example, Prensky suggests Digital Immigrants won't be as successful as Digital Natives unless they make an effort to become Digital Immigrants, as opposed to being digitally ignorant. When Anonymous started talking about her Mexican neighbor, I might have been able to tie that in to success; for example, something along the lines of, "How do you think not learning English affected your neighbors' success in life?"

I feel like there should be a set of follow-up questions related to Anonymous's line of thinking about resistance to new technology, then saying Digital Immigrants should make multi-dollar business out of it. That might have better helped define the business relationship she was putting on the differences between Digital Natives and Digital Immigrants.
As the interview went on, the conversation turned from an awkward series of pauses, to something more like a free-flowing brainstorm. Getting to the brainstorm stage of the interview, and so quickly, made it kind of disappointing for the interview to end, especially since I have so much of this topic riding on my dissertation.

In terms of inferences, she thought Digital Immigrants were hard-working, self made business owners. Digital Natives were more likely to follow a structured, incremental series of promotions through a corporation. She saw how not every culture or country is digitally fluent. She agreed, in part, with Prensky to say older people would prefer to do things in a more face-to-face manner, whereas a younger person would prefer Internet-enabled methods of communication.

Trying to interview in a noisy restaurant, while your participant is trying to eat, with a limited lunch hour may not have been the best environment for me to have done this interview. The time constraint for their lunch period may have kept her answers shorter than they could have been. That was especially evident at the end of the interview when she politely asked if we could wrap up the interview. Also, asking someone I didn't know makes it hard for me to ask follow-up questions later on. However, on the other hand, the questionnaire and IRB approval are all based on a matter of anonymity in the first place, so I have a better understanding for why a researcher might go through all the extra effort to make a study confidential as opposed to anonymous in nature.

I did not take any notes during the interview. I was trying so hard to keep her attention with eye contact; I didn't feel comfortable with recording and writing things. In retrospect, I probably should have just asked her if doing both was alright with her.

 

1

DKN: Thank you for agreeing to be interviewed today, so I can practice my interviewing for class. The participant asked to be identified as simply Anonymous. (.) This interview should take 15 or 20 minutes. Our location is the Panera Bread (.) on uh, (.) in Waterford Lakes. (.) [shuffling paper] I'm going to read a document to you that is important for your own protection.

2

Ok. (.) What is it?

3

DKN: The school has a procedure (.) er (.) office or whatever called IRB that's supposed to monitor the studies done at the university to make sure nobody is hurt in any way during research projects. (.) I'm going to read the (.) um (.) disclaimer to you that they had me submit for approval. Ready?

4

Yes.

5

DKN: Ok. Just stop me if at any point you don't understand or agree with something (.) I am a graduate student in Instructional Technology at the University of Central Florida. I am conducting a pilot study this fall, the purpose of which is to determine perceptions of how Instructional Technology students think age affects proficiency with using electronics. (.) This research study has been approved by the Institutional Review Board (IRB) at the University of Central Florida (UCF). (.) Your interview will be conducted in via an online survey service. The link is below. The questions will be predetermined. There will be a free response area at the end of the survey where you may suggest topics and opinions in any area you feel is relevant to the topics presented. The survey may be completed at your convenience. (.) In your case, your responses will not be anonymous or confidential. They will she shared with the rest of the students in my class and my professor, and might be used in any papers I publish in the future, even though I'm not quite sure if I would actually include this interview. (.) There are no (.) anticipated risks, compensation or other direct benefits to you as a participant in this interview. The survey should take approximately 15 minutes to complete. You are free to withdraw your consent to participate and may discontinue your participation in the interview at any time without consequence. If you have any questions about this research project, please contact my faculty supervisor, Dr. Laura Blasi at: 407/823-1761. Information regarding your rights as a research volunteer may be obtained from: (.) Barbara Ward, Institutional Review Board (IRB) University of Central Florida (UCF) (.) 12202 Research Parkway, Suite 501; Orlando, Florida 32826-3252 Telephone: (407) 823-2901 (.) If you decide to participate in this research study, you must be at least 18 years old and give consent that I can get for archival on this recording. If you agree, go ahead, say you're over 18, say your name, and say you agree.

6

My name is Anonymous, I'm well over 18, and I'm more than happy to take yer survey.

7

DKN: Ok, then. (.) Question 1. (.) Based just on the label "Digital Immigrant", what skills would you imagine such a person having with electronics?

8

Uh (.) A what?

9

DKN: A Digital Immigrant. If I pointed at someone and called them a Digital Immigrant, what skills would you think they had with electronics?

10

I guess (.) since it has the word immigrant in it (.) they wouldn't be very experienced with them (.) but then even immigrants have some sort of exposure to a new land. I guess by that you mean someone who is learning electronics so they can adapt to a new environment. I always think of New York when I hear the word immigrant and pictures I've seen of immigrants getting off boats to see the US for the first time. With that mental picture I see someone who wants to learn how to be a US citizen, or in this case, someone who wants to learn how to use electronics, but has kind of an old accent of their old ways. You know (.) as I think about it more (.) there are also Mexican immigrants who I also have noticed don't necessarily even try to learn English. I had a neighbor once who's wife didn't even know English. We just waved at each other in the driveways and I talked to the husband when he was home since he worked in retail. So with that picture, maybe this Digital Immigrant person is resisting new technologies? Could you clarify it for me?

11

DKN: Well, (.) I already have an idea of my own. (.) I'm more interested in what you think about it.

12

Alright fine. Uhm (.) In that case, (.) I'm going to hope you have a positive outlook on life (.) and I'll go with the New York images. Then a Digital Immigrant is someone who sees all the new electronics out in the world and wants a piece of the action. I bet it doesn't take them long to be that guy who owns Blockbuster and the football team, who started from nothing, worked hard, and made a multi gazillion dollar business out of it.

13

DKN: Alright (.) I think that covers that question. I'm very curious to hear about the next topic. So question 2. Based solely on the label "Digital Native", what skills would you imagine such a person having with electronics?

14

I had a feeling something like that was coming. [chuckle] I don't think a Digital Native would have an appreciation for the things available to them. Cell phones are just a part of their normal, daily life. They just expect email to be there and work. I think of entitlements when I think of natives, but I'm not sure what exactly is an electronic entitlement. I spose the Internet could be an entitlement. It's just always there, it's the basis for a lot of communication and business. They probably get their news off the internet instead of from the TV. Since it's probably just something normal to them, they wouldn't even realize how cool it is to be able to get an old book off the Internet from a library in another continent. They wouldn't have the same attitude to do cool stuff with it like an immigrant would.

15

DKN: Alright (.) now describe how the formal education of a "Digital Immigrant" might differ from a "Digital Native."

16

Why does it have to differ? Can't they have the same background?

17

DKN: Well, like I said before, I already have thoughts on the matter. I'll back up then. Do you think a Digital Immigrant would have different formal education than a Digital Native?

18

I don't know why they would. Someone in their 20's could get a Ph.D. just the same as someone who's had their Ph.D. since 1960 and they could be in different countries from different colleges of learning, like business and biology. (.) I spose they could have different ways of having done their homework. The old guy probably had to use a card catalog on the library whereas the young one searched Google all the time and complained about their professors in a blog somewhere. (.) You know, I complained about a professor online once and they actually found it and confronted me about it. I don't recommend it. At least wait until after you graduate. By then, you probably won't care about complaining anymore.

19

DKN: I guess I may need to revise that question in the future.

20

Yeah, I think so.

21

DKN: Next, describe how you think a 19-year-old college Freshman would prefer to receive their course materials.

22

I bet they want everything by email. They probably just want to talk to their professor over Yahoo Messenger or something. You know, I bet all the new students in college that bring laptops to class don't even listen to the lectures. I can see them surfing the internet, checking their email, blogging if that's what it's still called, downloading the newest and coolest new games. Kids are always talking about how bored they are or how tired they are. They probably want to just sleep in till noon every day, goof off in front of the TV, and get to the school junk whenever it's more convenient. Maybe they open an email in the morning and decide not to work on it till after dinner.

23

DKN: Alright, now describe how you think a 19-year-old college Freshman would prefer to collaborate on a group project versus a 60-year-old retiree.

24

First, I bet the retiree is the one that takes over the group leadership. They probably try to setup a face-to-face meeting somewhere, exchange phone numbers, addresses, email information. Meanwhile, the 19-year-old is probably thinking to themselves that they just want to meet online. You know, I've heard that before, but I've never really quite understood what it means to meet online. Do people really set up cameras and try to have a screen full of other people's cameras? My thinking outloud is probably driving you nuts, huh.

25

DKN: Absolutely not. You're actually being quite helpful.

26

I don't know how, but anyway. The freshman probably wants to write some Office documents and fire them back and forth via email. The old guy probably wants to meet at the library in a study room and draw on the caulk board.

27

DKN: I think that will do for that question. Next, describe how you think a college professor would prefer to generate and present lessons to 19-year-old college freshmen.

28

Powerpoint seems like it would be a popular choice. I bet you can even get slides from the book publishers now so you don't even have to create the content yourself. Even if they can't get them from the publishers, they probably copy a bunch of text from the textbooks that the students don't read anyway then read the Powerpoints to the students during class. I guess if they were a really old professor, they could have some overheads or something.

29

DKN: Can you give an example of when a technology boundary negatively affected your success on a project for work or school?

30

I procrastinated on an assignment once. It was for a web class where we had to use webct and upload the final work to the homework dropbox thingie. I was ready to turn it in at the last minute, but my internet connection went down. By the time I called Bellsouth, got everything working again, the dropbox thing was closed. I ended up having to email the assignment through webct email, which the professor never checked, and I had a bunch of headaches explaining why the assignment was late, the professor complaining about it not being turned in, in a way that made it organized for them to grade papers, and. It was just a bad experience. I ended up getting 20 points knocked off the assignment, which still makes me mad because I had the work done, it was just my connection and the professor didn't believe me. I did learn not to procrastinate quite as much, though.

31

DKN: Can you give an example of when you perceived age was a boundary in the success of a project at work or school?

32

I always like to think I'm smarter than my boss. My boss told me once, though, that I wasn't old enough to have the experience to handle being promoted. I sure didn't like that answer since I thought I was smarter than him in the first place. Who knows, maybe I said something to piss him off. Needless to say, I don't work there anymore or talk to that jerk. I need to go. Can we wrap this up?

33

DKN: Sure, I just have some short questions left. I'm going to read some age categories. Tell me which one yours falls in. Under 25, 25 to 34?

34

That one.

35

DKN: 25 to 34?

36

Yes.

37

DKN: What is your highest educational degree?

38

I have a BA.

39

DKN: Please, could you suggest topics and/or opinions in any area you feel is relevant to the topics presented in this questionnaire.

40

Not really. I need to go.

41

DKN: Alright then. (.) Uh. (.) I appreciate the time you gave me.

42

No problem. (.) Good luck with the rest of your assignment.

Midterm essays

Epistemology is your way of looking at the world; how you understand your knowledge of the world.

Reflexivity is one practice used and documented by researchers that increases the internal validity of the study.

Emic is the term anthropologists use to describe insider or participant perspectives.

Fieldnotes, memos, and keeping a journal are three forms in which a researcher generates data for analysis in a qualitative study.

Three ways to determine trustworthiness are asking, is it 1) acceptable practice, 2) competent practice, 3) ethically conducted?

Some of the strategies for ensuring credibility and rigor are

  1. using a critical friend
  2. using the community of practice
  3. "being there"
  4. triangulation
  5. participant validation

Member checking is verifying one's data and interpretations with study respondents. It helps to guard against investigator bias and gives the respondents a chance to correct your data if it is inaccurate.

Question: What should I do if I have to conduct interviews with English speakers and my native language is Italian -- should I use a translator?
Answer: If you are fluent in English, you may not need a translator, but you must be able to personally translate cultural meanings from the other language. If not fluent, consult with a translator and discuss with them beforehand what your questions are to make sure they can translate and not loose meaning from the participants. Not having a translator and not being fluent can create a lot of work for yourself or having a translator that mis-quotes meaning can alter the results.

Reflexivity allows researchers to be critical of their own biases. It opens the door to examining ways in which they are part of the setting, context, and social phenomenon since the researcher's mere presence can modify the actions of the participants. Researchers often change their perspective while researching, and reflexivity can out those differences.

Prompt: Discuss questions a school can ask regarding informed consent and describe how you as a qualitative researcher could respond to those questions.
Answer: What is the focus of the research? What are the guiding questions? Why and for whom is the research being done? What role(s) will school personnel be asked to play in this research? What feedback will the school receive, what form will it take, and at what stages of the research process will it be provided? The the conceptual framework should be used to answer some. Some of the content is required for IRB approval and may be able to be carbon copied to the school administrators.

Inductive data analysis is the process of reasoning from specific details to a general body of knowledge to a theory. Deductive data analysis is opposite; it takes a theory and tests it's applicability.

high inference observation: The boy may have gotten his feelings hurt by the group of girls that whispered something in his direction.
low inference observation: The boy is building a castle in the sandbox; girl put a feather on the top of the castle; the boy and girl are friends.

Final essays

Grounded theory is an approach to data analysis that uses theoretical sampling.

Voicing is a characteristic of narrative design.

Local knowledge and situated lives are characteristics of ethnographic design.

By leaving out triangulation, member checks, a peer debriefer, memos, and fieldnotes, your study will be weak in terms of external validity.

Grounded theory is oriented towards action and process whereas interpretivism would have the researcher spend more time with the data, returning to it over and over as assertions develop. Grounded theory is geared to build a theory from interpretations of the data by the researcher's background of literature, personal experience, and interactions with the data. The product is an inductively derived theory from the phenomena it represents. The theory must meet four criteria to be considered valid: fit, understanding, generality, and control. Grounded theory is intended to work on a "best fit" basis rather than exact fits with similar cases. Readers look for credibility of the data, adequacy of the process, and the empirical grounding of the research findings; empirical grounding includes generation of systemically related concepts, range of variation and specificity built into the theory, and considerations of process. There seems to be a general theme of flexibility when working with grounded theory. With interpretivism, instead of drawing conclusions from the data, the data is is used to reinforce assertions. The product of interpretivism is a written report consisting of empirical assertions, analytic narrative vignettes, quotes from field notes, interviews, data reports, interpretive commentary framing, theoretical discussion, and a report of the natural history of inquiry in the study. The grand idea behind the report is to allow the reader to experience the setting, survey the range of evidence, and they allow the reader to consider the personal basis of the author's perspective throughout the study. With regards to validity, Erickson calls for deliberate searches for disconfirming evidence, avoiding the problem of premature typification.

Trustworthiness: Conform to standards of acceptable and competent practice with ethical conduct.

  1. Triangulation - multiple data sources ensures a complete study
  2. "Being there" - a long time with participants gives a better perspective instead of a snapshot
  3. Participant validation - member checks; get more information from the participants after the initial findings
  4. Using critical friend - peer debriefer
  5. Community of practice - using colleagues to bounce ideas off of

Four factors affect the credibility of a study for cross-group comparisons: selection effects, setting effects, history effects, and construct effects (LeCompte and Goetz). Morse recommends investigator responsiveness, methodological coherence, theoretical sampling and sampling adequacy, and active analytic stance, and saturation as strategies for ensuring rigor. Establishing validity includes determining the extent to which conclusions represent reality and assessing whether constructs represent or measure categories of human experience.

Quantitative Foundations of Educational Research

Course description: Examination of appropriate methods in applied educational contexts. Consideration of analysis strategies for educational data, emphasis on identification and interpretation of findings.

AttachmentSize
Syllabus_Sp06.pdf138.19 KB

Introduction to statistics notes

- interval/ratio data = normally distributed
- there are three methods to describe data

  1. central tendency (mean, median, mode)
  2. variability
  3. graphics

- three levels of measurement match the three methods of describing data to form a matrix

  1. nominal - numbers have no meaning (makes no sense to calculate a mean for gender)
  2. ordinal
  3. interval/ratio

Statistics method/levels matrix:

Central tendency Variability Graphics
Nominal (categories: male/female) mode; "the most frequently occurring value was..." what are the groups? what is the frequency of each category? bar chart
Ordinal (rank) median; could also use mode, but not mean range; "the rankings range from one to 200" histogram for range of big value pool; bar chart for frequency of small number values
Interval/ratio mean; could also use mode and median but are not very likely to do so standard deviation (measure of distance from the mean); variance (standard deviation squared) histogram (is usually based as core/background of normal distribution curve)

What is correlation?
How one changes with the other. ex: Pearson's correlation coefficient

Descriptive practice using NELS-88 data
standardize the following:

  • mother education: ordinal, median, range, frequency table, bar chart
  • comprehensive race: mode, frequency table, bar chart
  • reading comprehension score: mean, standard deviation, histogram

- In SPSS, click Analyze -> descriptive statistics -> frequencies -> move mother education to the right & move move comprehensive race to the right
- For mother ed and race, keep "Display frequency tables" checked. Select median and mode in the statistics button, and bar chart with frequencies in the charts button.
- For reading score, uncheck the "Display frequency tables" checkbox; in statistics button select mean, standard deviation, skewness, and kurtosis; and in charts button select histogram

* with continuous data like test scores, generating a frequency table or bar chart is a waste of time
** with continuous data like test scores, always generate skewness and kurtosis

regression, standard error, t-test, & non-parametric alternatives

Why dependent samples t test could be significant and independent t test not for the same numbers Both use the formula t=mean difference/standard error, but the way standard error is calculated is different because in independent samples, you don't have the relationship of paired data you have in the independent test

sample writeups of SPSS results

  • One sample t test: "There is a statistically significant difference (t=5.84, df=9, p<.001) in means between the sample (xbar=110.8, x=11) and the hypothesis (xbar = 90)"
  • Independent samples t test: "There is no statistically significant difference (t=-1.74, df=8, p>.05) between control (xbar=105, s=12.3) and experimental (xbar=7.5) groups"
  • Mann-Whitney: "There is no difference in ranking (z=-1.57, p>.05) between control (xbar rank=4) and experimental (xbar rank=7) groups"
  • Null hypothesis: "There is no mean difference between control and experimental groups"

asymptotic is for huge samples in Mann-Whitney results

r = multiple correlation coefficient

The correlation table and the regression's model summary table say the same confidence value (Pearson post versus r)

regression line formula: y = bX + a

don't forget to change the SPSS axis in graphics to start at zero to more accurately represent the data

Looking at assignment 2-3

  1. A2; independent t test b/c it's normally distributed (interval/ratio) and has two independent groups B2; Mann-Whitney b/c not normal distribution (ranking) and has two independent groups
  2. A2; Wilcoxon b/c not normal distribution & paired/related groups
  3. independent sample t test b/c it is interval/ratio and has two independent groups
  4. regression (b/c of "predict") bivariate
  5. one sample t test b/c one group against hypothesized mean
  6. descriptive; pick type based on whether it is interval/ratio, ordinal, etc. There is no null with descriptives
  7. nothing is the key word, but independent t is the best b/c dependent variable is interval/ratio and people either have A or C so they are independent (students can't have A and C as a final grade)
  8. Spearman's (or Pearson)
  9. probably not a good question; could use Wilcoxon or dependent t test
  10. regression was the intended test, but could be a Pearson's; Witta says "influence" is a strong word
AttachmentSize
EDF7403_Norman_A2-3_t-tests,etc.pdf224.45 KB

Quantitative Methods II

Course description: Correlation, regression, path analysis, and structural equation modeling in educational studies. Use of path analysis and structural equation modeling to test theory.

Seminar in Educational Research

Course description: An examination of education related research initiatives.

Statistics for Educational Data

Course description: Design of educational evaluation; analysis of data, descriptive and inferential statistics, interpretation of results.

The coursework was focused on learning Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS). Assignments included homework assignments, quizes, and collaborative reports.

AttachmentSize
weighted_group_mean_handout.pdf55.63 KB
EDF6401_David_Norman_Collaborative_Report.pdf799.93 KB
EDF6401_David_Norman_Final_Collaborative_Report.pdf926.07 KB
EDF6401_David_Norman_Practice_with_t-tests.pdf158.9 KB
EDF6401_David_Norman_Unit_1_Quiz.pdf147.07 KB

Theories of Adult Learning

Course description: An examination of theory and research on adult learning with emphasis on practical applications, instruction, and technology use in educational and workplace settings.

Major topics covered in the course were the information-processing model, sensory memory, perception, attention, working memory, representing declarative knowledge, representing procedural knowledge, acquisition of declarative knowledge, acquisition of procedural knowledge, and problem-solving.

Literature reviews

I had to write a literature review for this course. To get started, I found some notes of things to look for when reviewing literature. One book by R. Murray Thomas said to look in the following stages:

  • topic statement
  • define key terms
  • rationale - what the topic contributes to the field and why it's important
  • methods and instruments of data collection
  • ways of classifying and analyzing data
  • ways of interpreting data
  • ways of reporting data

The problem I had with those tips were that they only really make sense if the literature review is in the context of a whole research project. If you're just doing a literature review, a different book by Donna M. Mertens had some more focused advice in a 9 step format:

  1. identify research topic
  2. review secondary sources to get an overview - some journals like to publish literature reviews, which could be used as as starting point. When reading journal titles, focus on ones with "review" or "bulletin" in the name such as Review of Educational Research.
  3. develop a search strategy
  4. conduct search
  5. obtain titles
  6. read and prepare bibliographic information and notes
  7. evaluate the research reports
  8. analyze the research findings and synthesize the results
  9. use the literature review

Mertens also suggested asking the following questions:

  • What are any of the biases, if any, in the literature?
  • How current is the research?
  • Is there enough information to reinforce the research presented in the literature?
  • Is the research predominately primary, secondary, or opinion?
  • Does the literature provide a critical analysis of existing literature and the strengths or weaknesses of their own publication?
  • Does the literature provide a reasonable guide to reproduce their study?
  • Does the literature present information for both sides?
  • Are any needs for new studies identified in the literature?

Then I came up with the following additional questions from just reading other literature reviews:

  • What is the extent and nature of the variability of the findings?
  • What conditions contribute to more effective results on one side of the research than the other?
  • To what extent do special features in a study moderate the influences of the researcher on the researchee?
  • What are important implications for practice and future directions for research?
AttachmentSize
Comparison of Web-based distance education and classroom instruction A literature review.pdf70.54 KB

Master of Science in Management Information Systems

I completed my MS at the University of Central Florida in 2005.

Advanced Database Administration

Course description: This course covers various database technologies in business organizations, including database systems, multidatabase systems, data warehousing, data mining, and object-oriented databases.

AttachmentSize
ISM6217 David Norman data modeling homework.pdf558.58 KB
ISM6217 David Norman Exam 1.pdf551.56 KB
ISM6217 David Norman Exam 2.pdf390.42 KB
ISM6217 David Norman SQL homework.pdf3.65 MB

Advanced Distributed Information Systems

Course description: Provides students with in-depth, hands-on experience with networking hardware and software. Teamwork emphasized in acquiring a master of networking concepts.

This course was finely geared toward earning the Cisco CCNA certification. After completing this course, I took the certification exam and became a CCNA.

AttachmentSize
ISM6908 David Norman subnetting notes.pdf1.81 MB

Advanced Information System Analysis & Design

Course description: This course covers advanced topics of information systems development, including analysis of system requirements, design, implementation and operation.

This was a course centered around a semester-long project for developing some sort of information system. I helped build an information system in Visual Basic 6 for the professor to use in his research. The admin password is ism6121 and the exit password is drjohnson.

Human Resources

Course description: Course is designed as an overview of human resources practices, techniques and strategies.

AttachmentSize
MAN6305 David Norman Final Presentation.pdf7.39 MB
MAN6305 David Norman survey data.spo1.14 MB
MAN6305 David Norman survey statistics.pdf161.82 KB
MAN6305 David Norman survey.pdf110.34 KB

Information Resource Management

Course description: This course provides an investigate of issues relevant to effectively managing IT activities and the challenges facing IT managers and some potential solutions to deal with them.

AttachmentSize
ISM6305 David Norman data warehousing individual.pdf25.18 KB
ISM6305 David Norman data warehousing group report.pdf7.94 MB

Information System Analysis & Design

Course description: Structured approaches to the development of computer-based information systems in business.

AttachmentSize
ISM4113 David Norman NOMAS Presentation 1.pdf394.76 KB
ISM4113 David Norman NOMAS Presentation 2.pdf131.91 KB

Management of Telecommunication

Course description: This course will focus on the strategic management of networks (voice,video, image, and data). coverage includes network management systems, LANs and the internet.

AttachmentSize
ISM6227 David Norman Network Design Project Notes.pdf1.52 MB
ISM6227 David Norman VoIP InfCorp paper.pdf1.26 MB

Bachelor of Business Administration in General Business

I completed my BBA at The University of Texas at Tyler in 2002. As a freshman, my schedule was largely arranged to complete the program of study in a cohort.

Computer Security

This class was centered around a CISSP certification textbook and network security manual.

E-business & E-commerce

AttachmentSize
MANA5340 David Norman presentation.pdf73.16 KB

General Biology

Instructor: Dr. Ron Gutberlet

Course Objectives: Biology 1306 is the first of two courses designed to provide a thorough introduction to biological science. The goal of the course is that students learn important facts about the natural world and understand the significance of these facts within the context of major biological concepts.

Textbook: Life: The Science of Biology. The fifth edition by Purves et al.

Grading:

600 possible points

    Exam 1..............100 points
    Exam 2..............100 points
    Final...................200 points
    Assignments......100 points
    Quizzes............100 points
Make-up Examinations: Make-up exams will be given if a student produces a verifiable, written medical excuse. Make-ups may consist entirely of essay questions.

Academic Integrity: Students should be aware that absolute academic integrity is expected of every student in all undertakings at The University of Texas at Tyler. Failure to comply can result in strong university-imposed penalties.

Biology 1306 Schedule for 1999

Topic Chapter
Introduction 1
Basic Chemistry 2
Organic Chemistry 3
Basic cell anatomy 4
Cell membranes 5
Energy and chemical reactions 6, pp. 119-128
Enzymes 6, pp. 128-140
Cellular Respiration 7
Photosynthesis 8
Mitosis 9, pp. 193-204
Meiosis 9, pp. 204-215
Mendelian genetics 10, pp. 216-226
More genetics 10, pp. 226-242
DNA replication 11
Protein synthesis 12
Molecular genetics 13, 14
Biotechnology 16
Human genetics 17


Exam dates: Exam 1 - Sept 29; Exam 2 - Nov 3;
Final - Dec 17, 9-11 am.

Basic Biology Topics

I. Properties of life

II. When did biology begin?
    A. some evidence of biological studies, ca 2000 B.C.
    B. Alcmaeon, anatomy and emryology, ca 500 B.C.
    C. Hippocrates, On the Sacred Disease, ca 400 B.C.
    D. Aristotle, natural history and classification, ca 350 B.C.
III. Biological questions and the disciplines that investigate these questions
    A. what is life made of?
      1. gross anatomy
      2. microstructure
      3. molecular biology
    B. How does life work?
      1. physiology (organisms, cells, etc.)
    C. What different types of life are there?
      1. taxonomy - class: flying organisms
      2. phylogenetic systematics - classifying by history
      3. biodiversity studies - capture and study
      4. paleontology - extinct
    D. How do organisms interact with their environment?
      1. ecology
    E. How do organisms change during their lives?
      1. development
      2. embryology
    F. How can we explain geographic distribution of organisms
      1. biogeography
    G. Why does life change over time?
      1. evolutionary biology - "unifying theme"
    H. How is biological information passed from parents to offspring?
      1. genetics
    I. How do we understand the behavior of organisms?
      1. ethology
    J. How can knowledge of biology be applied to human purposes?
      1. medicine
      2. agriculture
      3. wildlife management
      4. law enforcement - forensic
      5. conservation biology
IV. Levels of structural organization and emergent properties

V. Biodiversity
    A. how many species are there?
    B. ca 1.5 million described
      1. ca. 260,000 plants
      2. ca. 50,000 vertebrates
      3. ca. 750,000 insects
    C. possibly 10-100 million total
VI. Levels of Classification
    A. domain, kingdom, phylum, class, order, family, genus, species
    B. example
    C. sub+, super-, infra, etc
    D. Carolus Linnaeus
    E. binomial system (Crotalus atrox)
VII. 3 Domains and 6 kingdoms
    A. Domain Bacteria
      1. Kingdom Eubacteria
    B. Domain Archaea
      1. Kingdom Archaebacteria
    C. Domain Eukarya
      1. Kingdom Protista
      2. Kingdom Fungi
      3. Kingdom Plantae
      4. Kingdom Animalia
VIII. Traditional five-kingdom system

IX. Evolution is considered the unifying theme of biology
    A. natural selection
      1. Charles Darwin
      2. Alfred Wallace
      3. reasoning involved
        a) variation in populations
        b) many born, few survive
        c) differential reproductive success
      4. Famous example: peppered moths
    B. Genetically based change in a population over time
    C. History of life
X. Science and the scientific method
    A. a way of knowing
    B. observation, curiosity, reason
    C. scientific method
      1. observation
      2. question
      3. hypothesis (and predictions)
      4. experiment
      5. conclusions
    D. communicating results
      1. journal articles
      2. books
      3. conferences
    E. repeatability
      1. methods clearly recorded
    F. Jules Henri Poincare:
      "The scientist does not study nature because it is useful; he studies it because he has delights in it, and he delights in it because it is beautiful."
    G. Training new scientists
      1. teaching
      2. training
      3. post doctoral work
    H. educating non-scientists
      1. museums
      2. popular articles
      3. public lectures
      4. teaching
    I. How does science affect your life?

Life at the Chemical Level

I. Biologically important elements

    A. H, C, N, O, P, S B. Na, Mg, Si, Cl, K, Ca, Mn, Fe, Co, Cu, Zn

II. Atoms

    A. protons B. neutrons C. electrons D. mass number E. atomic number

III. Elements

    A. Identified by number of protons

IV. Isotopes

    A. Atoms of the same element may vary with respect to the number of neutrons B. deuterium, tritium C. atomic mass accounts for relative abundance of isotopes of the element (see periodic table) D. radioisotopes

      1. radioactive decay 2. half-life 3. practical uses

        a) markers in cells b) markers for medical diagnosis c) x-rays d) treatment of cancer e) dating rocks and fossils

V. Chemical bonds

    A. octet rule B. nonpolar covalent bonds C. polar covalent bonds D. hydrogen bonds E. ionic bonds F. van der Waals attractions

VI. Polar and nonpolar substances

    A. water B. oils, fats (hydrocarbons)

VII. Properities of water

    A. solid form less dense than liquid form

      1. large bodies of water may freeze at surface but remain liquid underneath

    B. water is a moderator of temperature

      1. ice requires a relatively high amount of heat energy to melt 2. water requires a relatively high amount of heat to evaportate 3. water loses a great deal of heat energy before it becomes ice 4. water has a high heat capacity 5. biologicial implications

        a) Earth's realatively stable temperature b) moderate coastal climates c) effectiveness of sweating

    C. water adheres and coheres

      1. water molecules adhere to other polar substances (meniscus) 2. water molecules cohere to each other (surface tension) 3. biological implications

        a) walking on water b) water from roots to leaves

    D. water is a good solvent for many substances

      1. cells contain a great deal of water 2. most chemical reactions within cells take place in this aqueous environment

VIII. Functional Groups

    A. The shape of molecules directly affect their function

      1. types of atoms 2. types of bonds 3. specific arrangement of atoms

    B. Different molecules that have the same functional group will have some properties in common.

IX. Isomers

    A. contain the same number of atoms of the same types, but the atoms are bonded in different ways B. the different bonding patterns result in different chemical properties C. glucose and fructose are isomers of each other D. glucose, fructose, and sucrose E. structural isomers - vary with respect to covalent arrangement of atoms F. optical isomers (enantiomers)

      1. asymetric carbon - a C bonded to four different atoms or groups of atoms 2. mirror images of each other

Macromolecules

I. Why is carbon such an important building block of life?
    A. tendency to form four bonds
    B. carbon skeletons
    C. organic molecules contain carbon
      1. some are man made
      2. many are produced inside organisms
      3. carbohydrates, proteins, nucleic acids, lipids
II. Monomers and polymers
    A. large organic molecules consist of many repeated subunits
    B. different arrangements of the subunits result in different properties
    C. dehydration synthesis (condensation reactions)
    D. hydrolysis
III. Carbohydrates
    A. monosaccharides (simple sugars)
      1. the monomers of carbohydrates
      2. examples - glucose, fructose
    B. disaccharides
      1. a sugar molecule with 2 monomers
      2. example - sucrose (table sugar)
    C. oligosaccharides
      1. several monomers in one molecule
      2. some important components of the cell membranes
    D. polysaccharides
      1. many monomers in one molecule
      2. starch (branched)
      3. glycogen (even more branched)
      4. cellulose (not branched)
      5. chitin (a derivative carbohydrate)
    E. glycosidic linkage - the covalent bond formed between two monosaccharides
    F. functions of carbohydrates
      1. energy storage (starch, glycogen, simple sugars)
      2. support, protection, structure (cellulose, chitin)
    G. There are different types of glycosidic linkages
      1. different linkages result in different properties
      2. compare and stretch cellulose
IV. Proteins
    A. amino acids
      1. the monomers of proteins
      2. there are 20 found in organisms
      3. amino group, carboxyl group, H, R
    B. peptide linkage
      1. covalent bond between 2 amino acids
      2. occurs through dehydration synthesis
    C. polypeptide
      1. a chain of amino acids
    D. some proteins are made of single polypeptides (example: lysozyme)
    E. some proteins consist of multiple polypeptides (example: hemoglobin)
    F. general shapes of proteins
      1. globular
      2. fibrous
    G. four levels of protein structure
      1. primary structure - sequence of amino acids
      2. secondary structure - localized folding and twisting
        a) alpha helices
        b) beta pleated sheets
        c) hydrogen bonds
      3. tertiary structure - overall shape of one polypeptide
        a) hydrogen bonds
        b) disulfide bonds
      4. quaternary structure - overall shape of a protein with 2 or more polypeptide subunits
    H. prosthetic groups - chemicals attached to a protein (example: heme group in hemoglobin)
    I. chaperone proteins - proteins that help other proteins achieve their intended shape during assembly
    J. proteins have many functions
      1. structure (keratin, spider's silk)
      2. contraction (muscle proteins)
      3. storage (albumin)
      4. defense (antibodies)
      5. transport (hemoglobin)
      6. signal (some hormones)
      7. enzymes (lactase)
    K. a protein's environment can alter its shape
      1. denature, renature
      2. temperature
      3. pH
      4. salt concentration
    L. proteins and apoptosis
      1. caspases
      2. cancer, Alzheimer's
      3. development
    M. Linus Pauling
V. Nucleic Acids
    A. nucleotides
      1. the monomers of nucleic acids
      2. 5-carbon sugar, phosphate group, nitrogenous base
      3. 4 different nucleotides in DNA; 4 in RNA
    B. phosphodiester linkage
      1. covalent bond between nucleotides
      2. links sugar of one to phosphate group of other; a sugar-phosphate backbone
      3. nitrogenous base attaches to sugar
    C. DNA is copied and passed on to new cells. DNA is copied and passed on to new generations.
    D. DNA -> RNA -< protein synthesis
    E. where is DNA found?
    F. Watson and Crick (1953), Rosalin Franklin
VI. Lipids
    A. fats and oils (triglycerides)
      1. glycerol + 3 fatty acids
      2. ester linkage
      3. saturated
      4. unsaturated
      5. hydrogenated
    B. phospholipids
      1. P-containing compound + glycerol + 2 fatty acids
      2. cell membranes
    C. waxes
      1. an alcohol + 1 fatty acid
    D. carotenoids
      1. see text for chemical structures
      2. example = beta-carotene (vitamin A)
    E. steroids
      1. 3 six-sided rings + 1 free five-sided ring + additional atoms
      2. examples = cholesterol, testosterone, estrogens
    F. additional functions of lipids
      1. energy storage
        a. animals tend to store energy in lipids (triglycerides)
        b. plants tend to store carbohydrates (starch, sugar)
        c. seeds often contain triglycerides
      2. protection from environment
        a. cushioning (fats)
        b. waterproofing (oils, waxes)
        c. insulation (blubber)
        d. protection from mold (waxes)

Cells

A. The cell is the basic unit of life

B. Cell Theory
    1. All organisms are made of cells
    2. All cells are made from other cells
C. Some organisms are unicellular; some are multicellular

D. Cells are small
    1. some exceptions - bird eggs, some neurons, some species of algae
    2. cells must exchange materials with their environment
    3. for this exchange to work well, cells require a large surface area relative to their volume.
E. Cells are either prokaryotic or eukaryotic
    1. prokaryotes are organisms with prokaryotic cells.
    2. eukaryotes are organisms with eukaryotic cells
F. Prokaryotes
    1. Domain Bacteria
      a. Kingdom Eubacteria
    2. Domain Archea
      a. Kingdom Archebacteria
    3. All prokaryotes are unicellular, but many form chains, filaments, colonies, etc.
G. Eukaryotes
    1. Domain Eukarya
      a. Kingdom Protista
      b. Kingdom Plantae
      c. Kingdom Fungi
      d. Kingdom Animalia
    2. Some eukaryotes are unicellular; some are multicellular
H. Some characteristics common to all cells
    1. DNA and ribosomes
    2. cytosol and cytoplasm
    3. plasma membrane
I. Charactaristics of prokaryotic cells
    1. true nucleus absent
    2. nucleoid present
    3. no separate, membrane-bound organelles
    4. usually smaller than eukaryotic cells
J. Characteristics present in many (but not all) prokaryotic cells
    1. cell wall
    2. outer membrane
    3. capsule
    4. photosynthetic membranes
    5. mesosomes
    6. flagella
    7. pili
K. Characteristics of eukaryotic cells
    1. true nucleus present
    2. nucleoid absent
    3. many separate, membrane-bound organelles present
    4. usually larger than prokaryotic cells
    5. cytoskeleton present
L. endosymbiont hypothesis
    1. Lynn Margulis - U. Mass., Amherst
    2. mitochondria and chloroplasts have
      a. double membranes
      b. their own DNA
      c. their own ribosomes, which are similar to prokaryote ribosomes
    3. some modern cells contain smaller endosymbiotic cells
M. Organelles are structures inside cells that have specific shapes and functions
    1. many, but not all, organelles are enclosed by membranes
    2. organelles are found in both prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells
N. Selected differences between plant and animal cells
    1. cell wall - present around plant cells; absent from animal cells
    2. chloroplasts - present in some plant cells; absent from animal cells
    3. centrioles - present in animal cells; absent from plant cells
O. The endomembrane system of eukaryotic cells
    1. mainly includes these organelles
      a. endoplasmic reticulum
      b. golgi apparatus
      c. lysosomes
      d. vacuoles
    2. endoplasmic reticulum (ER)
      a. lumen - space inside ER
      b. rough ER has ribosomes on outer surface of membrane
      c. smooth ER lacks ribosomes on surface
    3. functions of rough ER
      a. transporting proteins produced by ribosomes on surface of rough ER
      b. here proteins fold into tertiary structure
    4. functions of smooth ER
      a. protein transport and modification
      b. synthesis of phospholipids, steroids, fatty acids
      c. detoxification of harmful substances
    5. golgi apparatus
      a. cisternae - the flattened sacs
      b. lumen - space inside cisternae
      c. cis side - near rough ER (or sometimes near nucleus)
      d. trans side - near plasma membrane of entire cell
      e. vesicles - transport rough ER products to golgi; transport golgi products to other parts of cell or outside cell
    6. functions of golgi apparatus
      a. protein storage
      b. protein modification
      c. protein packaging
    7. lysosomes
      a. originally formed as vesicles from golgi apparatus
      b. contain digestive enzymes that help break down organic molecules
    8. functions of lysosomes
      a. digesting food molecules
      b. recycling damaged organelles
      c. destroying harmful bacteria
      d. apotosis
    9. vacuoles
      a. can be large or small
      b. filled with aqueous solutions
      c. formed by vesicles from rough ER and golgi apparatus
      d. note that our text excludes them from endomembrane
    10. functions of vacuoles
      a. some are contractile
      b. some contain pigments
      c. some contain cellular waste products and toxins
P. Cytoskeleton
    1. microfilaments
    2. intermediate filaments
    3. microtubules
    4. all cytoskeletal elements are made of proteins
      a. microfilaments - actin (G actin)
      b. intermediate filaments - fibrous proteins like keratin
      c. microtubules - tubulin
    5. functions
      a. microfilaments
        - cytoplasmic streaming (cyclosis)
        - cytokinesis in animal cells
        - muscle contraction
        - cell movement
      b. intermediate filaments
        - mostly structural support
      c. microtubules
        - mitosis and meiosis
        - found in cilia, flagella, basal bodies and cenrioles
Q. Other important organelles
    1. nucleus
    2. mitochondrion
    3. chloroplast
    4. peroxisome
    5. glyoxisome
R. Plasmodesmata are channels that extend through the cell walls to plants to connect adjacent cells

S. Animals have extra cellular matrix
    1. the composition and extent of this matrix varies in different regions of the body
    2. example: bone is composed mostly of extracellular matrix that includes collagen fibers and calcium phosphate

Cell Membranes

A. Functions of cell membranes
    1. semipermiable barrier
    2. site for chemical reactions
    3. information reception
    4. compartmentalization within cells
B. Fluid mosaic model - cell membranes are more fluid than solid

C. Components of cell membranes
    1. phospholipid bilayer (lipids)
    2. cholesterol (a lipid)
    3. proteins
    4. carbohydrates
D. Cholesterol affects the fluidity of cell membranes

E. Membrane proteins
    1. integral
    2. peripheral
    3. some can move within the membrane
F. Membrane carbohydrates act as recognition sites.
    1. they are hightly specific
    2. one function - cells of one organism can recognize cells of another organism
G. Which molecules pass through membranes easily?
    1. small hydrophobic molecules
    2. water
H. Many hydrophobic substances cannot pass though cell membranes easily (many ions for example)

I. Passive transport
    1. simple diffusion
    2. osmosis
    3. channel proteins
    4. facilitated diffusion
      a. carrier proteins
        - uniport
        - symport
        - antiport
    5. concentration gradient - allows passive transport to occur
J. Active transport
    1. energy and carrier proteins required
    2. substances are moved against their concentration gradient
    3. primary - ATP is used directly
    4. secondary - energy from other molecules moving down a concentration gradient is used
    5. example - sodium-potassium pump
K. Endocytosis
    1. phagocytosis
    2. pinocytosis
    3. receptor-mediated endocytosis
      a. coated pits
      b. clathrin
L. Exocytosis

Energy

A. Energy is the capacity to do work.

B. Thermodynamics is the study of energy.

C. First Law of Thermodynamics: Energy can be neither created or destroyed, but it can be transformed.

D. Second Law of Thermodynamics: When energy is transformed, not all of it can be used. Disorder (entropy) tends to increase.

E. Potential energy-energy of position or "stored" energy.

F. Kinetic energy-energy of motion.

G. Open and closed systems
    1. A system cam be thought of as any defined space.
    2. Open systems can gain or lose energy and matter.
    3. Closed systems can neither gain nor lose energy or matter.
H. Metabolism- all the chemical reactions that occur within a living cell

I. Anabolic Processes
    1. require energy
    2. assemble small molecules into big ones
    3. dehydration synthesis
J. Catabolic processes
    1. release energy
    2. break large molecules into small ones
    3. hydrolysis
K. H = G + TS
    1. H is the total energy in a system
    2. G is the free energy in a system
    3. T is the temperature in Kelvins
    4. S is entropy, representing the usable energy in a system
L. Change in G = change in H - T change in S
    1. measures the change of free energy that occurs during a chemical reaction
M. If change in G is negative
    1. reactants are less stable than the products
    2. reaction is spontaneous
    3. reaction is catabolic
    4. reaction is exergonic
    5. energy is released
N. Cellular respiration
    1. C6H12O6 + 6O2 -> 6CO2 + 6H2O
    2. change in G = -686 Kcal / mole of glucose
O. If change in G is positive,
    1. reactants are more stable than products
    2. reaction is nonspontaneous
    3. reaction is anabolic
    4. reaction is endergonic
    5. energy is required for reaction to occur
P. Photosynthesis
    1. 6CO2 + 6H2O -> C6H12O6 + 6O2
    2. Change in G = +686 Kcal / mole of glucose
Q. if change in G = 0
    1. reaction is at equilibrium
    2. no work can be done
R. Metabolic disequilibrium keeps living systems from going to change in G = 0

S. ATP (adenosine triphosphate)
    1. ribose, adenine, 3 phosphate groups
    2. similar to the nucleotide that has adenine
    3. involved in energy coupling
    4. ATP + H2O -> ADP + Pi (change in G = -12 Kcal / mole of ATP under cellular conditions)
    5. source of usable energy for cells
    6. ADP is recycled to ATP by taking in energy from the environment

Enzymes

A. Enzymes are catalysts produced and used by organisms

B. Catalysts are substances that speed up chemical reactions without being used up in the reaction

C. Enzymes are protein molecules, but some RNA molecules also act as catalysts and are called ribosomes

D. Activation energy - the energy required to initiate a chemical reaction
    1. enzymes do not provide activation energy
    2. enzymes lower the amount of activation energy required to start a reaction
E. Substrate - the substance that an enzyme works on

F. Active site - the region of an enzyme to which the substrate attaches
    1. lock and key model
    2. induced fit model
G. Cofactors are required for some enzymes to work properly. Organic cofactors are called coenzymes

H. Rate of reaction is affected by
    1. substrate concentration
    2. enzyme concentration
    3. environmental conditions
      a. temperature
      b. pH
      c. salt concentration
    4. inhibitors (substances that bind to enzymes and "deactivate" them)
      a. competitive inhibitors
      b. noncompetitive inhibitors
I. Allosteric enzymes
    1. consist of two or more subunits
    2. have one or more active sites and one or more allosteric sites
    3. active sites are on catalytic subunits; allosteric sites are on regulatory subunits
    4. changes in shape of one subunit can affect shape of other subunits
J. There can be cooperativity between catalytic subunits.

K. Effectors are either activators or noncompetitive inhibitors. Effectors bind to the allosteric site
L. Allosteric enzymes are critical to the regulation of metabolic pathways.
    1. Feedback inhibition
M. The initial production of enzymes by the cell are another way that metabolic pathways are controlled.

Cellular Respiration

A. Autotrophs
    1. make their own food (e.g. glucose)
    2. are often called producers
    3. photoautotrophs - plants, some protists, some bacteria
    4. chemoautotrophs - some bacteria
B. Heterotrophs
    1. can not make their own food
    2. are oftem called consumers
    3. rely on other organisms, dead or alive, a a source of organic molecules
    4. animals, fungi, many protists, many bacteria
    5. decomposers (detriovores) - feed on organisms that are already dead
    6. predators - kill organisms for food
    7. grazers - eat living plant material
    8. carnivores - eat animal material
    9. herbivores - eat plant material
    10. omnivores - eat plant and animal material
    11. parasites - feed on living organisms without killing them (at least not immediately)
C. Movement of (most) energy in biosphere:
    1. source - sun
    2. converted to usable form (food) by photoautotrophs
    3. photoautotrophs are eaten
    4. many heterotrophs eat other heterotrophs
    5. detritovores recycle matter but not energy
    6. detritovores feed on the remains of autotrophs and heterotrophs
    7. energy captured by organisms to do work eventually leaves as heat
    8. the biosphere is an open system
D. ADP + Pi -> ATP (endergonic)

E. ATP -> ADP + Pi

F. NAD+ + 2H -> NADH + H+ (endergonic)

G. NADH + H+ + 1/2O2 -> NAD+ + H2 (exergonic)

H. NADH is nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide

I. Oxidation - reduction reactions (redox reactions)
    1. electrons are transferred
    2. energy is transferred
    3. reduced - electrons added
    4. oxidized - electrons taken away
    5. reducing agent - the substance that is oxidized
    6. oxidizing agent - the substance that is being used
J. Overview of cellular respiration
    1. O2 is needed for entire process to occur
    2. glycolysis
      a. 1 glucose -> 2 pyruvate
      b. some ATP and NADH are produced
      c. occurs are cytosol
    3. Kreb's Cycle (citric acid cycle)
      a. pyruvate -> CO2
      b. in mitochondrion, in matrix
      c. some ATP, NADH, and FADH2 are produced
    4. electron transport chain
      a. uses products of first 2 stages
      b. in mitochondrion's inner membrane
      c. lots of ATP produced
K. Glycolysis
    1. occurs in cytoplasm
    2. glucose broken down into 2 pyruvate molecules
    3. 2 ATP required
    4. 4 ATP generated
    5. net gain of 2 ATP
    6. 2 NADH generated
    7. numbers given above are per 1 molecule of glucose
    8. no CO2 is released by glycolysis
    9. no O2 is used in glycolysis
    10. if no O2 available, products of glycolysis can be broken down further to extract more energy
I. Pyruvate oxidation
    1. occurs in inner membrane of mitochondrion
    2. pyruvate converted into Acetyl CoA
    3. 1 NADH generated per pyruvate
    4. 4 NADH generated per glucose
    5. 1 CO2 generated per pyruvate
    6. 6 CO2 generated per glucose
    7. How many C in 1 Acytyl CoA?
M. Krebs Cycle (citric acid cycle)
    1. occurs in mitochondrial matrix
    2. Acetyl CoA enters Krebs cycle
    3. energy-storing molecules produced
      a. per 1 Acytyl CoA
        - 3 NADH
        - 1 FADH2
        - 1 ATP
      b. per 1 glucose
        - 6 NADH
        - 2 FADH2
        - 2 ATP
    4. NADH and FADH2 go to electron transport chain
    5. All C from glucose now in CO2
N. Electron Transport Chain (Respiratory Chain)
    1. occus in inner membrane of mitochondrion
    2. receives
      a. NADH from glycolysis
      b. NADH from pyruvate oxidation
      c. NADH and FADH2 from Krebs cycle
    3. generates ca. 34 ATP
O. Overall yield of cellular respiration is ca. 36 ATP

P. More glycolysis details
    1. consists of 10 different chemical reactions
    2. energy investment phase
      a. ATP used
      b. glucose broken down
    3. energy-yielding phase
      a. ATP, NADH formed
Q. More pyruvate oxidation details
    1. Acetyl CoA is an acetate molecule bound to coenzyme A
    2. CoA is derived from a B vitamin
R. More Krebs cycle details
    1. consists of 8 chemical reactions
    2. oxaloacetate is the first compound use in the cycle
    3. the last step of the Krebs cycle reforms oxaloacetate
S. Substrate-level phosphorylation
    1. an enzyme transfers a phosphate group from a substrate to ATP
    2. glycolysis, Krebs cycle
T. Oxidative phosphorylation
    1. The transfer of a phosphate group to redox reactions. The final reduced molecule is O2
    2. electron transport chain
U. More electron transport chain details
    1. series of molecules embedded in inner membrane of mitochondrion
    2. most of these molecules are proteins
    3. redox reactions
    4. at end of chain is O2
    5. O2 + 4H+ + 4e- -> 2H2O
    6. components of the chain
      a. NADH-Q reducatase
        - 26 subunits
        - integral
      b. ubiquinone
        - lipid
        - within phospholipid bilayer
      c. cytochrome reductase
        - 10 subunits
        - integral
      d. cytochrome c
        - small
        - peripheral
      e. cytochrome oxidase
        - 8 subunits
        - integral
    7. NADH enters the chain at NADH-Q reductase
    8. FADH2 enters the chain at succinate-Q reducatase (another protein complex). Electrons are then transferred to uniquinone.
    9. Each NADH yields ca. 3 ATP.
      a. 10 NADH x 3 ATP = 30 ATP
    10. Each FADH2 yields ca. 2 ATP
      a. 2 FADH2 x 2 ATP = 4 ATP
    11. How is the energy released in the electron transport chain used to synthesize ATP?
      a. Energy is used to actively transport protons (H+) across the inner membrane to the inner membrane space.
      b. This establishes a H+ concentration gradient
      c. An integral channel protein called ATP synthase allows the H+ to diffuse down the concentration gradient
      d. The difference in charge between the intermediate space and the matrix proton-motive force
      e. The energy released during this chemiosmosis is used to form ATP from ADP and Pi.
V. Summary of ATP production
    1. glycolysis = +2 ATP
    2. Krebs cycle = +2 ATP
    3. moving NADH = -2 ATP
    4. electron transport chain = + 34 ATP
    5. total = +36 ATP
W. Glucose metabolism is ca. 38% efficient. 62% of the energy in glucose is dissipated as heat.

X. Do we eat a lot of plain glucose molecules?

Y. What is the source of glucose in our diet?

Z. Food is a source of energy and raw materials for growth, development, etc.

Mitosis and Meiosis

A. Mitosis - the division of a cell's nucleus resulting in two daughter nuclei, each with the same number of chromosomes as the original nucleus

B. Meiosis - the division of a cell's nucleus, ultimately resulting in four daughter nuclei, each with half as many chromosomes as the original nucleus.

C. Cytokenesis - cell division; frequently occurs after mitosis or meiosis

D. Functions of mitosis - growth, development, repair, reproduction in many unicellular species

E. Function of meiosis - formation of gametes in many species

F. Chromosomes
    1. consist of one long DNA molecule and many proteins
    2. located in the nucleus
    3. the DNA molecule of a chromosome contains the genetic code
    4. genes are segments of a chromosome's DNA
    5. humans - 46 chromosomes in most body cells; 23 chromosomes in gametes
      a. 2n = 46
      b. diploid number is 46
      c. n = 23
      d. haploid number is 23
    6. Drosophila - 8 chromosomes in most body cells; 4 chromosomes in gametes
      a. 2n = 8
      b. diploid number is 8
      c. n = 4
      d. haploid number is 4
    7. chromatin - the form that chromosomes are in most of the time; "uncoiled chromosomes"
    8. chromosome structure (see text p. 199)
      a. nucleosomes
      b. histones
      c. tightly coiled chromatin
    9. homologous pairs of chromosomes
      a. look similar - size, shape, banding pattern
      b. contain similar (but not identical) information
      c. one of each pair inherited from mother (in egg)
      d. one of each pair inherited from father (in sperm)
      e. alleles - different forms of the same gene
    10. autosomes - all the chromosomes that determine sex within a species
      a. human male - XY
      b. human female - XX
    11. karyotype - a representation of all the metaphase chromosomes of a cell
G. The Cell Cycle
    1. interphase (G1, S, G2) and mitosis (M)
    2. G1 cell growth; may be long or short; may or may not lead to S
    3. S - DNA is replicated
    4. G2 - cell prepares for mitosis; centrosome replication
    5. interphase is longer than mitosis
H. Mitosis
    1. prophase
      a. centrosomes migrate to opposite poles of cell
      b. mitotic spindle forms
        - mitotic center
        - polar microtubules
      c. chromatin coils and condenses to form chromosomes
    2. prometaphase
      a. nuclear lamina and nuclear envelope break down
      b. spindle enters nuclear region
      c. kinetochore microtubules
      d. motor proteins - at junction of kinetochores and microtubules
    3. metaphase
      a. all chromosomes aligned along equator of cell
      b. metaphase plate (equatorial plate)
    4. anaphase
      a. sister chromatids separate and move to opposite poles of cell; motor proteins; microtubules shorten
    5. telophase
      a. spindle breaks down
      b. chromosomes uncoil to form chromatid
      c. nuclear envelope forms around each set of chromosomes
    6. cytokenesis usually follows telophase; each new cell is then in interphase
I. Regulation of cell cycle
    1. internal control
      a. cyclin - dependent kinase (Cdk)
      b. cyclin
      c. cyclin - Cdk complex
      d. some cancers are caused by malfunctions in system of cyclins and Cdks.
    2. external control
      a. growth factors
        - platelet-derived growth factor
        - interleukins
        - erythropoientin
      b. some cancers are caused by malfunctions involving growth factors
J. Meiosis
    1. includes two nuclear divisions - meiosis I and meiosis II
    2. chromosome number is reduced from haploid to diploid
    3. takes longer than mitosis
      a. human males - ca. 1 month
      b. human females - ca. 10-50 years
    4. Where does it occur in humans?
      a. males - testes
      b. females - ovaries
    5. interphase
      a. growth
      b. replication of DNA
    6. prophase I
      a. chromatin condenses into chromosomes
        - each consists of 2 chromatids
      b. centrosomes migrate
      c. mitotic spindle forms (late)
      d. synapsis - homologous pairs come together
        - cynaptomemal complex
        - chiasma
        - crossing over
        - independent association
          - humans: 223 = ca. 8 million
    7. prometaphase I
      a. nuclear lamina and nuclear membrane break down
      b. spindle enters nuclear region
    8. metaphase I
      a. homologous pairs line up along metaphase plate
      b. different from metaphase of mitosis
    9. anaphase I
      a. homologous pairs separate
      b. more toward opposite poles of cell
      c. sister chromatids remain attached
      d. different from anaphase of mitosis
    10. telophase I
      a. spindle may or may not break down
      b. chromosomes may or many not uncoil
      c. nuclear membrane may or may not reform
    11. interphase II
      a. short of even non existent
      b. no replication of DNA
      c. different from interphase I of meiosis
    12. meiosis II is very similar to mitosis, but it starts with half as many chromosomes
Y. Meiosis increases genetic variation
    1. crossing over - new combinations of alleles on chromosomes
    2. random assortment - new combinations of chromosomes in gametes
    3. fertilization - new combinations of chromosomes in zygote
Z. There is a great diversity of life cycles among species
    1. gametic meiosis - meiosis results in gametes; diplody dominates life cycle (most animals, some protists)
    2. zygotic meiosis - meiosis occurs right after formation of zygote; hapoidy dominates life cycle (most fungi; some protists)
    3. intermediary meiosis - life cycle includes both haploid and diploid stages of significant duration (plants, some protists)
K. Spermatogenesis of Oogenesis
    1. 4 sperm produced per bout of meiosis
    2. 1 egg produced per bout of meiosis
      a. unequal distribution of cytoplasm
      b. polar bodies
L. Variety of organismal life cycles
    1. reproduction - producing more individuals
    2. sex - recombination of genetic material
    3. asexual reproduction (cloning)
      a. examples
        - binary fission
        - budding
        - parthenogenesis
    4. sexual reproduction
      a. internal fertilization
      b. external fertilization
    5. separation of time of sex and reproduction
      a. example - conjugation in bacteria
    6. alternation of generations
      a. life cycle includes haploid and diploid individuals
      b. at most general, includes sexuality reproducing organisms
      c. some species have complex life cycles
M. Chromosomal anomalies
    1. aneuploidy
      a. nondisjunction in meiosis I or II
      b. Down syndrome (trisomy 21)
      c. Turner syndrome (XO)
      d. Klinefelter's syndrome (XXY)
      e. Triple-X syndrome (XXX)
      f. Jacob's syndrome (XYY)
      g. many instances result in nonviable offspring
    2. polyploidy - individuals have three or more complete sets of chromosomes

Genetics

A. Gregor Mendel and his pea plants
    1. started ca. 1857
    2. true-breeding strains
    3. easy to control fertilization
    4. phenotypes he studied
      a. yellow (Y) vs. green (y) seeds
      b. round (R) vs. wrinkled (r) seeds
      c. tall (T) vs. dwarf plants (t)
      d. purple (P) vs. white (p) flowers
    5. scientific method
    6. blending hypothesis
    7. monohybrid cross
    8. P, F1, and F2 generations
    9. example:
      a. P - white X purple
      b. F1 - all purple
      c. F2 - 705 purple, 224 white (ca. 3:1)
    10. did this with many plants
    11. conclusions
      a. white "factor" must be present in F1 individuals
      b. but purple is "dominant" over it
      c. white gets expressed in F2 when no purple "factor" is present
B. Terminology
    1. phenotype
    2. genotype
    3. homozygous
    4. heterozygous
    5. dominant
    6. recessive
    7. gene
    8. locus
    9. allele
    10. segregation of homologous chromosomes (and their respective alleles) during meiosis
    11. independent assortment (2n)
C. Punnet squares

D. Dihybrid cross

E. Multiple alleles
    1. some genes have more than two alleles
    2. example: ABO blood group
      a. allele: IA, IB
      b. codominance
      c. possible genotypes
      d. possible phenotypes
F. Sex linkage
    1. Human males have only one X chromosome
    2. So, alleles on a male's X chromosomes are always expressed, regardless of whether the are dominant or recessive
    3. Human females have two X chromosomes, and alleles function as they do for autosomes.
    4. example: hemophilia
      a. alleles: XH, Xh
      b. possible genotypes
      c. possible phenotypes
G. Incomplete dominance
    1. sometimes one allele is not completely dominant
H. Why are some alleles dominant and others recessive?
    1. best answered by examining products of specific alleles
    2. example Tay-Sachs disease
      a. organismal level - complete dominance
      b. biochemical level - incomplete dominance
      c. molecular level - codominance
    3. recessive does not equal rare
    4. recessive does not equal bad
I. Alternative to Punnett squares -- Rules of Probability
    1. rule of multiplication
      a. example: Aa x Aa; what is the probability of having an aa offspring?
    2. rule of addition
      a. example: Aa x Aa; what is the probability of having an Aa offspring?
J. Pleiotropy - one gene affecting more than one characteristic of an organism
    1. example - sickle cell anemia
K. Epistasis - one gene affecting the expression of another gene
    1. example - fur color in mice
      a. one gene - brown vs. black
      b. another gene - pigment deposited in fur or not
      c. possible phenotypes - black, brown, white
L. Polygenic inheritance - many genes affecting one trait
    1. examples - height, skin color
    2. quantitative characters
M. The genotype plus environmental conditions determine the phenotype.
    1. examples - height, weight, skin color
    2. multifactoral disorders
      a. examples - heart disease, cancer
N. Pedigrees
    1. useful in genetic counseling
    2. useful in conjunction with molecular techniques for locating genes
      a. example - Huntington's disease
        - caused by a dominant allele
        - located on chromosome 4
        - individuals can now be tested for presence of this allele
O. Evaluating genetic problems
    1. carrier recognition
      a. examples - Tay-Sachs, sickle-cell
    2. amniocentesis
      a. not done until week 14-16
      b. wait several weeks for results
      c. karyotype
    3. chronic villus sampling (CVS)
      a. can be done as early as week 8-10
      b. results within 24 hours
      c. karyotype
    4. examining fetus
      a. ultrasound
      b. fetoscopy
    5. newborn screening
      a. example - phenylketonvria (PKU)
    6. ethics
P. Alternations of chromosome structure
    1. deletion - segment of chromosome is lost
    2. duplication - segment of chromosome is duplicated
    3. inversion - segment of chromosome is inserted in reverse order
    4. translocation - segment of a chromosome is added to a nonhomologous chromosome
      a. reciprocal
      b. nonreciprocal
Q. T. H. Morgan and his fruit flies (Drosophila)
    1. early 1900's
    2. first described sex linkage
    3. gene linkage (example)
      a. body color - grey (G), black (g)
      b. wings - normal (W), vestigial (w)
      c. GgWw x ggww
      d. possible gametes
      e. Punnett square
      f. looked at 2300 offspring
      g. expected ratio
        - 575 GgWw
        - 575 ggww
        - 575 Ggww
        - 575 ggWw
      h. observed ratio
        - 965 GgWw
        - 944 ggww
        - 206 Ggww
        - 185 ggWw
      i. most offspring were like the parents
      j. explanation - the body color and wing genes are linked (on same chromosome)
      k. why wasn't the observed ratio 1150 GgWw : 1150 ggww?
R. Gene linkage and mapping of a chromosome's genes
    1. parental types vs. recombinants
    2. recombination frequency
      a. number of recombinants / total offspring
      b. example - (206 + 185) / 2300 - 17%
    3. recombination frequency for two genes indicates how close together they are on a chromosome
    4. this information can be used to determine the relative positions of genes on a chromosome
    5. 1 map unit was defined to equal 1% recombination frequency
    6. recombination frequency of 50% is the maximum expected (genes are on separate chromosomes or very far apart on same chromosome)
    7. mapping example - three genes (A, B, C)
      a. A-B : 17 map units
      b. B-C : 9 map units
      c. A-C : 8 map units
      d. sequence of genes : A-C-B

DNA

A. Summary of knowledge in 1940's
    1. chromosomes carry genetic information
    2. chromosomes are made of proteins and DNA
    3. most researchers thought proteins carried the genetic information
B. Hershey and Chase (1952)
    1. used phages and bacteria
    2. labeled the phages' DNA with a radioisotope of phosphorus
    3. labeled the proteins of a separate group of phages with a radioisotope of sulfur
    4. DNA must be the genetic material in the phages
C. Chargaff (1947)
    1. DNA composition is species specific.
    2. example - humans
      a. A - 30.9%
      b. T - 29.4%
      c. C - 19.9%
      d. G - 19.8%
    3. Chargaff's rules
      a. A=T
      b. C=G
      c. unexplained at that time
D. Watson and Crick (1953)
    1. described the structure of DNA
      a. double helix
      b. purines (A,G) pair with pyrimidines (T,C)
    2. used model building
    3. used critical data from Rosalind Franklin
E. DNA stucture
    1. monomers are called nucleotides
      a. deoxyribose
      b. phosphate group
      c. nitrogenous base
    2. sugar - phosphate backbone
    3. complementary base pairs (A-T, G-C)
    4. terminology
      a. base pairs (humans ca. 6 billion)
      b. nucleotide sequence
    5. DNA strands are antiparallel
      a. 5' end - phosphate group
      b. 3' end - hydroxyl group
F. DNA replication
    1. When does it occur?
    2. semiconservative model
      a. the two strands of DNA molecule separate
      b. each strand copied
      c. end up with two new DNA molecules, each with one strand from the original molecule
    3. very fast, very accurate (ca. 1 error per billion nucleotides)
    4. involves many enzymes and other proteins
    5. origins of replication - specific nucleotide sequences starting points for replication
    6. replication bubble
    7. replication forks
    8. DNA polymerases - enzymes that catalyze the addition of new nucleotides
    9. leading strand - nucleotides added continuously in 5' to 3' direction
    10. lagging strand - Okazaki fragments
    11. DNA ligase - joins Okazaki fragments together to form a continuous strand of DNA
    12. DNA polymerase - can only attach nucletotides to other nucleotides of a strand that has already been started
    13. primer - short strand of RNA (about 10 nucleotides long) that allows new strands of DNA to form
    14. primase - the enzyme involved in assembling the primer
    15. another DNA polymerase later replicates the primer nucleotide with DNA fragments
    16. each Okazaki fragment must be primed
    17. hellicase - the enzyme that unwinds the double helix a the replication fork
    18. single-strand binding protein - help stabilize unwound DNA until the new complementary strand is formed
G. DNA repair and proofreading
    1. over 50 DNA repair enzymes have been identified
    2. mismatch repair - occurs during replication
    3. excision repair
H. Protein Synthesis
    1. one gene - one enzyme hypothesis
    2. one gene - one protein hypothesis
    3. one gene - one polypeptide hypothesis
    4. overview
      a. transcription
        - DNA --> pre-mRNA
        - occurs in nucleus
      b. RNA processing
        - pre-mRNA --> mRNA
        - occurs in nucleus
      c. translation
        - mRNA --> polypeptide
        - tRNA
        - ribosomes
        - occurs in cytosol
    5. RNA
      a. monomers are nucleotides
        - ribose
        - phosphate group
        - nitrogenous base
      b. complementary pairs (A-U, G-C)
      c. can pair with a single strand of a DNA molecule
      d. can pair with another RNA molecule
    6. the genetic code
      a. 4 nucleotides
      b. 20 amino acids
      c. triplet code
      d. 43 = 64
      e. 61 of the 64 different nucleotide triplets code for specific amino acids
      f. the other 3 triplets are stop codes
      g. codon - a triplet of mRNA
      h. anticodon - a triplet of tRNA
      i. reading frame - the code does not overlap
      j. code is redundant but not ambiguous
      k. code is nearly universal among all species that have been studied

Evolution

A. Evolution is genetically-based change in a population over time. (Darwin called evolution "descent with modification").

B. Individual organisms DO NOT evolve.

C. Microevolution - relatively minor, genetically-based changes in a population over a relatively short period of time.

D. Macroevolution - relatively major, genetically-based changes in populations over a relatively long period of time.
    1. Speciation - the evolution of new species from previously existing species.
    2. What is a species?
      a. biological species concept
      b. evolutionary species concept
E. What is the ultimate source of the variation among organisms?
    1. Changes in the gnome-mutations
F. Which mechanisms act on available variation to cause evolution to occur?
    1. natural selection - differential success in the reproduction of different phenotypes resutling from the interaction of organisms with their environment.
    2. genetic drift - changes in a small population's allele frequencies due to chance
G. Evidence - why do scientists think evolution is occuring and has occured?
    1. observation - evolution has been observed many times.
      a. peppered moths
      b. guppies
      c. resistance of bacteria to antibiotics that used to kill them
      d. resistance of mosquitos to insectisides that used to kill them
      e. many lab experiments with bacteria and viruses
    2. artificial selection - farmers and other humans have selectively bred many species of organisms and purposely changed the species' attributes over time.
      a. Canis familiaris (domestic dog)
      b. corn
      c. a species of wild mustard
        - kale
        - broccoli
        - cabbage
        - cauliflower
        - etc.
    3. anatomy and physiology of living species
      a. vertebrate heart (# of chambers)
        - fishes - 2
        - amphibians, most reptiles - 5
        - birds, mammals, few reptiles - 4
      b. vertebrate brain
      c. long, slender, forked tounge in snakes and some lizards
    4. vestigial features
      a. flightlessness in a number of bird species (example = flightless cormorant of Galapoagos Islands)
      b. human cecum
      c. eyes in many troglodytic and burrowing species (e.g., some fish, salamanders, naked mole rat)
      d. pelvis in some snakes
    5. metabolism of living species
      a. glycolysis - used by virtually all living cells
    6. development of living species
      a. early-stage embryos are very similar among vertebrate classes
      b. amniotic egg in reptiles, birds, and mammals
      c. many aspects of evolution that seem improbable or even impossible cam be observed during development
        - "ontogeny recapitulates phylogeny" - Hackel's biogenic law (not correct)
        - caution: clearly development is not the same thing as evolution
    7. behavior of living species
      a. parental care and nest-building in crocodilians and birds
      b. long-term parental care in humans and other primates
    8. geographic distribution of living species
      a. adaptive radiations on oceanic islands
      b. similar but different species geographically isolated from each other
        - ratite birds on the southern continents
    9. fossils
      a. transitional forms between early reptiles and mammals
      b. Archaeopteryx
      c. ancestry of horses
    10. proteins
      a. hemoglobin
      b. cytochrome c
    11. DNA
G. Charles Darwin and Alfred Wallace
    1. independently arrived at the idea of natural selection
    2. some common themes in their lives
      a. among the greatest naturallists of all time
      b. travelled/explored intesnsively
        - Darwin - H.M.S. Beagle
        - Wallace - South America, s.e. Asia
      c. worked on islands
        - Darwin - Galapagos
        - Wallace - East Indies
H. Natural Selection
    1. Selection acts on individuals, but its long term effect is on populations.
    2. Selection acts on an organism's phenotype, which over time affects the population's genome.
    3. example - peppered moths in England
    4. determinants of phenotype
      a. genotype
      b. environment
      c. traits affected by genes are inheritable
      d. traits affected by environment only are not inheritable
    5. adaptation - any feature of an organism that enhances its ability to survive and/or reproduce under its current environmental conditions
      a. because environments change, a feature adaptive at time A may no longer be adaptive at time B
    6. stabilizing selection
      a. reduces variation
      b. does not change mean
    7. directional selection
      a. changes mean in one direction
    8. disruptive selection
      a. favors the extremes in population over immediate forms
    9. fitness - relative reproductive contribution of genotypes and their associated phenotypes
      a. individual fitness - depends on relative number of offspring produced by an individual
      b. inclusive fitness - depends on individual fitness and the survival/reproduction of an individual's close relatives
    10. kin selection - a type of natural selection in which the relative contribution of a genotype is increased by "cooperation" among close relatives
      a. scrub jays
      b. eusocial species - include many sterile individuals
        - many ants, bees, termites
        - naked mole rat
    11. sexual selection - a type of natural selection that favors traits which improve an individual's chances of mating
      a. northern cardinal
      b. bighorn sheep
Population Genetics


I. A population is a group of individuals of the same species living in the same area.
    1. population charachteristics
      a. size (number of individuals)
      b. degree of isolation
      c. gene pool - all the genes in a population at any time
      d. genetic structure - the frequency of alleles and genotypes in a population
    2. calculating allele and genotype frequencies; example:
      a. a population has 500 members
      b. white flowers - 10; pink 480
      c. AA - 320; Aa - 160; aa - 20
      d. How many alleles are in a population of 500?
      e. What are the frequencies of A and a in the population?
        - freq. of a = [(20x2)+(160x1)] / 1000 = 200 / 1000 = 0.2
        - freq. of A = [(320x2)+(160x1)] / 1000 = 800 / 1000 = 0.8
        - once we know the freq. of a, how else could we calculate the freq. of A?
      f. What are the frequencies of the genotypes in the population?
        - freq. of AA = 320/500 = 0.64
        - freq. of Aa = 160/500 = 0.32
        - freq. of aa = 20/500 = 0.04
J. Hardy-Weinburg Theorem
    1. The frequencies of alleles and genotypes in a population's gene pool remain the constant over generations unless acted upon by asents other than sexual recombination.
    2. Hardy-Weinburg equilibrium
      a. A population is said to be at H-W equilibrium if its allele and genotype frequencies do not change from generation to generation
      b. give criteria must be met for a population to be at H-W equilibrium
        - very large population
        - random mating
        - no selection
        - no immigration or emmigration
        - no mutation
      c. p+q = 1
      d. p2 + 2pq + q2 = 1
      e. p2 + pq = p
      f. q2 + pq = q
    3. If you know p, you can calculate q.
    4. If you know q, you can calculate p.
    5. If you know all genotype frequencies (AA = p2, Aa = 2pq, aa = q2), you can calculate p and q.
    6. If a population is at H-W equilibrium, you can calculate all genotype frequencies from p or q.
    7. If a population is at H-W equilibrium you can calculate p, q, and all genotype frequencies by counting the number of individuals with the recessive phenotype.
    8. Probability rules are behind H-W Theorem
      a. freq. of A = p, so the probability that any fertilization event in the population involves a gamete with the A allele is p
      b. so, the probability that both gametes involved in the fertilization event have the A allele is p2 (rule of multiplication)
      c. freq. of a = q; probability of getting aa is q2
      d. probability of getting Aa involves rule of multiplication and rule of addition; pq + pq = 2pq
    9. What can we conclude if a population is not at H-W equilibrium?
      a. genetic drift (large population)
      b. nonrandom mating (random mating)
      c. natural selection (no selection)
      d. gene flow (no imm- or emmigration)
      e. mutation (no mutation)
    10. So H-W Theorem can be used to detect microevolution in a population
    11. Changes in generation to generation at a single locus are sufficient for saying that the population is evolving.
    12. determining population size
      a. effective population size - only breeding individuals are counted
    13. nonrandom breeding
      a. assortative mating - individuals choose mates with phenotypes similar to their own
      b. inbreeding - individuals mate with relatives
      c. results in increased homozygosity
      d. by itself changes genotype frequencies, but not all allele frequencies
K. Genetic Drift
    1. Drift can be defined as random changes in allele frequencies over time within a population.
    2. Over time genetic drift can lead to the loss of some alleles and the fixation of others.
    3. bottleneck effect
      a. occurs when a population's numbers are drastically reduced
      b. due to chance, allele frequencies in he surviving population will most likely differ from allele frequencies in original population
      c. sampling error
    4. founder effect
      a. occurs when a small propagule colonizes a new area that is isolated from the rest of the population
      b. same effect as bottleneck
      c. sampling error
L. Additional notes on variation in populations and species
    1. polymorphism - 2 discrete forms of the same trait exist in the population
    2. geographic variation - individuals of a wide-ranging species may differ genetically and phenotypically from region to region
      a. sometimes geographic variants are described as subspecies or races
      b. geographic variation may occur over a short distance (e.g. on mountains)
      c. cline - a slight difference that increases in degree from one end of a species' range to the other
    3. diploidy allows harmful alleles to persist in a population
    4. heterozygote advantage can help maintain the presence of 2 alleles at the same locus
      a. sickle-cell anemia in populations exposed to malaria
      b. hybrid vigor - crossing two inbred lines can result in more healty offspring
    5. source variation - mutation
    6. major increase in variation - recombination
      a. not only are individuals unique because they have different alleles, they are unique because they have different combinations of alleles
      b. random assortment
      c. crossing over
      d. sex
    7. The less time required for individuals of a population to develop and reproduce, the faster variationcan accumulate in that population.
M. Speciation - the evolution of new species from formerly existing species
    1. Allopatric specitation - speciation resulting from physical geographic separation of two or more populations
      a. gene flow is physically prohibited
      b. vicariance - a large population is divided into two or more parts by a barrier that arrises in the midst of the population
        - examples - formation of mountains or canyons, a river changing its course, a large lake drying, climatic changes can fragment suitable habitat over time, continiental drift, etc
      c. dispersal - a propagule colonizes an area that is remote from the rest
        - flight
        - rafting - some organisms can float across vast expanses of ocean on vegitation mats or just in the water
        - hitchhiking - parasites, seeds, etc. can be transported by other organisms
        - weather may be important
      d. Both dispersal and vicariance can be observed in the modern world.
        - numerous found out of range all the time (RBA's, etc.)
        - rafting frequently observed after hurricanes, monsoons
        - volcanic activity
      e. Past vicariant events an past climatic conditions can be studied.
        - geology
        - palynology - study of fossil pollen
        - paleontology - study of fossils
      f. Some organisms are better dispersers than others.
        - example very few amphibians found on oceanic islands
      g. Small, peripheral isolates may be more likely to become new species.
        - gene pool of peripheral isolate probably differs from gene pool of "parent" population (due to clines and/or founder effect)
        - genetic drift will have an important effect until the peripheral isolate increases its numbers
        - natural selection may have different effects on peripheral isolate due to environmental differences at the periphery of a species range (Why is a species' range the size it is?)
        - many peripheral isolates may die out instead of speciating
        - peripheral isolates may become reconnected to the parent
      h. Which processes allow an isolated population to become a new species over a long period of time?
        - genetic drift
        - natural selection
        - mutation
      i. adaptive radiation
        - on groups of islands (archipelago)
        - following major extinction events
        - occurs at a time or place with few competitors (lots of open niches)
    2. Sympatric speciation - a new species originating within the midst of the parent population
      a. "instant" speciation due to polyploidy
        - autopolyploids - have more than 2 chromosome sets all derived from a single species
        - allopolyploids - have more than 2 chromosome sets due to hybridization between two species
      b. disruptive selection + associated mating
      c. different habitat selection (e.g., Rhagoletis - hawthorn berries vs apples)
      d. common in plants, rare in animals
    3. Cladogenesis - a new species diverging from an existing species; the existing species continues to exist
    4. Anagenesis - a single species changes over time so that it is different from its ancestors
N. Reproductive Isolating Mechanisms
    1. Prezygotic barriers - impede mating or fertilization
      a. habitat isolation - 2 species use different habitats (e.g., aquatic vs. terrestrial)
      b. behavioral isolation - 2 species have different mating ritutals or signals (e.g., fireflies)
      c. temporal isolation - 2 species breed at different times (e.g., summer vs. winter)
      d. mechanical isolation - 2 species mah not be anatomically compatible (e.g., plants with different pollinators)
      e. gametic isolation - the gametes of two species won't form a zygote (e.g., sperm won't live in female of other species; or chemical recognition of sperm by egg)
    2. Postzygotic barriers - prevent hybrid zygote from developing into a viable, fertile adult
      a. reduced hybrid viability - hybrid offspring are healthy but are also sterile (e.g., horse x donkey -> mule; mule is sterile)
      b. hybrid breakdown - first generation hybrids are healthy and can reproduce, but their offspring are sterile or inviable
P. Recognizing species: theory vs. practice
    1. theory - species concepts
    2. practice - look for distinguishing features (and allopatry in many cases)
    3. It is not always clear whether 2 populations represent the same species or not. Why might we expect to encounter this difficulty?
    4. hybrid zone - narrow part of range where populations hybridize (e.g., red-shafted and yellow-shafted flickers)
    5. Hypotheses are sometimes revised basd on new information (e.g., Tropidurus melanopleurs).
    6. shifts in theory (lumpers vs. splitters; Baltimore vs. Bullock's orioles)
Q. Tempo of Evolution
    1. phyletic gradualism - new species form slowly over large amounts of time by the accumulation of shift differences
      a. Darwin
    2. punctuated equilibrium - changes resulting in a new species can occur relatively rapidly and there may be very long periods of time during which species change very little
      a. Eldredge and Gould (1972)
      b. "relatively rapidly" may be on the order of 50,000 years or so
      c. peripheral isolates
      d. seems to be supported by fossil record
      e. many phylogenetic studies seem to support it
      f. adaptive landscape (Sewall Wright) could help explain evolutionary stasis
    3. Gradualists and punctualists continue to debate the issue.
    4. Both gradual and rapid change may be important in the history of life.
R. Phylogenetic Systematics
    1. the study of the evolutionary relationships of species (phylogeny)
    2. the classification of species according to their evolutionary relationships
    3. monyphyletic groups are recognized with formal names (e.g., Paramecium, Felidae, Mammalia, Eukarya, etc.)
    4. classification is revised so that paraphyletic groups are not recognized (e.g., Reptilia, Monera)
    5. evidence from living and extinct species is used to make inferences about their phylogeny.
      a. anatomy
      b. development
      c. behavior
      d. life history
      e. proteins
      f. DNA, RNA
    6. In cladistics, parsimony analysis is used to evaluate the evidence that is gathered.
      a. synapomorphies (shared, derived characheristics) are considered evidence of relationship
      b. ingroup
      c. outgroup
    7. Other methods may be used (e.g., phenetics, maximum liklihood).
    8. Phylogenetic studies are important for many areas of biology
      a. any study that makes comparisons among species
      b. ecology
      c. physiology
      d. biogeography
      e. epidemiology
      f. conservation biology
      g. etc.

Origins: The Universe, the Earth, and Life on Earth

A. Major ideas in physics (cosmology)
    1. round Earth - Aristotle, 340 B.C.
    2. geometric model - Aristotle, Ptolomy
    3. heliocentric model - Copernicous, Kepler, Galileo
    4. gravity - Issac Newton
      a. Philosphiae Nuteralis Principa Mathematica (1687) - "probably the most important single work ever published in the phiscal sciences" S. Hawking
      b. every body in the universe is attracted by a force that is stronger the more massive the bodies and the close they are to each other
      c. explains orbits of planets, moons
      d. explains why tings fall to the ground
      e. space is not absolute - this follows from Newton's laws
    5. relativity - Albert Einstein
      a. developed in early 1900's
        - spacial relativity (1905)
        - general relativity (1915; accounts for gravity)
      b. revised Newton's ideas
      c. time is not absolute (it is relative to position and speed of the observer)
      d. time and space are not completely independent; rather they form an object called space-time
      e. gravity exists because space-time is not flat; it is curved by the distribution of mass and energy
      f. E=mc2
    6. quantum mechanics (early 1900's)
      a. mostly deals with physics processes at the subatomic level
      b. leptons - electrons, etc.
      c. quarks - particles that make up protons and neutrons
    7. forces
      a. gravity
      b. strong nuclear force - holds quarks together
      c. electromagnetism - holds electrons around nucleus; also responsible for radio and light waves
      d. weak nuclear force - causes radioactive decay
    8. unification - attempts to find a single law that explains the way the universe works through unification of ideas from general relativity and quantum mechanics; a single mathematical explaination for all four forces
B. Big Bang
    1. The universe is estimated to be 10-20 billion years old.
    2. The universe is expanding today.
    3. All matter, energy, time started at one point and burst outward.
    4. Earth and our solar system formed about 4.6 billion years ago.
C. Formation of Earth
    1. probably formed through accretion of large rocks
    2. center became molten due to pressure and radioactive decay
    3. core
    4. mantle
    5. crust
      a. ca. 40 km under continents
      b. as little as 5 km thick under some parts of ocean
    6. no life on Earth for ca. first billion years; life arose ca. 3.8 billion years ago
    7. early atmosphere of Earth was a reducing one
      a. no free O2
      b. CH4, CO2, NH3, H2, N2, H2O
D. Origin of Life on Earth
    1. The following represents a superficial overview of science's best explanation for how life on Earth may have formed from non-life. There is still a great deal of work to be done in this area.
    2. non-living materials (simple molecules) combined into more complex molecules that were eventually able to reproduce themselves.
      a. amino acids, purines, and pyrimidines formed from simpler molecules (those available in the reducing atmosphere)
        - Stanley Miller's experiments
      b. monomers combined to form polymers
      c. nucleic acid polymers can copy themselves (chemical "reproduction")\
    3. main path of information in living organisms is DNA -> RNA -> protein
    4. problem - proteins (enzymes) are used in all steps of this problem
      a. DNA synthesis (replication)
      b. protein synthesis
      c. but proteins are constructed according to info in nucleic acids
    5. so how did nucleic acids copy themselves without enzymes for copying themselves?
      a. discovery of ribozymes (catalytic RNA)
      b. hypothesis - RNA was the first information carrying molecule and some RNA had catalytic capability
      c. experiments
        - started with random sequence RNA, ended with highly catalytic RNA
        - started with RNA and individual nucleotides; polynucleotides formed
    6. As soon as molecular self-replication was possible, selection would begin to act.
      a. Any changes ("mutations") in a molecule that favored more efficient replication would result in that type of molecule becoming more abundant
      b. implications - from this point, the process is nonrandom
    7. how did first cells form?
      a. many different solutions that contain polymers will form coaceruates (round structures similar to cell membranes)
      b. selection again - RNA contained in membranes probably left more copies of itself than membrane-free RNA
    8. Membranes would have made homeostasis possible.
    9. use of energy

History of Life

A. Radioscopes are used to estimate the ages of fossils and rock layers
    1. HC can be used to date fossils about 30,000 years old or younger (half-life is ca 5700 years).
    2. 40K has been used to date many older events in Earth history (half-life is ca. 1.3 billion years; decays to 40Ar).
B. Geologists have divided the history of Earth into eons, eras, periods, etc. based on fossils found in different layers (strata) of rock.
    1. age of divisions vs. their duration
C. Earliest prokaryote fossils = ca. 3.5 billion years old (3.8 billion years ago - estimated time of origin)

D. Earliest bacteria that evolved the ability to use H20 as a source of H for their metabolism liberated O2
    1. As O2 levels increased, organisms evolved the ability to use O2, metabolically.
E. O2 levels in atmosphere have been gradually increasing during Earth history.
    1. only tiny cells would be able to survive in the low oxygen environment of early Earth (surface area/volume ratio)
    2. greater amounts of O2 allowed evolution of larger cells
    3. eventually enough O2 was available to support multicellular life
F. Major processes of change on Earth
    1. continental drift
      a. sea floor spreading - new crust is added from the mantle at rifts in the sea floor
      b. this causes continents to move
      c. when plates meet, they slide past each other or one goes under the other (can result in formation of mountains)
      d. affects climate, sea level, ocean currents, distribution of organisms, volcanic activity
      e. Pangaea - all continents together, harsh climates in interior (properties of water)
      f. Laurasia - North America, Europe, Asia
      g. Gondwanaland - South America, Africa, Madagascar, India, Australia, Antarctica
    2. shifts in climate
      a. Earth's orbit sometimes changed slightly
      b. change in ocean currents
    3. volcanic activity
      a. major volcanic episodes can affect Earth's climate
      b. ash in the atmosphere reduces penetration of sunlight, reducing temperatures
    4. meteroites
      a. small meteorites regularly hit Earth
      b. large meteor collisions are rare but do occur (Kansas, 1948, 5 ton meteor)
      c. mass extinction at end of Cretaceaous (about 65 mya) have been caused by a meteor collision
        - estimated size - 10 km diameter
        - a large crater (180 km diameter) was found of coast of Yucatan
        - thin layer of iridium
        - this hypothesis is still debated but has fairly strong support
G. Major events in history of life (times are estimates)
    1. Earth forms - 4.6 bya
    2. origin of life - 3.8 bya (prokaryotes)
    3. oldest known fossils - 3.5 bya (stromatolites - left by bacteria)
    4. O2 begins accumulating - 2.5 bya
    5. oldest eukaryote fossils - 1.5 bya
    6. first animals - 700 mya
    7. origin of most invertebrate phyla; diverse algae - Cambrian (544-500 mya)
    8. first vertebrates (jawless fishes); abundant marine algae - Ordovician - probably due to extensive glaciation
H. Three major faunas
    1. Cambrian explosion (ca. 500 mya)
      a. gave rise to most animal phyla
      b. Burgess Shale in British Columbia
      c. Wonderful Life by S.J. Gould
    2. Paleozoic fauna (ca. 440 mya)
      a. first animals colonize land
      b. many new families, genera, etc. but no new phyla (i.e., no significantly different body plans)
    3. Modern fauna (ca. 200 mya)
I. In general size and complexity of species increases within lineages.
    a. notable exception - insects
J. Interactions of predators and prey shape evolutionary history.
    a. arms race
    b. shells and shell breakers
    c. toxins and tolerance
K. Major U.S. Natural History Museums
    1. Smithsonian - Washington D.C.
    2. American Museum of Natural History - New York
    3. Carnegie Museum of Natural History - Pittsburgh
    4. California Academy of Natural History - San Fransisco
    5. Field Museum of Natural History - Chicago
    6. Dallas Museum of Natural History (not as big but closer)
L. Humans now more than ever, are affecting the fate of other organisms
    1. Humans alter environments
      a. pollution
      b. habitat destruction
      c. oil spills
      d. pesticides/herbicides
      e. fertilizer
    2. Humans effect geographic distribution of species.
      a. zebra mussel
      b. lamprey
      c. rats, cats, etc.
      d. brown tree snake
    3. Humans cause extinction
      a. directly by over harvesting
        - great auk
        - passenger pigeon
      b. indirectly by altering environment
        - ivory-billed woodpecker
      c. current rates of extinction are estimated to be on the order of a mass extinction
    4. artificial selection

Molecular Evolution

A. The structure and function of molecules can change over time.

B. Hypothesis of neutral evolution
    1. most changes in molecular structure that persist in lineages do not affect molecular function
    2. neutral substitutes accumulate at a rate that is approximately equal to the mutation rate (natural selection does not affect this rate)
    3. amino acid sequence of insulin
      a. very similar (but not identical) among mammal species
      b. certain regions vary; others usually don't
      c. in some cases, insulin from one species can function in another
    4. amino acid sequence of cytochrome c
C. Exons and introns
    1. exons only - most prokaryotes
    2. exons and introns - eukaryotes
D. Gene duplication and gene families
    1. Gene families are sets of genes that share a common origin
    2. Genes in gene families are very similar to one another
    3. Gene duplication lens to the existence of gene families
      a. accidents during crossing over
      b. transposable elements
    4. Gene families may include pseudogenes that do not function
    5. When a gene is duplicated, the new copy is free to evolve a new function, because the old copy is already carrying out the required function.
    6. globin gene families in humans
      a. my globin family
        - one gene
        - on chromosome 22
        - codes for myoglobin, which binds to O2 in muscle
      b. alpha globin family
        - 3 genes, 2 pseudogenes
        - on chromosome 16
        - code for components of hemoglobin, which binds O2 in blood
      c. beta globin family
        - 5 genes, 1 pseudogene
        - on chromosome 11
        - code for components of hemoglobin
      d. hemoglobin consists of 2 alpha polypeptides and 2 beta polypeptides
      e. different alpha and beta genes are expressed at different times in development
E. Interspecific variation in genome size
    1. There is a general trend for larger, more complex organisms to have larger genomes (e.g., prokaryotes vs. eukaryotes)
    2. But there are many exceptions to his observation.
    3. examples
      a. most prokaryotes have one circular chromosome and sometimes a tiny additional bit of DNA
      b. diploid number (2n) in eukaryotes varies between 2 and >1200
        - Penicillium (2n = 2)
        - fruit fly (2n = 8)
        - human (2n = 46)
        - chimpanzee (2n = 48)
        - dog (2n = 78)
        - adder's tounge fern (2n = 1262)
    4. Ife we just consider the coding DNA, disparity in genome size makes more sense (i.e., in general more complex organisms have more coding DNA).
F. molecular clocks
    1. can use DNA, proteins
    2. mutation rate must be estimated
      a. compare the same molecule in two species - how many differences?
      b. use fossil record or geologic history to estimate when the two species diverged
      c. provides relationship between number of differences in molecule time
    3. Once the rate at which a given molecule's clock ticks is estimated, any two species can be compared and their divergence time estimated.
    4. Why does it work? Most mutations are neutral. (see above)
    5. problem - selection changes the clock's rate; solutions - look at more than one molecule; interpret results with caution
    6. problem - different molecules "tick" at different rates; solution - each molecule's rate must be determined independently
    7. When making inferences about the past, the more information the better.
G. phylogenetic reconstruction
    1. different molecules are suitable for different problems
      a. e.g., relationships within a genus - use a relatively fast, evolving gene or protein
      b. e.g., relationships among classes - use a relatively slow-evolving gene or protein
    2. it is sometimes possible to extract DNA from fossils (Table 23.1 in text)
      a. small fragments, not the entire genome
      b. we can't reproduce extinct organisms by using this DNA (sorry, no Jurassic Park)
H. Mapping and sequencing genes
    1. Human Genome Project
    2. Caenorhabditis elegans (a nematode)
      a. model organism (development, population genetics, etc.)
      b. ca. 1 mm long
      c. consists of 959 somatic cells
      d. all genes have been mapped and sequenced

Animal Development

A. Development is the series of changes an organism undergoes from fertilization to death.

B. Prior to fertilization
    1. meiosis + cytokenesis
    2. spermatogenesis
    3. oogenesis
C. Fertilization restores the diploid number
    1. The haploid nucleus of the sperm fuses with the haploid nucleus of the egg.
    2. zygote (2n) - a fertilized egg
D. A zygote is a tiny and relatively simple structure. Consider what it becomes. All the information needed for producing the adult animal is contained within that zygote.
    1. differential gene expression - different genes are expressed at different times
E. The fertilized egg (a single cell) then begins to divide by mitosis + cytokenesis. Why mitosis?

F. Cleavage - initial period of cell division; embryo foes not increase in size
    1. blastomeres - the cells of this early embryo
    2. 2-cell stage
    3. 4-cell stage
    4. 8-cell stage
    5. 16-cell stage
    6. solid ball of cells
G. blastula (hollow ball of cells) forms
    1. blastocoel - space inside blastula
    2. forms when cells near middle of cell pump Na+ out, causing water to difuse into this area
H. gastrulation - formation of gastrula
    1. blastopore - opening into archenteron
    2. archenteron - "primative gut"
    3. gastrula is bilaterally symmetrical
    4. 3 tissue layers
      a. ectoderm - the cells around exterior of gastrula; derivatives include - skin, nervous system
      b. endoderm - the cells lining the archenteron; derivatives include most internal organs (stomach, lungs, liver, etc.)
      c. mesoderm - cells that invade the space between the endoerm and ectoderm; derivatives include - notochord, bones, blood vessels, conenctive tissues, muscles
I. neurulation - formation of neural tube (from ectoderm)
    1. neural tube separates from rest of ectoderm
    2. neural tube eventually becomes brain and spinal cord
J. cell migration - some cells move to different parts of the embryo (e.g., neural crest cells pinch off from neural tube; some of these neural crest cells will give rise to various sense organs)

K. organogenesis and growth - tissues develop into organs; the embryo gets larger

L. variation among vertebrate groups
    1. jawless fish
      a. little to no yolk in egg
      b. holoblastic cleavage
      c. blastomeres of approximately equal size
    2. bony fish, amphibians
      a. relatively more yolk than jawless fish
      b. vegetal pole, animal pole
      c. boloblastic cleavage
      d. blastomeres of vegetal pole larger
    3. reptiles, birds, some fish
      a. egg is almost all yolk with a tiny amount of cytoplasm at one end (the blastodisc)
      b. meroblastic cleavage
    4. mammals (placental)
      a. egg is very similar to reptile egg but with very little yolk
      b. holoblastic cleavage
      c. inner cell mass at one end of blastula
        - analogous to blastodisc
        - goes on to become embryo
      d. trophoblast
        - the other cells of the blastula
        - part contributes to placenta
    5. gastrulation in amniotes (reptiles, birds, and mammals)
      a. blastodisc (or inner cell mass) is flattened disc of cells; not a hollow ball as in blastula of other groups
      b. lower cells of blastodisc become endoderm
      c. upper cells of blastodisc become ectoderm
      d. ectoderm invaginates along midline giving rise to primative streak
      e. some of the invaginating cells give rise to mesoderm, in between ectoderm and endoderm.
M. induction - a cell switching from one development path to another due to interactions with other cells
    1. molecules involved in unduction (morphogens) turn certain genes on and off
    2. concentration of morphogen may be important; example in animal cells of clawed frog:
      a. low concentration - epidermis
      b. med. concentration - muscle
      c. high concentration - notochord
    3. the concentration of morphogen a cell receives is relative to its postition in the embryo
N. determination - commitment of a cell to a particular developmental path
    1. a cell is totipotent if it is still capible of expressing any of its genes
    2. up to the 8-cell stage in mammals, each blastomere is totipotent; implications:
      a. can divide up to 8-cell state embryo and produce 8 genetically identical individuals (this type of technology has been used in breeding certain valuable lines of cattle)
      b. can combine two 8-cell stage embryos and produce one individual that has four parents
    3. as development proceeds, the fates of the cells become determined; example:
      a. take cells from prospective brain region in early gastrula
      b. place these cells elsewhere in gastrula
      c. transplanted cells will develop like their new neighbors (i.e., not into brain tissue)
      d. take cells from prospective brain region in late gastrula
      e. place these cells elsewhere in gastrula
      f. transplanted cells will develop into neural tissue regardless of where they are placed in the gastrula
    4. Cells may become determined to become a certain type of tissue prior to differentiating into that type of tissue. (see imaginal discs below)
    5. Cells may become partially committed to a particular fate before they are completely committed; example: wing bud, leg bud on chicken
    6. determination cen be reversed; example:
      a. producing the cloned sheep Dolly
      b. used nucleus from a fully differentiated cell (mammary cell in udder)
    7. procedure for cloning a sheep
      a. remove cell from udder of sheep to be cloned; keep alive in culure
      b. remove and egg cell from another
      c. remove nucleus cell with micropipette
      d. insert udder cell into egg cell
      e. shock cell with electricity to release nucleus of udder cell and to trigger cell division
      f. grow egg ni culture to blastula stage
      g. insert blastula into surrogate sheep
      h. ca. 5 months later the clone is born
      i. clone is genetically identical to the sheep that "donated" the udder
O. pattern formation - forming the basic body arrangement; example from fruit fly:
    1. the source of bicoid protein (a type of morphogen) is mRNA from mother
    2. this mRNA stays near one end of egg
    3. bicoid protein diffuses though embryo forming a morphogen gradient
    4. the end of the embroy with the highest concentration of bicod protein becomes the head; posterior to his the thorax develops
    5. embryos that can't make bicoid protein develop neither a head nor a thorax
    6. if bicod protein is injected into either end of embryo that can't make it, it becomes the head
    7. bicoid protein activates particular genes
P. homeotic genes - act as "master switches" that determine what form different body segments will take
    1. example - in fruit flies, mutation in these genes can result in an extra set of wings or in legs forming where the antennae should be
    2. the order of the genes matches the order of the body parts they control
    3. homeobox
      a. found in homeotic genes
      b. 180 nucleotides long
      c. highly conserved (found in fruit flies, mice, humans; evidence of common ancestry)
Q. apotosis - programmed cell death is a normal part of development
    a. webbing between fingers in humans
    b. death of some neurons in humans
R. metamorphosis - a major developmental change (reorganization of the body) after hatching or birth (e.g., many arthropods, mollusks, fish, amphibians)
    1. fruit fly
      a. zygote develops into a free-living larva (maggot - common term for fly larva)
      b. larva eats, grows, passes through several instars (exoskeleton is shed to allow growth)
      c. larva develops into pupa
      d. imaginal discs - groups of cells "set aside" during embryonic development; in the pupa various discs give rise to legs, wings, eyes, etc.
      e. adult emerges from pupal shell
      f. this general pattern holds form many insects (e.g., caterpillars become butterflies; grubs become beetles)
    2. leopard frog
      a. zygote develops into a free-living larva (tadpole)
      b. larva eats, grows
      c. larva undergoes metamorphosis
      d. apotosis is involved in breaking down a tadpole's tail
      e. not all amphibians have a larval stage
        - some caecillians, salamanders, and frogs hatch or are born as miniature adults
      f. in the paradox frog, tadpoles are larger than adults
    3. metamorphosis in brought on by signals from the endocrine system (hormones)
    4. in some species/populations, the larva never metamorphoses (neoteny)
S. external vs. internal fertilization
    1. internal fertilization is often necessary in dry environments
    2. internal fertilization is necessary in species that lay shelled eggs
T. numbers of offspring and parental care
    1. general trend - large numbers of offspring, less parental care; few offspring, more parental care
U. Aging - why do animals age? What causes the changes we see in individuals as they get older? Variety of hypotheses:
    1. accumulated mutation hypothesis
      a. cells accumulate mutations as they age
      b. eventually these mutations are lethal
      c. problem - no direct evidence that these mutations actually cause aging
    2. telomere depletion hypothesis
      a. telomeres - repeats of sequence TTAGGG at the ends of chromosomes
      b. every time DNA is replicated for cell division, telomeres become shorter
      c. after so many divisions, a cell can no longer divide
      d. telomerase - an enzyme that "rebuilds" telomeres; only produced in certain cells that divide constantly (e.g., bone marrow cells)
      e. telomerase is expressed in many cancer cells
      f. cells that artificially caused to produce telomerase will divide many more times than cells of the same type without telomerase
    3. wear and tear hypothesis
      a. cells accumulate damage over time
      b. partially due to harmful substances produced during metabolism
      c. reduced flexibility at joints can be attributed to reactions involving these harmful substances
    4. immunological exhaustion hypothesis
      a. as we get older we become susceptible to infectious disease
      b. fewer committee T cells
      c. produce less interleukin-2 (a growth factor that stimulates production of T cells)
    5. gene clock hypothesis
      a. some genes are involved in regulating the aging process
      b. Hutchison-Gilford Syndrome - extremely rapid aging in children (a very rare genetic disorder)
      c. a combination of mutations in C. eligans can increase its life-span five fold
    6. Is aging regulated by genes or does the body simply wear out over time?

Organ Systems

I. Nervous System (Central Nervous System and Peripheral Nervous System)
    A. Central Nervous System (CNS)
      1. consists of the brain and the spinal cord
      2. the vertebrate is the master control center for almost all bodily functions
      3. the spinal cord in vertebrates is single and located dorsally; it forms in the embryo as a tube with a hollow central canal (a remnant of which survives in the adult)
    B. Peripheral Nervous System
      1. consists of nerve fibers that relate signals between the CNS and other parts of the body (the periphery)
      2. two divisions
        a. Afferent: detects, encodes, and transmits peripheral signals to the CNS for processing
        • peripheral signals include sensory informations from the special senses including vision, hearing, smell, taste, and touch
        b. Efferent: transmits signals from the CNS to the periphery
II. Muscular System
    A. Three types of muscle tissue (skeletal muscle, smooth muscle, and cardiac muscle)
    B. Skeletal Muscle (voluntary or striated muscle)
      1. attaches to the skeleton
      2. most abundant tissue in vertebrate body
      3. produces movements of the limbs, trunk, face, jaws, eyeballs, etc.
    C. Smooth muscle
      1. found in the walls of hollow organs and tubes (walls of digestive tract, bladder, ateries and veins)
    D. Cardiac Muscle
      1. found only in the walls of the heart
      2. contractions are responsible for pumping blood throughout the body
III. Circulatory System
    A. all vertebrates have a closed circulatory system (a circuit rigidly encompassed in well-defined channels or vessels)
    B. consists of a heart and numerous arteries, capillaries and veins.
    C. Arteries carry blood away from the heart, while veins carry blood toward the heart
    D. Capillaries are tiny blood vessels that interconnect the arteries and the veins, and the site of material exchange between the blood and other tissue
    E. Functions as the internal transport system of animals
IV. Respiratory System
    A. functions by exchanging oxygen and carbon dioxide between the atmosphere and the blood
    B. the system includes the respiratory system leading into the lungs, the lungs themselves, and the structures of the chest involved in producing movement of air through the airways into and out of the lungs and gills
V. Urinary System
    A. consists of the kidneys, ureters, urinary bladder, and urethra
    B. functions of the kidneys
      1. maintaining water balance in the body
      2. regulating the quantity and concentration of most ions
      3. maintaining proper plasma (component of the blood) levels
      4. excreting waste products of bodily metabolism
      5. excreting many foreign compounds
VI. Digestive System
    A. responsible for transferring nutrients, water, and electrolytes from the external environment to the internal environment
    B. Components of the Digestive system and their functions
      1. oral cavity (teeth): mechanical breakup of food by biting and chewing
      2. stomach: stores food, churns and breaks up food, enzymatic digestion
      3. small intestine: area where most food is digested and absorbed
      4. large intestine: reabsorption of water
VII. Endocrine System
    A. tissues responsible for producing and releasing hormones directly into the blood with no special ducts or tubes involved
    B. Examples of major endocrine organs and hormones the secrete
      1. Pancreas: insulin and glucagon
      2. Adrenal medulla: adrenalin and noradrenalin
      3. Testes: testosterone
      4. Ovaries: estrogen and progesterone
      5. Stomach: gastrin
    C. plays an important role in internal control
VIII. Reproductive System
    A. Reproduction is not essential for survival of the individual, but it is necessary for the survival of the species.
    B. The system is designed to enable union of genetic material from the two sexual partners, and the female system is equipped to house and nourish the offspring to developmental point at which it can survive independently in the external environment.
    C. Primary reproductive organs or gonads
      1. a pair of testes in the male
      2. a pair of ovaries in a female
      3. in both sexes, the mature gonads perform the dual function of:
        a. producing gametes (gametogenesis), spermatozoa (sperm) in the male and ova (eggs) in the female
        b. secrete sex hormones, testosterone in males and estrogen and progesterone in females
IX. Immune System
    A. provides protection against foreign and abnormal cells and removes cellular debris
    B. Lymphoid tissues store, produce, and process leukocytes (white blood cells)
      1. bone marrow
      2. lymph nodes
      3. tonsils
      4. appendix
      5. spleen
      6. thymus
X. Integumentary System
    A. the skin is the largest organ of the body
    B. functions as an external defense mechanism against opportunistic pathogens by covering the outside of the body
XI. Skeletal System
    A. Vertebrate skeletons are composed primarily of bone and/or cartilage
    B. Cartilage is firm, but not as hard or as brittle as bone
      1. primary component of the skeleton of an embryo in all vertebrates
      2. a cartilaginous skeleton persists throughout life in some vertebrates (sharks, skates, and rays)
    C. Some bones are held together at movable joints by ligaments
    D. Skeletal muscles are attached to bones by means of tendons.

What Constitutes a Species?

I. Typological Species Concept
    - by Charles Darwin
    - categorized by look
II. Biological Species Concept
    - if two similar organisms will breed, they are the same species
    - in some cases of breeding a hybrid is produced
    - some species can mate to create intergrades
    - problem with the concept is asexual organisms and when females reproduce when no males are present
III. Ecological Species Concept
    - separated by niche
    - depends on interactions within the environment and eating habits
    - environmental preference between organisms can make a difference
IV. Evolutionary History Species Concept
    - structured according to evolution
    - refers to genetic trees
    - caused by geographic separation
    - ex: species A evolves into species A and B. later species A creates another offshoot to create species C.
V. Phylogenetic Species Concept
    - says that one species evolves in to two completely new species leaving the old species extinct
    - ex: species A evolves into species B and C and A no longer exists

High School Biology II

I. Biology - study of life
    A. what alive
      1. Has order - heirarchial organization
        a) cell - tissues, organs, organ systems
        b) organism - population, ecosystems, biomes, biosphere
      2. sensitivity - responding to stimuli
      3. growth development and reproduction
      4. regulation - coordination of systems
    B. Nature of Science
      1. deductive reasoning - resting general idea - math and philosophy
      2. inductive reasoning - use observations to make and test a model (science) (the scientific method)
      3. basic research - science for the sake of science at the university level 4. applied research - science to make money - industry
immutable - do not change
    C. Darwin - who influenced him
      1. Thomas Malthus - essay on geometric increase in species, but arithmetic increase in food
        a) geometric increase: (2, 6, 18, 54)
        b) arithmetic increase: (2, 6, 10, 14)
      2. Alfred Russel Wallace - joint presentation on natural selection and survival of the fittest

I. Chemistry
    A. Atoms
      1. matter - takes up space
      2. protons - atomic number
      3. atomic mass - protons + neutrons; measured in daltons
    B. Isotope - atoms of the same element with the same number of neutrons
      1. radioactive - nucleus unstable nucleus breaks and releases energy (radioactive decay of halflife) Carbon 14
      2. radioactive material damages or kills living cells
    C. Electrons
      1. ions - charged; different number of protons to electrons
        a) cation - positive charge caused by loss of electron
        b) anion - negative due to gain of electron
      2. orbitals - where find electrons (cloud around nucleus)
        a) s shape - sphericle
        b) p shape - dumbell
      3. electrons determine behavior of atom
    D. Energy
      1. octet rule - where atoms will fill outer energy levels
      2. valence electrons - electrons in outer energy level
      3. exodation - loss of electron
      4. reduction - gain of electron
II. Chemical bonds
    A. Ionic - transfer of electrons
      1. molecule - group of atoms held together by bonds
      2. compound - molecule with more than one element (H2O, NaCl)
    B. Covalent bond - sharing electrons
      1. Na + Cl (reactants) -> NaCl (product)
      2. chemical reactions
        a) temerature - increases rate of reactions
        b) more reactants increase rate of forward reaction where more products increase rate of reverse reaction
        c) catalyst - speeds up reactions (enzymes)
    C. Biological Atoms - 11 of 92 elements are found in a measurable proportion in the body
      1. carbon, oxygen, hydrogen, nitrogen (4 most common elements)
        a) all form covalent bonds
        b) weak enough to break at life's temperature
        c) two of these are 90% of the atoms (water)
        d) found in gas form soluble in H2O
    D. Water
      1. H2O - polar molecule
        a) oxygen - slightly negative
        b) hydrogen - slightly positive
      2. attraction to other H2O molecules called cohesion
      3. adhesion - attraction to other molecules
        a) capilary action - thinner the tube, stronger the attraction
      4. hydrophobic - molecule that does not like water
      5. hydrophilic - molecule that likes water
    E. Water as a solvent
      1. hydration shell - water molecules surrounding an ion
    F. pH - 1 -> 7 <- 14
      1. H+ - hydrogen ion - acid
      2. OH- - hydroxyl group (ion) - base

      H2O -> H+ + OH-
    G. Buffer
      1. blood normal pH of 7.4
      2. blood acidosis - pH .2 - .4
      3. blood alkalosis - opposite of above
      4. buffer - resevoir for H+
        a) carbonic acid - (H2CO3)
        b) bicarbonate - (HCO3)
          - they switch off and will release whichever is needed to be a buffer

I. Chemical Building Blocks
    A. Macromolecules
      1. organic - contains carbon
      2. four categories
        a) carbohydrates
        b) lipids
        c) proteins
        d) nucleic acids
      3. functional groups
        a) hydroxyl (-OH)
        b) carbonyl (-C=O)
        c) carboxyl (-COOH)
        d) amino (-NH2)
        e) sulfhydryl (-SH)
        f) phosphate (PO4)
        g) methyl (CH3)
    B. Building macro molecules
      1. dehydration synthesis - put together by removing a water
      C6H12O6 + C6H12O6 -> C12H22O11 + H2O
      2. hydrolysis - to break appart by adding water
      3. anabolic reaction - macromolecules are built from smaller subunits (put popcorn on a string)
      4. catabolic reaction - taking a large molecule and breaking it into subunits
    C. Carbohydrates - energy storing molecule
      1. sugars - contain C:H:O in 1:2:1 ratio
        a) energy storage due to the high number of C-H bonds
        b) monosaccharide - C6H12O6
        c) glucose - most important monosaccharide
      2. Isomers - fructose and galactose are isomers of glucose
        - structural isomer - identical chemical groups bonded to different carbon atoms
        - stereoisomer - identical chemical groups bonded to the same carbon atoms with different orientation
      3. Transport Disaccharides - energy being transported without fear of being used until it reaches its destination (like writing a check instead of cash)
        a) special enzymes regulate the breaking of disaccharides
        b) maltose - made of two glucose molecules (fruit)
        c) sucrose - glucose and fructose (table sugar) (from plants)
        d) lactose - glucose and galactose (milk sugar)
      4. Polysaccharides
        a) starch - long chains of glucose of maltose
        • amylose - simplest starch
        • use hydrolysis to break polysaccharides up
        b) glycogen - animal store glucose; longer than starch and more branched
        c) cellulose - CH2OH group is located on alternating carbons to give it strength. It takes a specific enzyme to break that bond. Humans use cellulose as a source of fiber to help clean digestive system.
        d) chitin - modified form of cellulose; added a nitrogen to glucose (exoskeleton)
    D. Lipids - fats, phospholipids, steroids, terpenes, prostiglandins
      1. Fats
        a) used to store glucose (energy) for long periods of time - due to high number of C-H bonds
        b) C-H bonds are non-polar; not soluble in water
        c) structure: 2 subunits
        • glycerol - carbon alchohol with a hydroxyl (OH)
        • fattyacids - long hydrocarbon chain ending in a carboxyl (COOH)
        d) saturated fat - fatty acid with all internal carbons bonded to a hydrogen
        e) unsaturated fat - having a double bond; a fatty acid that does not have the maximum number of hydrogens bonded to carbons
        f) polyunsaturated fat - being more than a double bond
        • low melting point and are liquid at room temperature
        g) allocation of carbos
        • glucose for immediate energy
        • transport disaccharides
        • convert starch or glycogen for future use
        h) as you age, the need for energy drops but carbohydrate intake does not, so the body turns it to fat (why people get fatter when older when eating the same as before)
      2. phospholipids - polar heads and non-polar tails; triglyceride with fatty acid chain replaced by a phosphate group (PO4
      3. steroid - cholesterol or carbon rings
      4. terpens - very long chained lipids; ex: chlorophyll (plants) and retinal (animals for vision)
      5. prostaglandins - involved in inflamitory response and are inhibited by asprin
    E. Proteins
      1. kinds of proteins
        a) enzyme - biological catalyst
        b) globular proteins - enzymes or antibodies
        c) fibrous proteins - collagen, muscle fibers, ligaments (muscle to bone) and tendons (bone to bone)
        d) peptides - intercellular messengers
      2. amino acids - building blocks of proteins; central carbon with an amino acid group (NH2), carboxyl group (-COOH), and a hydrogen atom
        a) 20 common amino acids - each has a chemical side group that make it unique - this is an R group (the variable in an amino acid)
        b) peptide bond - a vovalent bond between 2 amino acids
        c) polypeptide - (many bonds) long chains of amino acids held together by peptide bonds (aka proteins)
      3. globular proteins - long chained proteins folded into complex 3D shapes
        a) primary structure - amino acid squence
        b) secondary structure - how the protein bonds itself to itself with hydrogen bonds
        • alpha helix
        • beta sheet - two chains linking to form a pleat
        c) tertiary structure - folded in 3D shape upon itself
        d) quaternary structure - the subunit structure (number of alpha + beta)
        e) denaturing - unfolding of alpha and beta folds (what happens when you cook meat or get a high fever)
    F. Nucleic Acids - information storage device
      1. structure - long polymers of nuleotides
        a) 5 carbon sugar (ribose, deoxyribose)
        b) phosphate (PO4)
        c) nitrogenous base
      2. phosphodiser bond - bond between nucleotides formed by dehydration synthesis
      3. purines - bases in DNA & RNA
        a) adenine
        b) guanine
      4. pyrimidines -
        a) cytosine - DNA & RNA
        b) thymine - DNA
        c) uracil - RNA
      5. ATP - Adenosine Triphosphate
        a) DC sugar
        b) base - adenine
        c) 3 phosphate groups
      6. DNA
        a) deoxyribose
        b) double stranded
        c) hydrogen bonds at bases hold helix together
        d) A-T     C-G
        e) does not leave nucleus
      7. RNA
        a) blue print for amino acids
        b) leaves nucleus
        c) ribose
        d) single strand
        e) A-U     G-C

International Travel to China

In this marketing class, I traveled to Beijing, China, where I proposed to my wife.

Introductory American Government

This course offers a survey of the ideas and the practice of contemporary government and politics in the United States. It will examine the American political process with special attention to its context, institutions, and the electoral process. Furthermore, this course will emphasize the theoretical and practical understanding of how and why the American political system produces the kind of policies it does, and how the system itself is structured.

Class Meetings:
Classes will meet Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays from 10:00 a.m. until 10:50 a.m. in Bus. 204.

Text:
The following text is required and is available for purchase at the campus bookstore.

American Government: 5th edition. Wilson, James Q.

Course Requirements:

1. Attendance of class meetings.
2. Successful completion of three exams to be held on September 17, October 15 and November 12, 1999.
3. Successful completion of the Final Exam scheduled for December 15, 1999.
4. Successful completion of a five to seven page term paper, the topic to be discussed in class, which will be due on November 19, 1999

Grading Scale:

Each exam will consist of 25 multiple choice questions and five out of seven short identifications. Make up exams will only be scheduled for students with a valid and credible excuse. Students who anticipate being absent from class due to religious observance should inform the instructor by the end of the second week in writing. (Coordinating Board Rule). Each exam, including the Final, will be worth 100 points for an overall total of 400 points. The term paper will count for an additional 100 points for an overall class total of 500 points. The grading scale will be the following:
450-500 points = A
400-449 points = B
350-399 points = C
300-349 points = D
299 or below = F

Course Outline:

1. Introduction

2. The Constitution, Wilson, Chapters 1-3

3. The Judiciary, Civil Rights and Civil Liberties, Wilson, Chapters 10 and 11

4. Congress, Wilson, Chapter 7

5. The Presidency, Wilson, Chapter 8

6. Political Parties and Interest Groups, Wilson, Chapter 5

7. Public Opinion and the Media Wilson, Chapter 4

8. Voting Behavior, Campaigns and Elections, Wilson, Chapter 6

9. The Bureaucracy and Public Policy, Wilson, Chapters 9 and 12

10. Conclusion, Wilson, Chapter 13

Managerial Strategy and Policy

Course description: Integration of accounting, economics, law, finance, management, and marketing in the solution of an organization's problems. The case method is used extensively.

This capstone course was centered around doing a strategic analysis of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats in a business. My report was over Black & Decker. I also wrote about cases in Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases by Thompson and Strickland.

AttachmentSize
MANA4395_David_Norman_SWOT_analysis.pdf109.11 KB

Money and Banking & the Federal Reserve

Instructor: Les Peacock, Ph.D.

Course objective: To provide students with a working knowledge of relationships between money and banking and (a) economic performance; (b) financial markets; and (c) international financial issues.

Topics covered: Role of money in modern economics, relationships between money and banking, role and structure of Federal Reserve, monetary history of US, principles of banking, relationship between money and prices, money, credit, interest rates, international aspects of money and banking, and credit.

Notes

Money is personally important and important to the nation. Banks create money and the Fed determines the extent to create and destroy money, though most is done by banks. Banks create credit money in cooperation with bank deposits.

The US dollar is called fiat money, which is money because the government says so. Fiat money isn't attached to a scarce resource like gold. When fiat money is unstable, it is because the government is unstable.

Bartering involves a coincidence of wants; it is a form of commodity money. "Parfadism" is related as part of ancient agricultures.

Seigniorage is the profit the government makes from coining money. It may only cost 4 cents in materials and labor to create a coin worth 25 cents in the marketplace (a quarter). In 2004, the cost of producing US coins was as follows:

Cost of Producing the Penny, Nickel, Dime, Quarter, Half-dollar and Golden Dollar Coins
Golden Dollar Half Dollar Quarter Dime Nickel Penny
21.14 cents 16.97 cents 7.33 cents 3.14 cents 4.56 cents .93 cents

The Federal Reserve: Purposes & Functions

The Federal Reserve System is the central bank of the United States. It was founded by Congress in 1913 to provide the nation with a safer, more flexible, and more stable monetary and financial system; over the years, its role in banking and the economy has expanded. The Federal Reserve's duties fall into four general areas:

  • Conducting the nation's monetary policy by influencing the money and credit conditions in the economy in pursuit of full employment and stable prices.
  • Supervising and regulating banking institutions to ensure the safety and soundness of the nation's banking and financial system and to protect the credit rights of consumers.
  • Maintaining the stability of the financial system and containing systemic risk that may arise in financial markets.
  • Providing certain financial services to the U.S. government, to the public, to financial institutions, and to foreign official institutions, including playing a major role in operating the nation's payments system.

Most developed countries have a central bank whose functions are broadly similar to those of the Federal Reserve. The Bank of England has existed since the end of the seventeenth century. Napoleon I established the Banque de France in 1800, and the Bank of Canada began operations in 1935. The German central bank was reestablished after World War II and is loosely modeled on the Federal Reserve.

Before Congress created the Federal Reserve System, periodic financial panics had plagued the nation. These panics had contributed to many bank failures, business bankruptcies, and general economic downturn. A particularly severe crisis in 1907 prompted Congress to establish the National Monetary Commission, which put forth proposals to create an institution that would counter financial disruptions of these kinds. After considerable debate, Congress passed the Federal Reserve Act, which President Woodrow Wilson signed into law on December 23, 1913 at 6:02 p.m. The act stated that the purposes were "to provide for establishment of Federal reserve banks, to furnish an elastic currency, to afford means of rediscounting commercial paper, to establish a more effective supervision of banking in the United States, and for other purposes."

On-Line Systems

Course description: Coverage of the architecture and programming of transaction processing, client/server systems, and distributed objects. Programming will involve traditional on-line transaction processing with systems similar to CICS as well as newer client/server systems such as Visual BASIC. Comparison of on-line transaction processing verses dimensional data warehousing.

This course was a continuation of COSC3308 personal computing. It covered more advanced areas of Visual Basic 6 programming. The textbook for the course was Advanced Visual Basic 6: 2nd Edition by Irvine and Liang. I used material from this class in my masters degree to complete a semester-long systems development project in ISM6121 advanced information system analysis and design. Microsoft Visual Basic .NET was becoming more popular during this course, so I took advantage of the Microsoft Academic Alliance contract UT Tyler had with Microsoft to do some of my homework assignments in .NET instead of version 6 of VB.

Cleaning equipment rental wizard

This project gave me experience with loading multiple forms and passing information between them. It is a wizard for checking out equipment from a fictional company to accomplish various cleaning projects. Based on variables passed to each form, the next form generates a changing list of equipment. The user inputs their contact information, and an invoice can be printed for the equipment to the default printer.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman cleaning equipment wizard lab04.zip57.78 KB

Form clone

This program creates 25 forms with random background colors. The main form has a select menu to activate any one of the 25 forms. Since the forms are created in a sort of random fashion, the main form has to keep track of the randomly generated forms to know how to activate them when selected.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman form clone lab05.zip146.78 KB

Freight forwarding service

This project is my first to implement a save function to a comma-delimited file. It accepts input for a fictional freight forwarding service. The values are stored in RAM until save is selected from the file menu. Save writes the information to a file named packages.dat.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman freight fowarding service lab03.zip38.92 KB

Graphic viewer

This project was my first programmed in .NET. It displays images in BMP, JPG, GIF, WMF, or ICO format. It was also a way to practice using methods to open files from the filesystem and load them into memory.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman image viewer lab02.zip67.2 KB

Northwind reader

This program reads the famous Microsoft Northwind database. It has only partial functionality to read records from the orders and product categories tables. It does nothing more than simply display information.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman Northwind reader lab07.zip1.25 MB

Payment schedule

This program generates an amortization table based on user input of principal, percent interest, and loan duration. Figuring out the math for the interest paid, principal paid, and balance for each month of the payment schedule was harder than it looked. The percent interest does not accept values below 5.0, not as a bug, but rather as a "feature" required as part of the assignment.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman amortization lab09.zip33.09 KB

Temperature conversion

This was the first assignment of the semester. It was a warm up for people rusty on VB code to get familiar with programming again. It simply does a conversion from Celsius to Fahrenheit or vise versa in real time. Previously, all projects I completed had user-initiated actions by a button click or menu selection. It has a bug that crashes the program if a period is entered as the first character in the text fields even though it does a check for incorrect input.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman temperature conversion lab01.zip19.26 KB

Wordperfection

The parent form in this project has a project area to hold notepad-like documents. It was my first experience with creating a file open function to read file contents into memory, save the file back to disk in RTF format, and use the tiling functions for windows.

AttachmentSize
COSC3370 David Norman wordperfection lab06.zip53.78 KB

Personal Computing

Course description: Microcomputer systems, hardware, software, architecture, and operating systems. Programming languages designed for microcomputer systems including Visual BASIC.

My goals in this course were to get introduced to Visual Basic 6.0. Several labs were assigned as experiential learning to implement textbook examples as working VB6 code. Each assignment was supposed to include source code, a working executable, and a screenshot in a MS Word document based on hands-on programming examples assigned by the professor or listed in Programming in Visual Basic 6.0.

Checking calculator

This was an extra credit assignment for chapter 4 in the textbook. It simulates credits and debits to a checking account. It starts at a zero balance, then users can manipulate the balance of the account by either logging transactions for depositing money, writing a check, or a service charge. If the user simulates writing a check for more than the balance in the account, the program displays an error and deducts a service fee for attempting to overdraw the account.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman checking calculator extra credit.zip14.57 KB

Crazy keyboard

This was the end-of-semester practical for the course. The program displays a simulated on-screen keyboard defaulting to a QWERTY layout. Users can change the format to scramble the key assignments or put them in alphabetic (ABC) order. Then by clicking each button, the titlebar to in the program should display the letter of the on-screen keyboard key clicked.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman crazy keyboard practical.zip28 KB

Editor

This was lab number 6. I had to create a similar program to Microsoft Notepad. It was my first program to use exclusively menu-based commands. Copy, paste, select all, clear all, font color, font size, and font style were all new functions I used to implement this program. I was not required to implement open and save in the file menu. I thought many of the lab requirements were poorly documented in the textbook, so I had to become familar with the VB6 MSDN help and resources I found in Google searches.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman editor lab06.zip24.23 KB

Income survey

This was lab number ten. It was my first experience using VB6 to connect to a database. An executable is not included and the database file is too old for "modern" installations of Microsoft Access to read. This is listed simply for archival.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman income survey lab10.zip12.54 KB

Manufacturing pay calculator

This was lab number four. It includes incomplete source code and a screenshot of a pay calculator for a fictional manufacturing business. It accepted input for an employee name and pieces completed to generate a dollar amount of pay. It gave me experience in accepting text input, performing calculations, and responding to interactive activity from clicks to buttons. It was also one of the first assignments where I used menus.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman pay calculator lab04.zip11.92 KB

Pay calculator

This was an extra credit assignment to create a calculator for employee pay and deductions. It accepts an employee name and sales in dollars. Based on the sales in dollars, the program calculates deductions, net pay, and a suggested budget for the employee to spend the money.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman sales pay calculator ch3 ex credit.zip18.19 KB

Piecework calculator

This was lab number eight. It was the first assignment for me to use a slash screen and use multiple forms to display information. This is an advanced version of the pay calculator I created in lab number four. It accepts an employee name and number of pieces completed for a fictional manufacturing company. The program remembers input to create a summary of employee production and pay. I also used menu options to display and hide information on the main form.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman piecework calculator lab08.zip44.33 KB

Salmon identification

This was lab five. Based on several inputs of salmon characteristics, I had to check against a list of fish to identify species of North Pacific salmon. I got experience with loops in VB6 in this project.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman salmon identification lab05.zip23.76 KB

Student tracker

This was lab number nine. It accepts user input about fictional student profiles and stores variables in array fashion. Using string concatenation, it prints student profiles to a text box in a separate form.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman student tracker lab09.zip25.75 KB

Suit matching

This was an extra credit assignment similar to the traffic sign test. Users drag icons of either a spade, club, heart, or diamond to their name. If an icon is dragged to the wrong name, it is reset to the original location to represent an incorrect choice. Users can use a menu option to cheat and see the correct answers.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman suit matching extra credit.zip20.32 KB

Traffic sign tutorial

This was lab number 7. I had to use drag and drop functions to have users match traffic signs with their name in text. If a user drops an image in the wrong location, it resets back to the original location to signify an incorrect choice.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman drag and drop lab07.zip19.03 KB

World data viewer

This was lab number twelve. The program connects to an old Microsoft Access database too old for "modern" installations of Microsoft Access to read. Based on values in the database, the program had to list the values and change a clipart icon representing the value. It also implements hotkeys listed in the menus and allows for dynamic changes of the form background color.

AttachmentSize
COSC3308 David Norman world data viewer lab12.zip27.86 KB

Principles of Accounting

Course description: A study of the principles of accounting as applied to sole proprietorships. The course introduces the accounting cycle, revenue, expense, accruals, and deferrals.

Course objectives: To be able to understand and apply the theory related to accounting for sole proprietorships.

What is accounting?

  1. Definition
    1. Accounting: the process of
      1. Identifying
      2. Recording, and
      3. Communicating
      to internal and external users the economic events of an organization to interested users of the information. Examples are internal managers or external IRS, SEC, investors, and/or consumers
    2. Identification of economic events
      1. Sale of goods
      2. Rendering of services
      3. Payment of wages
      4. Collection of money
      5. Payment of expenses
    3. Recording of economic events
      1. Economic event is measured in dollars and cents
      2. Recorded in an orderly and systematic manner
      3. Each event is properly classified and summarized
    4. Communication of economic events
      1. Accounting reports (financial statements [F/S]) are prepared
      2. Standardized formats are used for the reports
      3. Accountants analyze and interpret the reports for interested users
      4. Reports are distributed to interested users
    5. Financial statements
      1. balance sheet
      2. income statement
  2. Who uses accounting data?
    1. Internal users
      1. Managers who plan, organize, and run a business
      2. Internal accounting reports are needed for
        1. financial comparisons of operating alternatives
        2. income projections
        3. sales forecasts
        4. forecasts of cash needs
        5. financial statements
    2. External users
      1. Investors (stockholders) need accounting information to make decisions regarding buying, holding or selling stock
      2. Creditors (bankers) need accounting information to make decisions regarding granting credit or lending money
      3. Taxing authorities (IRS) need to know if the company complies with tax laws
      4. Regulatory agencies (SEC) need to know if the company is operating withing prescribed rules
      5. Customers need to know if the company will honor product warranties
      6. Labor unions need to know if the company has the ability to pay wages and fringe benefits
      7. Economic planners need to analyze and forecast economic activity
  3. Brief history of accounting
    1. Began with an Italian mathematician
    2. Industrial age (nineteenth century) created the need to report financial information
  4. Distingushing between bookkeeping and accounting
    1. Bookkeeping
      1. Only recording of economic events
    2. Accounting
      1. Identification of economic events
      2. Recording of economic events
      3. Communicating
  5. Accounting and you
    1. Accounting knowledge will be helpful in every field of endeavor
      1. Management: useful accounting information helps make wise decisions
      2. Marketing: useful accounting information helps make profitable sales
      3. Finance: difficult to get a job w/o several accounting courses
  6. The accounting profession
    1. Public accounting
      1. Audit: a certified public accountant (CPA) examines the financial statements of a company and expresses an opinion as to the fairness of the presentation
      2. Tax: tax advice, tax planning, tax preparation
      3. Management consulting: assist companies with their business decisions
    2. Private accounting
      1. Employee of a company
      2. Might do
        • cost accounting
        • budgeting
        • general accounting
        • work with accounting information systems
        • tax accounting
        • internal auditing
    3. Not-for-profit accounting
      1. Charitable organizations such as United Way
      2. Hospitals
      3. Colleges and universities
      4. Independent school districts
      5. Local, state, and federal governmental units

Statistics

Course description: Measures of central tendency and dispersion, sampling, probability, testing of hypothesis, correlation and regression, time series, and index numbers.

Project 1

A three part assignment including a compare and contrast of data sets, scatterplot, box plot, least squares regression, standard deviation, and confidence interval.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project1.pdf861.77 KB

Project 2: Least squares and prediction

Problem 1: Consider the following data set: (20,525) (17,57) (10,19) (9,18) (7,14) (16,41) (3,5) (5,10) (10,23) (12,24) (9,15) (20,571) (18,102) (16,56)

Obtain the least squares line for this data set. Now compute the residuals and make a residual plot. Explain what you see. Now obtain the least squares line for the original x-values, and the log of the y-values. Again obtain the residuals and make a residual plot. Predict the response y at the input level

Problem 2: Now add 20 to the y-value of each point in the original data set. Make the best prediction for the new response at x = 13, and compare your result to that obtained in problem one. How do you think in general adding a constant to the data set will affect the outcome of your predictions?

Problem 3: Have Excel try to calculate Log(-6) and tell me what happens. Now consider the following data set:

(2,4) (1,-3) (17,55) (9,2) (20,283) (16,12) (10,5) (19,175) (11,-5) (2,5) (8,3) (10,4) (15,18) (7,1)

Make your best prediction of the response at the input level of 13.


Problem 1

The least squares line of this data set is: y=23.1x-178.2. The slope is commonly described as rise over run. This means for every 1 unit moved on the X-axis (run), the Y axis moves 23.1 units (rise). The y intercept is the point where the least squares line crosses the Y-axis. The least squares line defines the best fit of the data set; therefore the least squares line can be used to make predictions. The residual values are found by subtracting the predicted values of Y from the observed values of Y.

In the graph of the residual plot of problem 1, there is a definite pattern shown by X values zero though twenty, however the data points at point 20 on the X-axis appear to be outliers from the data set and in turn could be influential observations on the least squares line.

Because the origin of the data is unknown, two explanations of the data are possible. When the original data is plotted on a graph, the X values indeed appear to be influential observations. A lurking variable is likely to exist that explains the appearance of the influential observations.

On the other hand, the residual plot indicates that the data is better explained as exponential rather than linear. For this reason, we need to use the predictions from the log of Y to create a new residual plot.

By calculating the r2 of each residual plot, you can see that the line derived using the log of Y better explains the data that seems to be in an exponential curve. R2 shows what percentage of variability in y is explained by the linear relationship with x. The r2 for the first data set is 0.45 . The r2 for the first data set using log transformation is 0.86. Therefore, you can conclude that the least squares regression line using log transformation better represents the data set of problem one.

At the point X=13 in the first data plot, we predict the Y value at 122.22. In the second plot using the log of Y, the prediction is closer to the actual trend of the points at 43.25.

Problem 2

Because the same integer was added to each of the points on the Y axis, the graph just simply moved up the axis changing the prediction at X=13 to 142.22 on the Y-axis. However, when you base the least squares regression line on log transformation, the slope and intercept may change slightly. This explains why the prediction at X=13 (using log transformation) is 74.6 not 63.25. Although, this prediction is not exactly 20 units higher than the prediction in problem one, it seems acceptable because there is only the small difference of 11.35 units. Knowing what the numbers of the data set represent could help you in deciding how significant this slight difference is.

Problem 3

You cannot take the log of a negative number; therefore, you cannot take the log of any of the negative Y coordinates in the data set as a method of finding a least regression line for an exponential data set. Instead, we must use a similar method as in problem 2 and add an integer (n) to the Y values to make the negative points greater than 0. By adding an integer (n) to all the Y values, the graph moves up along the Y-axis. Once the calculations of slope and intercept have been made from the x and log(Y+n), you may make predictions based on your least square regression line for log(Y+n), which in tum leads to the predictions for Y+n. Then, subtract the integer (n) from the Y+n predictions to obtain the answer. The prediction for the X = 13 of 21.27.

However, you might also notice that neither least regression line we obtained truly fits the data set well according to r squared. When looking at the data set as linear the r squared showed that 45.2% of the variability in y is explained by the linear relationship with x. After considering the data set as exponential by using the log of y, the r squared only rose to 58.7% which is a little better, but this may indicate that there is something hidden among the data set. Therefore, it might be helpful to know what the numbers represent in order to be able to look for what might be causing the problem.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project2.pdf765.9 KB

Project 3

An individual assignment involving a least squares line calculation, slope description, residual plot, r squared, standard deviation of survey data, z score, box plot, and interquartile range.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project3.pdf492.84 KB

Project 4

Group assignment to experiment with skewing parameters to come out with a predetermined outcome. Also includes calculations to use t-scores, z-scores, provide a confidence interval, and analyze the validity of statistics results. A page is missing from the explanation.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project4.pdf204.83 KB

Project 5

A group project involving the analysis of null and alternative hypotheses based on p-values and F distribution.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project5.pdf262.27 KB

Project 6

A group project including the analysis of p-values, confidence intervals, null hypothesis, intercept, and slope.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Project6.pdf383.32 KB

Final exam

The final exam was an individual project. It was a full culmination of calculating least squares regression, slope, residual plots, box plots, testing of the null hypothesis, confidence intervals, standard deviation, z-scores, p-values, t distributions, and data analysis.

AttachmentSize
MATH3353_David_Norman_Final_Project.pdf1.52 MB

PHP projects

For the most part I do PHP scripting in Eclipse with PDT.

I learned PHP by programming a content management system called Thatware (originally ThatPHPware) in 1998. Even though I've abandoned Thatware, it was forked several years ago by Fransico Burzi to create PHP-Nuke and all of it's forks. Naturally, as a novice programmer, Thatware is full of lots of "creative" hacks and duplicated code.

Hobby code

These are projects I worked on for free, in my spare time.

AOL Instant Messenger in TOC

I used some old documentation and some reverse engineering to create a PHP-based AOL instant messenger script for the original TOC protocol. When I showed it to Andrew Heebner (formerly of evilwalrus.com), he added some TOC2 (a revision of the original TOC protocol) functionality and lots of documentation. He called it TAC and we agreed on making it available on the internet under the Artistic License. It was created for beta versions of PHP5.

I also made some of the original TOC1-only script available, as a PHP4 class named AOL_TOC, which is copyrighted by me. It requires PEAR and it's only been tried with PEAR < 1.4.0.

AttachmentSize
TAC.zip70.44 KB
AOL_TOC.zip13.16 KB

Kernel.org network utilization graph copy

This is a PHP implementation of the old network utilization bar on kernel.org. It measures outgoing bandwidth on a /proc based operating system, like Linux.

Change configuration information in daemon.php. Then you might want to move daemon.php to a different directory because it must run all the time to poll the network services. Everything else should work fine if you have GD installed with PHP. Invoke daemon.php like this:

php -q daemon.php &

Be sure to run daemon.php as a user that has permission to write to the netload.inc file.

AttachmentSize
phpnetbar.zip3.19 KB

Lame-O-Nickometer

I made this one night in ##php on Freenode because Philip kept looking up peoples' IRC nicks on a Perl script for a lameness score. Many of the people had especially lame nicks like _-|Sc0rPi0n|-_. I figured why let Perl do all the work when PHP can, so I made the PHP Lame-o-Nickometer.

Also implemented as a Drupal module.

AttachmentSize
nickometer.zip2.9 KB

PHP CPU bar for /proc systems

This is a /proc based CPU utilization script. It is based off the phpcpubar script found on Freshmeat, but I didn't like that it had to use an external C program to get the CPU stats, so I did it in PHP. It doesn't do an instant measure. It's an average over time. There's not really much documentation.

AttachmentSize
phpcpubar.zip1.56 KB

Student housing network access control

This was meant to be a signup form using a command-line program called arping and a ISC dhcpd.leases file on an OpenBSD 3.2 server for authenticating students' computers by MAC address in campus/student housing. Priorities changed and the signup form was postponed indefinitely.

Arping is a program that works with ARP packets on a network to identify the MAC address of an IP. Right now the script essentially parses the dhcpd.leases file to get a MAC address to compare to the arping results. Both would have to match to authenticate the user and put them in the system to have their Cisco switch port activated.

AttachmentSize
arping.zip3.6 KB

Unclog

When the Code Red and Nimda worms were popular on the internet, trying to read my Apache logs was a frustrating process. I created a script to filter the worm attacks out of my Apache logs. When I submitted it to Freshmeat, they rejected it, because it's a small script.

AttachmentSize
unclog.zip1.96 KB

advogato_import Drupal module

I created a Drupal module to import diary entries to a Drupal 4.6.3 website. It uses Advogato's XMLRPC interface to download a specified user's diary entries to a Drupal blog, page, or story module during regular cron jobs. Trying to import over ~20 diary entries at a time can timeout during a regular cron job, even on a fast server, with a big pipe. The unlimited import setting is only intended if you run the cron.php file from a command prompt, in shell script form, rather than as a web file through the documentation recommended wget or lynx initiated cron jobs.

Using the XMLRPC interface turned out to be much easier than figuring out how to account for every little exception when trying to extract from the /person/user/diary.xml XML file. I'm licensing it under the Artistic License, which is under some debate as to whether it is compatible with Drupal's GPL licensing. In either case, non-GPL licenses are generally not welcome in Drupal as a result of some very vocal contributors.

AttachmentSize
advogato_import-4.6.3.tar.gz3.56 KB

urllist for Drupal

This module creates a callback for generating a list of URLs to be submitted to search engines like Yahoo's Submit Your Site at /q=urllist or /urllist with clean URLs. Google has a separate gsitemap module from the Google Summer of Code 2005. Right now urllist only has a basic support to list every published node and log accesses (if the administrator turns logging on).

As soon as I submitted a urllist to Yahoo, I got a hit to load it with a User Agent of "Mozilla/4.05 [en]" from 216.155.200.103. The IP is owned by Yahoo, so I thought it would be interesting to point out the initial hit doesn't appear to come from a User Agent with "Yahoo" in the name.

Potential future features are gz output, turning off certain node types in the list, and the option to override specific nodes being listed. For now, if you use this module, and want to override a specific node, you'd have to use robots.txt to make an exclusion.

Find the urllist module home on drupal.org.

Scripting for hire

I got paid to work on these projects.

Custom CiviCRM 1.4 import script

This script was to import contact and payment data for a client. The $n and $p variables have the column names for the CSV files the data comes from. To protect the client, the contact and payment files arn't included. The sort script is intended to remove duplicate contact information, then import second, from the command line.

AttachmentSize
contacts_sort.php.txt3.19 KB
contacts_import.php.txt30.1 KB

ISACware IMail SMTP access control

IPSwitch IMail 8.1/8.2 SMTP server has an Access Control list option in the SMTP Security tab. They don't have a tool that makes it easy to do bulk importing of IP network blocks. To make matters worse, the file where the Access Control option stores addresses is in a binary format, as smtpd32.acc, making it nearly impossible to just edit manually.

This script uses documentation from IPSwitch to generate a new smtpd32.acc file for your installation of IMail 8.1 in the proper format from the popular email blacklist sites, Okean and Blackholes.us. You could also create your own custom list of network blocks to enter into a custom smtpd32.acc file if you put it in either the Okean or Blackholes.us file format. Simply use this script to generate a new smtpd32.acc file, place it in the main IMail installation directory (C:\IMail for a default IMail installation), and restart your SMTP service.

PHP required.

AttachmentSize
ISACware_2.0.zip197.58 KB

Timeshare For Sale By Owner

Timeshare For Sale By Owner is a company in Orlando, FL that helps timeshare owners resell or lease timeshares and points. It's largely a cold-calling, telemarketing business. They had a Microsoft Access database they used to keep track of several thousand sales and customers. I was hired to convert their Access database to a LAMP platform. The conversion script is available, but the rest is left out to protect the client's information and processes.

This is the first time I used COM and Microsoft Jet in PHP. The script does several million loops during its execution and sucks up a lot of memory. If this script were used for more than a single one-time conversion, it could do with a bit of optimizing.

I heard a rumor, after I left, their regular tech guy denormalized the database structure I created because he didn't like table join queries, so the script is probably no longer representative of what they're using now.

AttachmentSize
TFSBO_convert.zip25.85 KB

myBackware

These scripts were developed to create SQL dump files for basic disaster recovery of small MySQL installations. They are capable of creating local, compressed snapshots and/or mail a copy of the SQL dump to a remote email server in a compressed, GPG (public key encryption) format.

Software development for version 1.0 was sponsored by Advanced Automation Inc.

AttachmentSize
myBackware_1.0b1.zip28.94 KB
myBackware_1.0b1.tar.gz26.79 KB
myBackware_1.0b1.tar.bz218.34 KB

OpenBSD

When I lived in student housing, I had a 486 as a firewall to my computers. The most stable operating system I found for it was OpenBSD. I actually had an uptime on one installation of it for something like 320 days before the power went out. As I played with versions from OpenBSD 2.9 to 3.4, I documented a lot of the stuff I learned and the configurations I made. When I worked at The University of Texas at Tyler, I was even able to setup an OpenBSD machine to firewall for one of the computer labs. The operating system was more dependable than the hardware it was installed on.

AttachmentSize
dummyidentd.html3.22 KB
kernel_config.html4.2 KB
setup.html6.56 KB
dummyidentd.txt1.04 KB
TUNED292.34 KB
TUNED313.71 KB

Auto-start MySQL in OpenBSD 3.2

Problem
I got MySQL to install from the pre-packaged .tgz files OpenBSD provides using pkg_add, but I couldn't figure out how to get it to automatically start.

Get MySQL
You'll want Mysql-server-**.tgz from a openbsd ftp server or your official CD.

    #: pkg_add Mysql*

Changing Files
Check /etc/rc.conf to make sure that the following line is at the bottom:

local_rcconf="/etc/rc.conf.local"

If it doesn't exist, create /etc/rc.conf.local and add:


mysql=YES

Then:

    #: chmod 755 /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server

Then add this to /etc/rc.local:

if [ X"${mysql}" == X"YES" -a -x /usr/local/bin/safe_mysqld ]; then
	echo -n " mysqld"; /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server start
fi

reboot

Cisco Aironet and OpenBSD 3.1

Objective
I decided to get a wireless network card for my OpenBSD machine instead of buying an access point. Having an access point just seems limiting to me. I decided to is get a wireless PCI card so I can just add it to the existing machine I have doing packet filtering with PF and NAT for my internal network on my cable modem. This would give me one hard-wire interface connected to my cable modem, one hard-wire interface to a hub, and one wireless card in the gateway machine.

The Part
Cisco Aironet 352 PCI adapter with the pcmcia card built in from ebay.

Kernel Configuration

I have a custom built kernel in OpenBSD 3.1, so I had to go back to my kernel configuration file, add the following line, and recompile:

    an*     at pci? dev ? function ?        # Aironet IEEE 802.11DS

If you have a laptop and just the pcmcia card, you should probably use:

    an*     at pcmcia? function ?           # Aironet IEEE 802.11DS

If you are running the kernel that came with the default installation of OpenBSD, you don't need to worry about adding an* because it is there already.

The Utility

OpenBSD already has the utilities to configure the computer, in this case, you need ancontrol. For wireless cards made by people other than Cisco, you'll probably need wicontrol and this page won't help you much because it uses different configuration options.

Setup

    Device txp0:

    • 3com 990 PCI with 3xp processor 10/100mbit
    • IP: 66.xx.xx.xx
    • Goes right to the cable modem

    Device ep1:

    • Old 3c509 ISA card 10mbit
    • IP: 192.168.0.1
    • Goes to hub

    Device an0:

    • Cisco 352 Aironet Wireless PCI
    • IP: 192.168.1.1
    • Acting as access point for my laptop

You'll need to add a file to /etc to give your wireless device an IP and subnet assignment:

    echo "inet 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 NONE" > /etc/hostname.an0

DHCPd
I also want to run DHCP on both devices ep1 and an0. That way when I take my laptop back and forth from home, I don't have to set a static IP. DHCP just makes things easier. I statically assign my IPs so when I need to ssh or scp into another machine, I don't have to hunt around.

In the case of the wireless device, I only want to assign a DHCP address for my laptop. I live in an apartment complex and don't want just anyone using my bandwidth. The other issue I have is that if I want to dish out IPs for two different devices, I have to have a special configuration in /etc/dhcpd.conf.

Edit /etc/dhcpd.interfaces so that it has both your hard-wire and wireless interfaces. Mine says:

ep1
an0

Edit /etc/dhcpd.conf to add another network. Mine says:


shared-network LOCAL-NET {
	option  domain-name "goodmeat.net";
	option  domain-name-servers 204.145.251.1, 205.128.118.1, 205.128.118.2, 4.2.2.2, 4.2.2.3, 128.83.185.40;

	# this is wireless
	subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
		option routers 192.168.1.1;

		host laptop {
			hardware ethernet 00:14:3A:56:6A:D8;
			fixed-address 192.168.1.2;
			option host-name "laptop";
		}
	}
}

shared-network LOCAL-NET2 {
	option	domain-name "goodmeat.net";
	option	domain-name-servers 204.145.251.1, 4.2.2.2, 205.218.118.1, 208.180.0.2, 206.76.228.23, 128.83.185.40;	

	# this is hard-wired
	subnet 192.168.0.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
		option routers 192.168.0.1;

		range 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.155;

		host mariann {
			hardware ethernet 00:B0:F2:54:CA:D6;
			fixed-address 192.168.0.3;
			option host-name "mariann";
		}
		host oats {
			hardware ethernet 00:A3:D2:34:AC:E8;
			fixed-address 192.168.0.2;
			option host-name "oats";
		}
		host bogus {
			hardware ethernet 00:A0:F6:59:CD:D6;
			fixed-address 192.168.0.4;
			option host-name "bogus";
		}
	}
}

Notice the hard-wired network allows additional IPs to be assigned other than those which I have assigned statically. The wireless configuration only knows to allow one specific MAC to have an IP. This can easily be circumvented by having someone set their machine to 192.168.1.3 statically and use 192.168.1.1 as the gateway. The average person isn't smart enough to figure that out, so I'm not too worried about bandwidth leeches.

If you've been following along and haven't rebooted yet, now is probably a good time.

Using ancontrol
By default, your card will work in infrastructure mode. That's not what you want. You need ad-hoc, which means if it doesn't find an access point in the area, it declares itself to be an access point.

You will need the MAC address of your wireless card. Get it by doing:

    ancontrol -S

These options will give the most basic operation for your card to be an access point:

    ancontrol -n OpenBSD
    ancontrol -m (the MAC you got from -S here)
    ancontrol -l OpenBSD
    ancontrol -o 0

I am not going to explain what those do because now is a good time for you to read the ancontrol man page, just so you're clear about what's going on. It's wasteful of my time to rewrite the manual.

It might be a good idea to make a script out of it so you don't have to type it on every boot:

    #!/bin/sh

    ancontrol -n OpenBSD
    ancontrol -m xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
    ancontrol -l OpenBSD
    ancontrol -o 0

That last line spoken is -lowercase oh space zero.

Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)
WEP isn't secure, but it's better than broadcasting all your traffic to the neighborhood in plaintext. From ancontrol(8):

WEP ("wired equivalent privacy") is based on the RC4 algorithm, using a
24 bit initialization vector.

RC4 is supposedly vulnerable to certain known plaintext attacks,
especially with 40 bit keys. So the security of WEP in part depends on how
much known plaintext is transmitted.

You should look for a IPSEC or SSH tunneling tutorial now if you want some proven security over wireless.

To get WEP enabled with ancontrol, you'll need three more commands. If you live in the US and have a nice encryption limit on your card (128 bit), then you'll want to use a long key, 26 hex characters (0-9, a-f, and A-F), otherwise you use 10 hex characters. Both are prefixed by a 0x (zero ex).

You can set up to 8 keys total, 4 temporary, 4 permanent. See ancontrol(8). The first example is 128 bit, but be smart and pick a more random combination of numbers and letters:


    ancontrol -v 0 -k 0x1234567890abcdefABCDEF1234
    ancontrol -e 0
    ancontrol -W 1

A 40 bit example would look something like:

    ancontrol -v 0 -k 0x1e3a5f7890
    ancontrol -e 0
    ancontrol -W 1

NAT
Now just make sure you have a line like this in your /etc/nat.conf:


    nat on txp0 from 192.168.0.0/16 from all -> txp0

That should cover both hard-wired and wireless subnets.

WEP on client WinXP laptop
Go to connection properties for the wireless adapter. Click the wireless networks tab. Click the OpenBSD connection. If it is configured in the bottom window already, click properties for that one. WinXP won't like if you try to configure the existing network from the top window. Click the "Data Encryption (WEP Enabled)" checkbox. Enter the key in the Network Key input field without the 0x prefix, for a total of 26 letters and numbers. Make sure Hexidecimal Digits is selected for key format. The key index, if you used this example is 0 (zero). Click OK to save the settings and then WinXP will reconnect to the gateway.

Additional Resources
Cisco - Configuring Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP)

Create OpenBSD and Slackware ISOs

Some people try to hate Microsoft and pretend their operating systems and software don't exist. If you're like me, you've still got at least one machine with Windows still on it, whether you paid for Windows or pirated it from someone else.

Problem
I spend most of my time in Windows for work. I downloaded OpenBSD 3.2-beta, but I didn't want to make a boot floppy disk. I have plenty of CD-Rs and 3 burners, all attached to Windows machines. How am I going to make a bootable OpenBSD CD so I can have something to play with until I can order the official 3.2 release CD?

Solution
Believe it or not, making a bootable ISO in Windows is exactly the same as in Linux or BSD, thanks to official Windows ports of mkisofs. Just grab a copy of cdrtools from the official cdrecord website or the download directory on this server..

I extracted the cdrtools files to c:\cdrtools.

Then I moved the directories I wanted to burn to CD to c:\openbsd creating a structure like the following:

c:\openbsd
    3.2/
        ftplist
        ports.tar.gz
        I386/
            base32.tgz
            bsd
            bsd.rd
            cdrom32.fs
            CKSUM
            comp32.tgz
            etc32.tgz
            floppy32.fs
            ...

Then here's what you need to do to make the ISO file:

Start menu > Run...
(run `command` for Win95\98\ME or `cmd` for NT\2k\XP)

cd c:\
cd openbsd
c:\cdrtools\mkisofs
    -v
    -r
    -T
    -l
    -L
    -J
    -V "OpenBSD3.2-beta"
    -b 3.2/I386/cdrom32.fs
    -c boot.catalog
    -o c:/OpenBSD3.2-beta.iso
    -A "OpenBSD 3.2-beta Install"
    .

The period at the end is necessary.

When the ISO is done, I use Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 to burn it. If you don't have it, cdrecord is in the cdrtools distribution. I haven't tried it, but mkisofs works, so cdrecord probably does too.

Another Example

For linux, I like Slackware. The process is almost the same, except the boot image for slackware has special needs (see README in isolinux). I downloaded Slackware 9.0 beta from slackware-current and wanted a bootable CD. Here's my directory layout:

c:\slack
    bootdisks/
        adaptec.s
        bare.i
        ibmmca.s
        jfs.s
        ...
    BOOTING.TXT
    Changelog.txt
    CHECKSUMS
    CHECKSUMS.md5
    COPYING
    COPYRIGHT.TXT
    CRYPTO_NOTICE.TXT
    CURRENT.WARNING
    FAQ.TXT
    FILELIST.TXT
    isolinux/
        f2.txt
        f3.txt
        initrd.img
        iso.sort
        ...
    kernels/
        adaptec.s/
        bare.i/
        ibmmca.s/
        ...
    PACKAGES.TXT
    PRERELEASE_NOTES
    README81.TXT
    rootdisks/
        install.1
        install.2
        install.3
        ...
    slackware/
        a/
        ap/
        d/
        e/
        f/
        gnome/
        k/
        l/
        n/
        t/
        tcl/
        x/
        xap/
        y/
        CHECKSUMS
        CHECKSUMS.md5
        FILE_LIST
        MANIFEST.gz
        README.TXT
    Slackware-HOWTO
    SPEAK_INSTALL.TXT
    SPEAKUP_DOCS.TXT
    UPGRADE.TXT

I didn't list kde and kdei in the slackware directory on purpose. You can't fit all of Slackware on one CD, so I removed KDE since I prefer Gnome.

Start menu > Run...
(run `command` for Win95\98\ME or `cmd` for NT\2k\XP)

cd c:\
cd slack
c:\cdrtools\mkisofs
    -R
    -J
    -v
    -T
    -d
    -N
    -l
    -L
    -o c:/slackware9.0.iso
    -V "Slackware Install"
    -hide-rr-moved
    -no-emul-boot
    -boot-load-size 32
    -boot-info-table
    -sort isolinux/iso.sort
    -b isolinux/isolinux.bin
    -c isolinux.isolinux.boot
    -A "Slackware Install CD"
    .

or if you were to burn Harry Potter, you might do this:

K:\audio\audiobooks\J. K. Rowling - Harry Potter And The Half-Blood Prince>c:\cd
rtools\mkisofs -R -J -v -T -d -N -l -L -o c:/hphbp.iso -V "Half-Blood Prince" -h
ide-rr-moved -A "J. K. Rowling - Harry Potter And The Half-Blood Prince" .
Warning: creating filesystem that does not conform to ISO-9660.
mkisofs 1.15a12 (i586-pc-cygwin)
Scanning .
  1.96% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:58 2005
  3.91% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:32 2005
  5.87% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:41 2005
  7.83% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:45 2005
  9.78% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:47 2005
11.74% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:41 2005
13.69% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:43 2005
15.65% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:38 2005
17.61% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:41 2005
19.57% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:42 2005
21.52% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:39 2005
23.48% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
25.43% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:38 2005
27.39% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
29.35% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:37 2005
31.30% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:38 2005
33.26% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:40 2005
35.21% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:38 2005
37.17% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
39.12% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:37 2005
41.08% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
43.03% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:37 2005
44.99% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
46.95% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
48.90% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
50.86% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
52.81% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
54.78% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:36 2005
56.73% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
58.68% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
60.64% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
62.60% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
64.55% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
66.51% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
68.47% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
70.42% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
72.38% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
74.33% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
76.29% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
78.25% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
80.20% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
82.16% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
84.11% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
86.07% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
88.03% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
89.98% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
91.94% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
93.90% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
95.85% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
97.80% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:34 2005
99.76% done, estimate finish Fri Dec  2 21:45:35 2005
Total translation table size: 18022
Total rockridge attributes bytes: 24032
Total directory bytes: 38008
Path table size(bytes): 10
Max brk space used 2e000
255616 extents written (499 Mb)

DHCPd on OpenBSD 2.9

I wanted to set up a DHCP server for my network so that I didn't have to manually configure the IPs of each of my machines. Now if I want to change any of the IPs on my network I do it at the server and I can look it up in the configuration file to see if I forget what IP goes to what machine (but that hasn't happened yet).

Running a DHCP server with OpenBSD is really quite simple since it is installed already. All you have to do to turn it on is edit /etc/rc.conf and change dhcpd_flags to "-q" (then I rebooted since I was too lazy to look up the commandline needed to do it without rebooting).

You probably only want to answer to computers on your lan. Answering for your ISP might get you in some trouble. So edit your /etc/dhcpd.conf file. Below is mine with the MAC addresses xx'd out just in case. Note the internal IP address of the OpenBSD box is 192.168.0.1. It is giving specific "static" addresses to the machines where I have specified MAC addresses of NICs and for everything else, they get something between 192.168.0.100 and 192.168.0.155.

The domain-name-servers line has DNS servers for two different ISPs in Texas. You'll probably want to change those if you can find IP addresses of your own.

The DHCP server will assign names to the "static" machines which will probably be added to /etc/hosts and/or BIND later for internal resolution, but I havn't gotten around to doing that yet. You can see the MAC addresses for your NIC(s) in *nix by typing ifconfig or by going to start menu->run->winipcfg and selecting your NIC.

Be sure to edit your /etc/dhcpd.interfaces file so that you only serve IP addresses to the NIC on your LAN and another NIC (like the NIC for your cable modem). My file simply has x10 in it as the interface to my 3com905a NIC.

shared-network LOCAL-NET {
# option default-lease-time 3600;
# option max-lease-time 86400;
option  domain-name "goodmeat.net";
option  domain-name-servers 204.145.251.1, 205.128.118.1, 205.128.118.2;

subnet 192.168.0.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
option routers 192.168.0.1;

range 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.155;

host windows {
hardware ethernet 00:00:00:00:00:00;
fixed-address 192.168.0.4;
option host-name "windows";
}
host duron {
hardware ethernet 00:00:00:00:00:00;
fixed-address 192.168.0.2;
option host-name "duron";
}
host valinux {
hardware ethernet 00:00:00:00:00:00;
fixed-address 192.168.0.3;
option host-name "valinux";
}
host dell {
hardware ethernet 00:00:00:00:00:00;
fixed-address 192.168.0.6;
option host-name "dell";
}
}
}

Firewall with IDS in OpenBSD 3.2

Problem
Create an invisible firewall.

Solution
OpenBSD and its packet filter are free and have a good history of tight security.

Introduction

    Difference in OpenBSD releases

    PF in OpenBSD has gone through a history of changes. OpenBSD through version 2.9 had IPF, written by Darren Reed. One day Darren made some confusion on the OpenBSD mailing lists about the licensing of his IPF software in operating systems. The OpenBSD authors didn't like it and someone decided they would make their own packet filter, just for OpenBSD. The packet filter candidate from Daniel Hartmeier was released on http://www.benzedrine.cx/pf.html and was accepted by the core developers into the OpenBSD kernel. The official release of PF was in OpenBSD 3.0. Between the 3.0 release and 3.2, PF stayed relatively unchanged.

    The addition of PF made the rulesets from IPF incompatible with those from IPF. In other words, rules from OpenBSD 2.9 or before won't work with PF on a OpenBSD 3.0 or newer machine. Also note that PF started getting a large clump of changes in OpenBSD 3.3, where the kernel developers decided to merge ALTQ (traffic shaping) and PF so the packet filter could also do traffic shaping. I'd link to ALTQ docs, but by the time I wrote this, they had already started being merged in the snapshot sources of OpenBSD with the PF documentation.

Preparation

    Methods

    There are two ways you can get an install started, by CD or Floppy. I'll assume that since you're using OpenBSD, you want something free, so that rules out the possibility that you bought a OpenBSD release CD from the website, even though you should have.

    Floppy Method

    Download rawrite. The link, unless dead, should go to a rawrite for windows that has a GUI. All other versions you'll find on the internet work with a DOS prompt. Whether from a DOS window or a GUI, you'll need a copy of rawrite to write a copy of the boot image (OpenBSD 3.2 link) to a floppy disk. Open rawrite and write the floppy32.fs file to the floppy disk.

    Notice other releases will have floppy image filenames that match the version release. For example, OpenBSD 3.3 will have a floppy33.fs.

    The aforesaid will cover most hardware configurations. If you know you have some weird hardware in the machine you're going to be installing OpenBSD on, there are actually two other floppy images with different hardware support. From the documentation:

    • floppy32.fs (Desktop PC) supports many PCI and ISA NICs, IDE and simple SCSI adapters and some PCMCIA support.
    • floppyB32.fs (Servers) supports many RAID controllers, and some of the less common SCSI adapters. However, support for many standard SCSI adapters and many EISA and ISA NICS has been removed.
    • floppyC32.fs (Laptops) supports the Cardbus and PCMCIA devices found in many laptops.

    In almost all cases, you'll want the link above.

    CD-R(W) method

    This method will require you to download the install files before installation. Using Bulletproof FTP or CuteFTP might be a good idea here. What you will want is to create a directory called "3.2", or whatever version number you download and go to the version directory for that release of OpenBSD. For version 3.2, that would be ftp://ftp.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/3.2/. Don't forget OpenBSD has many FTP mirrors such as ftp://ftp.usa.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/3.2/

    Here is the directory structure of the files you need to download.
      c:\openbsd
        3.2/
        	ANNOUNCEMENT
            ftplist
            ports.tar.gz
            HARDWARE
            PACKAGES
            i386/
                base32.tgz
                bsd
                bsd.rd
                cdrom32.fs
                CKSUM
                comp32.tgz
                etc32.tgz
                floppy32.fs
                floppyB32.fs
                floppyC32.fs
                game32.tgz
                index.txt
                install.ata
                install.chs
                install.dbr
                install.i386
                install.linux
                install.mbr
                install.os2br
                install.pt
                man32.tgz
                MD5
                misc32.tgz
                xbase32.tgz
                xfont32.tgz
                xserv32.tgz
                xshare32.tgz
            PORTS
            README
            src.tar.gz
            srcsys.tar.gz
      
    Again, note that if you are installing OpenBSD 3.3 or newer, the filenames won't end with 32, but rather 33 or 34, and so on.

    The same tools that you can use on Linux or BSD are available in Windows to make ISO files. OpenBSD doesn't release ISO files to OpenBSD because they need CD sales to support the full time developers. Thanks to official Windows ports of
    mkisofs
    , just grab a copy of cdrtools from the official cdrecord website. Sometimes the windows binaries of cdrtools get moved on the ftp server, so you might have to hunt around.

    Extract the cdrtools files to
    c:\cdrtools
    .

    Then here's what you need to do to make the ISO file:
      Start menu > Run...
      (run `command` for Win95\98\ME or `cmd` for NT\2k\XP)
    
      cd c:\
      cd openbsd
      c:\cdrtools\mkisofs
        -v
        -r
        -T
        -l
        -L
        -J
        -V "OpenBSD3.2"
        -b 3.2/I386/cdrom32.fs
        -c boot.catalog
        -o c:/OpenBSD3.2.iso
        -A "OpenBSD 3.2 Install"
        .
      
    The period at the end is necessary.

    When the ISO is done, use Roxio Easy CD Creator 5 or your favorite burning program to burn it. If you don't have it, cdrecord is in the cdrtools distribution. I haven't tried it, but mkisofs works, so cdrecord probably does too. Documentation is all over the internet for cdrecord.

Install OpenBSD

    From here, it is only better to refer you to the official installation document. It is well written and should get you through the installation process, whether you bought a CD, created one, or made a floppy.

    Install Notes

    • If you did the floppy install, during the install, you'll have the option to get the installation files from FTP and that is what you will do.
    • To make an invisible firewall, you might ask yourself how it will be invisible if you have to configure a network device during the install. Don't worry about that now. Configure a device because we will need it both to grab operating system updates and to have an interface to use to get updates later if needed. You should have three interfaces in your machine for this document. Two will be invisible, and one will be for administration. Just configure one device during install, and leave the other two alone. If you want to configure all of them, you can do that too, because later, they will just be re-configured to be invisible.
    • However you partition your drive, it is a good idea to leave 2gb for the
      /usr
      partition.
    • When you're done with the install, type "reboot".
    • When the system comes back up to a login prompt, the administrator account is "root" and the password is whatever you set during the installation.
    • Configuring your machine with DHCP will be fine for the start. Later in this document will be instructions on how to set a static IP address. If you already know what static IP address you will use, go ahead and set it.
    • The network interface cards in the machine are numbered. For example, the a 3com NIC will use the
      xl
      kernel driver. The card furthest from the CPU is card 0, and each card closer increments by one, so if you have 4 NICs, the one closest to the CPU would be xl3.
    • This tutorial assumes you use 3com 905 NIC. Other network cards will have other kernel driver names in the kernel. When you start up your system, you can do
      
                # dmesg > dmesg
                # grep -e "..:..:..:..:.." dmesg
                # rm dmesg
               
      and the resulting lines should show the NICs, starting with the kernel driver and ending with the adapter MAC address.
    • If you're a Windows user and don't have much experience with BSD or Linux, creating a swap partition is mandatory. It is where all the extra memory processes go when you run out of RAM and is the equivalent of the Windows pagefile. Making it at least twice the size of the amount of space you have in RAM is good.

Update to -stable

    Why, why and where

    Although OpenBSD has a better than average record of remote and local security vulnerabilities, sometimes someone still discovers a flaw. The OpenBSD errata page is usually updated with patches for vulnerabilities or stability flaws. For purposes of explaining how to do an operating system upgrade, we'll skip the method that would use the src.tar.gz and srcsys.tar.gz files from the OpenBSD install tree. If you want to use the src.tar.gz and srcsys.tar.gz files, the patch branches page provides some information and links to get started in that direction.

    Method 1a: Installing kernel and system binary sources from CD

    If you have the official CD, you will only have one src.tar.gz file which contains srcsys.tar.gz.
       # mkdir /usr/src
       # mount /dev/cd0a /mnt
       # cd /mnt
       # cp src.tar.gz srcsys.tar.gz /usr/src
       # cd /usr/src
       # tar -xzf src.tar.gz
       # tar -xzf srcsys.tar.gz
    

    Method 2a: Installing kernel and system binary sources from FTP

    If you have src.tar.gz and srcsys.tar.gz
       # mkdir /usr/src
       # mount /dev/cd0a /mnt
       # cd /mnt
       # cp src.tar.gz srcsys.tar.gz /usr/src
       # cd /usr/src
       # tar -xzf src.tar.gz
       # tar -xzf srcsys.tar.gz
    

    Parts 1b and 2b: Updating kernel and system binary sources from CVS

    You must update your kernel and system sources if you installed them from the release tar files to patch security holes and fix reliability problems.
       # cd /usr
       # cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs -q up -rOPENBSD_3_2 -Pd src
      
    During this process, it might look like your system stalled out downloading updates. Most likely it hasn't. The CVS process must still check each file in the source tree to make sure it matches the server. By doing the tar file first and then CVS, you save having to download each individual file and instead just check against a CVS version number. Files that have security updates will have a newer CVS version than the copy on your machine. When the cvs command sees the version difference, it will patch the file on your system to match the one on the server.

    Method 3: Downloading kernel and system binary sources from CVS

    Don't do this step if you already did the stuff above with the tar files. This method will download the contents of src.tar.gz and srcsys.tar.gz and put them in /usr/src for you complete with up-to-date patches.
       # cd /usr
       # cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs -q get -rOPENBSD_3_2 -P src
      
    Say yes when it wants to confirm the SSH fingerprint. Note the OPENBSD_3_2 corresponds to the version number. OpenBSD 3.0 would have OPENBSD_3_0 for downloading the stable kernel source. Downloading with CVS will take a while, so while you wait, you can get started on downloading ports.

    Try hitting
    CTRL+ALT+F2
    . You didn't just log out, you switched to another console. Log in again on the second console. You can switch back to the original console by hitting
    CTRL+ALT+F1
    . You can use consoles with the F1, F2, F3, F4, and F6 keys. The other function keys are reserved by the operating system for other background tasks. Now you can multitask.

Install Ports

    What are they?

    Ports are specially packaged software editions for OpenBSD. They are maintained especially for OpenBSD and available from most OpenBSD regional mirrors. Often ports are created when software packages don't compile by default on OpenBSD. The port maintainers massage the source code of the software to make it work with OpenBSD. In some cases, they even make security audits to make the source more secure.

    Method 1: Downloading ports from CVS

    If you're already downloading the kernel and system sources, don't forget you can hit
    CTRL+ALT+F2
    and download ports in the second terminal.
    
       # cd /usr
       # setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs
       # cvs -d $CVSROOT -q get -rOPENBSD_3_2 -P ports
    
    It is also possible to download ports that correspond to the major OpenBSD version release. In most cases, there is no reason to do so because the most recent imports to the CVS server will likely have security updates to software packages since the major release of OpenBSD, therefore the
    -rOPENBSD_3_2
    option was left off of the example.

    Even if you're on a T1, downloading sources and ports will take a while. Get up and strech. Get something to drink. Go to the bathroom. Make some phone calls. Check your email. You're cheering for src to finish first because that's what you'll need to work with first.

    Method 2: Install ports from CD

    This is often the choice if you already have ports.tar.gz downloaded and don't want to wait for it again. If you have the official CD from openbsd.org, ports.tar.gz is on the last CD. If you created your own cd, you know where it is.
    
       # mount /dev/cd0a /mnt
       # cd /mnt/3.2
       # cp ports.tar.gz /usr
       # cd /usr
       # tar -xzf ports.tar.gz
    

    Method 3: Ports from FTP

       # cd /usr
       # lynx ftp://ftp.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/3.2/ports.tar.gz
       # tar -xzf ports.tar.gz
    
    lynx will ask you some questions. The sequence of answers is 'D' for download, '[enter]' to save to disk, '[enter]' again to accept the default filename, 'q' to quit, and 'y' to say you really want to quit.

    Updating packages

    No matter which method you used to istall, there are some packages you will probably want to update individually. Since the OpenBSD 3.2 release, MySQL has has some security patch releases and Snort has had a new release with a newer rule parsing method. If you already set the CVSROOT and haven't rebooted, you don't have to set it again until you reboot.
       # cd /usr
       # setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs
       # cvs -d $CVSROOT -q up -Pd ports/net/snort
       # cvs -d $CVSROOT -q up -Pd ports/databases/mysql
    

Updating the system kernel, binaries, and libraries

    You need to update the system kernel. Don't skip this part. You need to compile your updated kernel source and compile your system binaries and libraries again before moving on. Don't skip steps. Why? Any programs from this point that you compile against security vulnerable kernel hooks or system libraries could have the vulnerabilities linger even after you compile a new kernel, binaries, and libraries. Compile the kernel, reboot, and recompile the system files.

    Compile a new kernel

       # cd /usr/src/sys/arch/i386/conf
       # config GENERIC
       # cd ../compile/GENERIC
       # make depend && make
          (this step will take a while)
       # cp /bsd /bsd.old
       # cp bsd /
    
    Then reboot. You must reboot before moving on to make use of the newly patched kernel.
       # shutdown -r now
    
    
    The -r is for reboot. If you want to shutdown a machine, use -h for halt.

    Compile new system files (binaries and libraries)

        # cd /usr/src
        # rm -r /usr/obj/*
        # make obj && make build
    
    You're recompiling everything installed on your system except your kernel, which you already did. This process will take a long time on an old machine. Rebooting when you're done isn't mandatory, but you should do it for good measure.

Download, compile, and install software from ports

The cool thing about using ports is that with one command, all the downloading, compiling, patching, installing, and cleanup is done with one command and is specifically tailored for OpenBSD. If you watch the installation, it also downloads all the libraries and dependencies that the programs you're installing might have.

    Installing text editor (nano)

    OpenBSD, and most other BSD and Linux operating systems come with VI as their default editor, however VI has a big learning curve. If you're feeling confident with your Google skills, learning VI will benefit you in the long run.

    Since VI has a big learning curve and you probably just want to get the system up, nano is a much simpler text editor which will give you the basic file editing funcitonality you'll need to get the job done.
       # cd /usr/ports/editors/nano
       # make install clean
    
    OpenBSD won't pick up the nano installation right away. It is not in the path. What that means is until you restart, you'll have to type the full path to the nano executable. You make the choice. Reboot or just type the full file path until the next reboot. You won't have to edit files for a bit, so it can wait.

    Compile and install Snort

    The snort intrusion detection system is available in ports. Here we will be adding a "FLAVOR" to the snort installation which changes the default install options. Normally snort writes all the intrusion hits to files, but we're going to want them stored in a MySQL database. If you're curious about the options available for snort install, you can do this:
       # cd /usr/ports/net/snort
       # make show VARNAME=FLAVORS
    
    
    The documentation for snort will explain better what each option does. This is merely an installation guide. For the purposes of this installation, do the following:
       # cd /usr/ports/net/snort
       # env FLAVOR="mysql flexresp" make install
    
    If you sit and watch the installation process, you will notice that MySQL will also automagicly download, get patched, configure, compile, and install. For your information, since the OpenBSD 3.2 release, MySQL has released new versions of MySQL that fix security vulnerabilties. This should not be a problem for an invisible firewall because nobody should have rights to either use the MySQL console client or connect to the MySQL socket. This will be discussed later in this paper.

    Install PHP

    If you are experienced with using the FLAVORS environment variable, you can alter the PHP install to cut install time. An example FLAVOR is shown. It excludes most of the extensions from the PHP install so you have a shorter install time and don't install a lot of software you won't use.
       # cd /usr/ports/graphics/jpeg
       # make install clean
       # cd /usr/ports/graphics/gd
       # make install clean
       # cd /usr/ports/www/php4/core
       # make install clean
       # /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -s
       # cp /usr/local/share/doc/php4/php.ini-recommended /var/www/conf/php.ini
       # cd ../extensions
       # env FLAVOR="no_x11 no_bz2 no_curl no_dba no_dbase no_domxml no_filepro \
        no_gmp no_imap no_ldap no_mcrypt no_mhash no_ncurses no_odbc no_pdf \
        no_pgsql no_shmop no_snmp no_sybase_ct no_xml no_xslt" make install clean
       # cd ../pear
       # make install clean
    
    As you can see, we're leaving out a lot of the functions of PHP, but we don't need them. All that should be left are the MySQL database and GD graphic library extensions. You still need to actually install them:
       # cd /usr/ports/packages/i386/www
       # pkg_add php4-mysql*
       # /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -a mysql
       # pkg_add php4-gd*
       # /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -a gd
    

Configure PHP

Now configure Apache to parse files ending with ".php" using the PHP extension.
   # cd /var/www/conf
   # /usr/local/bin/nano httpd.conf
If you have rebooted your machine since you installed nano, you can do this:
   # cd /var/www/conf
   # nano httpd.conf
Use the CTRL+W function to find "index.html". Add index.php and index.php3 to the DirectoryIndex line to make it look like:
  #
  # DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written html
  # directory index. Separate multiple entries with spaces.
  #
  DirectoryIndex index.php index.html index.php3
Then use the CTRL+W function to find "x-httpd-php". You'll need to uncomment the two lines it finds and alter them. They should look like:
  # For example, the PHP3 module (not part of the Apache distribution)
  # will typically use:
  #
  AddType application/x-httpd-php .php .php3 .phtml
  AddType application/x-httpd-php-source .phps
If you can't find those lines in your httpd.conf file, look harder or just add the lines as you see them above. If there are other file extensions you want to be parsed by the PHP engine, you can add them to the first AddType line too if you want. Some people add .html to obscure the engines running their website. This can be inefficient if you also have a many regular html files that do not contain PHP which will require PHP to examine the files anyway.

Save your httpd.conf with CTRL+X and follow the prompts.

Now it might be nice to test your PHP installation. I delete all the default Apache documents in the web root directory. You can skip that if you want.

   # cd /var/www/htdocs
   # rm -fr *
   # /usr/local/bin/nano phpinfo.php
You're creating a file named phpinfo.php. In it, you want to put:
<?php phpinfo(); ?>
Save it and test it:
   # apachectl start
   # lynx localhost/phpinfo.php
If you see a page that has a bunch of information about PHP, all went well. If you see just phpinfo(); then you messed up somewhere. Go back and make sure you did everything. This won't prevent you from installing Snort, but it will definately keep ACID from working, which is one of the best Snort log HTTP-based viewers.

Setup Apache SSL

OpenBSD ships with an SSL-ready httpd and RSA libraries. For use with httpd(8), you must first have a certificate created. This will be kept in /etc/ssl/ with the corresponding key in /etc/ssl/private/. The steps shown here are taken in part from the ssl(8) man page. Refer to it for further information. This FAQ entry only outlines how to create an RSA certificate for web servers, not a DSA server certificate. To find out how to do so, please refer to the ssl(8) man page.

To start off, you need to create your server key and certificate using OpenSSL:
   # openssl genrsa -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 1024
The next step is to generate a Certificate Signing Request which is used to get a Certifying Authority (CA) to sign your certificate. To do this use the command:


   # openssl req -new -key /etc/ssl/private/server.key -out /etc/ssl/private/server.csr
This server.csr file can then be given to Certifying Authority who will sign the key. One such CA is Thawte Certification which you can reach at http://www.thawte.com/. Thawte can currently sign RSA keys for you. A procedure is being worked out to allow for DSA keys.

If you cannot afford this, or just want to sign the certificate yourself, you can use the following.

   # openssl x509 -req -days 365 -in /etc/ssl/private/server.csr \
        -signkey /etc/ssl/private/server.key -out /etc/ssl/server.crt
With /etc/ssl/server.crt and /etc/ssl/private/server.key in place, you should be able to start httpd(8) with the -DSSL flag (see the section about rc(8) in this faq), enabling https transactions with your machine on port 443.

See 10.7

Start Apache on boot

   # cd /etc
   # /usr/local/bin/nano rc.conf
Change httpd_flags from NO to "-u -DSSL". Add the quotes too. Be careful about the comment at the end of the line (# for normal use...) spilling over to the next line. That is bad. If it does, either get it all on one line again or delete the comment. Hit CTRL+X to save the file.

/var/www
. The -DSSL tells Apache to start up with SSL. A later section will discuss SSL. If you know you just want to run regular HTTP services through port 80 and don't want SSL through 443, you can leave off the -DSSL and skip the Apache SSL configuration.

Finishing MySQL Install

Check /etc/rc.conf to make sure that the following line is at the bottom:
local_rcconf="/etc/rc.conf.local"
   # cat /etc/rc.conf
The line should be there, but if for some reason it isn't, add it with nano.
/etc/rc.conf.local
should not exist. If it does or if it doesn't, do exit nano and do the following:

   # echo "mysql=YES" >> /etc/rc.conf.local
Using
echo
is just shorthand so you don't have to use an editor to edit a file. If the file doesn't exist, it will be created. If it does exist,
mysql=YES
will be appended to it. You can use
cat
to verify the contents of
/etc/rc.conf.local
.
cat
is a tool that can be used to output a file right to the screen.
   # cat /etc/rc.conf.local
MySQL isn't done installing. Go back to ports.
   # cd /usr/ports/databases/p5-DBD-Msql-Mysql
   # make install clean
   # cd /usr/ports/packages/i386/databases
   # pkg_add mysql-server*
Next you need to move the configuration file for MySQL to
/etc
. In
/usr/local/share/mysql
look at the files
my-small.cnf
,
my-medium.cnf
,
my-large.cnf
, and
my-huge.cnf
.
my-medium.cnf
is good for most server configurations.
   # cd /usr/local/share/mysql
   # cp my-medium.cnf /etc/my.cnf
   # /usr/local/bin/nano /etc/my.cnf
We're almost done with MySQL. Edit /etc/rc.conf and change
shlib_dirs= # extra directories for 
ldconfig
at the bottom of the file to read like this:

   # shlib_dirs="/usr/local/lib/mysql"
Or if you know you have multiple directories:
   # shlib_dirs="/usr/local/lib/{mysql,libmcrypt}"
Make sure the (# extra directories...) comment doesn't spill over to the next line. The following will add execute permissions to the file that starts mysql.
   # mkdir /var/run/mysql
   # chown mysql /var/run/mysql
   # chmod 755 /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server
If
/var/run/mysql
exists already, that's good. If it doesn't exist it'll be created. Either way, it should be there. Add this to the bottom of
/etc/rc.local
:

   if [ X"${mysql}" == X"YES" -a -x /usr/local/bin/safe_mysqld ]; then
	echo -n " mysqld"; /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server start
	/bin/sleep 1
   fi
This will start MySQL when you boot your server. Now might be a good time to reboot if you're curious to see if everything will crash and burn. If you don't want to reboot, you can do this:
   # /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server start
   # /usr/local/bin/mysql -u root
The second line will try to connect to MySQL. You can either connect or you can't. A connection is good. The password is blank if you did not set it before. Type
exit
to get out of mysql. When you reboot, you should see
mysqld
in the local daemons list just before logon. Now might be a good time to change the default root password to your MySQL server:
   # /usr/local/bin/mysqladmin -u root -p password 'new-password'
If it's a single user machine and you properly deny outside connections to MySQL, you might be fine leaving the root password blank. Later in this tutorial, we will configure the server to not accept connections on on the MySQL socket from anywhere other than localhost.

If you think you know what you're doing, now might be a good time to stop mysqld and move /var/mysql to another drive if you've got a multiple drive system. For example, you might have created a /misc partition during installation on a second hard drive. Then you could move /var/mysql to it and edit the datadir var in /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server and /etc/my.cnf to point to the new db storage directory.

Snort

Snort is a free intrusion detection system.

    Configure Snort

    Now you need to configure MySQL to have a user and table to store Snort alerts:
       # mysqladmin -u root -p create snort
       # mysqladmin -u root -p create snort_archive
       # mysql -u root -p
    
    If you didn't set a password before, when it asks for a password, hit enter. At the mysql prompt, type
       mysql> grant all on snort.* to snort@localhost identified by 'snort';
       mysql> grant all on snort_archive.* to snort@localhost identified by 'snort';
       mysql> exit
    
    
    snort
    will be the password in the quotes.
    snort.*
    says all tables in the snort database.
    snort@localhost
    says the snort user can only connect from localhost. Now add a system user for snort.
       # groupadd snort
       # adduser -batch snort snort -shell /bin/nologin -home /home
    
    Since this is the first time for you to create a user on the system, it will ask you for default values for accounts. Just hit enter to all of them to accept the set defaults in brackets.
       # mkdir /var/log/snort
       # chown snort /var/log/snort
    
    We will start Snort a lot like we started MySQL:
       # echo "snort=YES" >> /etc/rc.conf.local
       # /usr/local/bin/nano /etc/rc.local
    
    Now you will need to decide which interfaces in your machine will do what. Pick the one that will be on the inside of the firewall. In the example machine, we have one administration NIC with an IP address assigned, and two more, one for the outside of the firewall and one for the inside. For the sake of this example, xl1 will be the interface on the inside of the firewall. Add this to the bottom of your
    rc.local
    .
    
       if [ X"${snort}" == X"YES" -a -x /usr/local/bin/snort ]; then
    	echo -n " snort"; /usr/local/bin/snort -D -d -c /etc/snort/snort.conf -u snort -g snort -i xl1
       fi
    
    The
    echo
    line will be longer than the screen, so get it to fit on one line when it spills over to the next. If you are using VI, you don't have to worry about things like that, because when you edit a file with VI and a line spills over, it does a wordwrap instead of a line break like nano. Also note the
    -i xl1
    which corresponds to the interface on the inside of the firewall. Then we can import the Snort database information into MySQL:
       # cd /usr/ports/net/snort
       # mysql -u snort -p snort < /usr/ports/net/snort/w-snort-*/snort-*/contrib/create_mysql
       # make clean
    
    
    If you had done a
    make install clean
    or
    make clean
    for snort already, you can do a
    make extract
    to get the sources you'll need to import the tables you need into mysql. There are a lot of rules files in
    /usr/local/share/examples/snort
    . We should put them in a different directory.
       # mkdir /etc/snort
       # cd /usr/local/share/examples/snort
       # cp -r * /etc/snort
    
    
    Then go to the
    /etc/snort
    and edit snort.conf. The file will explain what variables do what. Defaults will probably work if you're scared to change the file. The only thing you absolutely have to change is find the mysql log line, uncomment it, and change the login information for each of the variables on the line, otherwise you won't be able to view the snort logs from ACID.

    To log to MySQL for ACID, you will need to find the database section, uncomment the line for MySQL in
    snort.conf
    , and change the connection details. Just make sure you read the whole configuration file.

    Update Snort rules

       # mkdir /usr/local/src
       # cd /usr/local/src
       # lynx http://www.snort.org/dl/rules/snortrules-stable.tar.gz
       # tar -xzvf snortrules-stable.tar.gz
       # cp -r rules /etc/snort
       # cd /etc/snort/rules
       # mv * ..
       # cd ..
       # mv *.rules rules
    
    Now you must go back to
    /etc/snort
    and edit snort.conf to add the additional rules files that aren't in the distribution and point the rules location to
    /etc/snort/rules

    Create firewall network

    If you want a NAT configuration, you'll need a LAN IP for an interface on the inside of the network. Choose a network device not in use. We'll assume that xl0 right now is configured with an external world address. Edit hostname.xl1. Nano and vi will create it if it's not there already. Put this line in it:
       inet 10.0.0.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
    
    To create IP aliases for the same network interface, the file would look like:
       inet 10.0.0.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
       inet alias 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0 NONE
       inet alias 10.0.1.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
       inet alias 10.0.2.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
       inet alias 10.0.3.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
       inet alias 10.0.4.250 255.255.0.0 NONE
    
    If you don't want to reboot now, you can configure the network device with the
    ifconfig
    command.
    
       # ifconfig xl1 inet 10.0.0.250 netmask 255.255.0.0
       # ifconfig xl1 inet alias 10.0.0.1.250 netmask 255.255.0.0
    
    After you reboot, the hostname.xxx file will automaticly do ifconfig for you.

    The other choice is creating an invisible passthru firewall. Either way, if you want extra interfaces to go to the internal network interface and have them bridged together, you'll need to create invisible interface configurations for the other NICs.
       # ifconfig xl2 up
       # echo "up" > /etc/hostname.xl2
    
    Make sure you don't create a hostname file for the wrong interface. If you echo "up" to the interface hostname file you're using to get on the internet, you won't be able to get on the internet until you go back and replace up with the correct internet configuration. The interface you should have configured by default during the install was
    xl0


    While you're at it, now is a good time to add the second invisible interface for the firewall.
       # ifconfig xl3 up
       # echo "up" > /etc/hostname.xl3
    
    Now you can bridge them together. Your bridge configuration will list all the network interfaces for your internal network. For an invisible firewall, that should be two interfaces. For a NAT machine, the PCI slot number is the limit. Create /etc/bridgename.bridge0
       add xl1
       add xl2
       add xl3
       add xl4
       blocknonip xl1
       blocknonip xl2
       blocknonip xl3
       blocknonip xl4
       up
    
    Again, if you don't want to reboot right now, you can use the
    brconfig
    command to manually create the bridge:
       # brconfig bridge0 add xl1
       # brconfig bridge0 add xl2
       # brconfig bridge0 add xl3
       # brconfig bridge0 add xl4
       # brconfig bridge0 blocknonip xl1
       # brconfig bridge0 blocknonip xl2
       # brconfig bridge0 blocknonip xl3
       # brconfig bridge0 blocknonip xl4      
       # brconfig bridge0 up
    

    Start Snort

    You won't have to do this all the time because the editing you did to rc.local with a similar line should start Snort automagicly on boot. This will get snort running now just to make sure it runs.
       # /usr/local/bin/snort -D -d -c /etc/snort/snort.conf -u snort -g snort -i xl1
    
    
    You'll either get a "Snort running" message, or a "FATAL ERROR". The errors are quite informational and usually tell you, you have a file in the wrong place if you get one. Get
    /etc/snort/snort.conf
    to sync with where files are in the
    /etc/snort
    directory if you have an error. If it says it needs a file, but you don't know where to find it
       # find / -name "filename" -print
    
    should spit it out on the screen if it exists. It's a console Find File equivilent from Windows. You can add asterisks for wildcards if you feel the need.

    Install ADODB database abstraction

       # mkdir /usr/local/src
       # cd /usr/local/src
       # lynx http://php.weblogs.com/ADODB
       [ download file here and exit lynx ]
       # tar -xzf adodb*.tgz
    

    Install PHPlot graphing scripts

       # cd /usr/local/src
       # lynx http://www.phplot.com
       [ download file here and exit lynx ]
       # tar -xzf phplot-*.tar.gz
       # lynx http://www.aditus.nu/jpgraph/jpdownload.php
       [ download file here and exit lynx ]
       # tar -xzf jpgraph-*.tar.gz
    

    Install ACID

       # cd /usr/local/src
       # lynx http://www.andrew.cmu.edu/~rdanyliw/snort/snortacid.html
       [ download file here and exit lynx ]
       # tar -xzf acid*.tgz
       # mkdir /var/www/phplibs
       # mv adodb /var/www/phplibs
       # mv jpgraph-x.xx /var/www/phplibs/jpgraph
       # mv phplot-x.x.x /var/www/phplibs/phplot
       # mv acid /var/www/htdocs
       # cd /var/www/htdocs/acid
       # nano acid_conf.php
    
    Now edit acid_conf.php to point
    $DBlib_path
    to
    /var/www/phplibs/adodb
    , change the logon information for MySQL to use
    snort
    as the user and password with for the
    snort
    and
    snort_archive
    databases, and set
    $ChartLib_path
    to
    /var/www/phplibs/phplot
    .

    Now you'll probably want to put a password on the access to Apache. Edit /var/www/conf/httpd.conf, find the directory directive for /var/www/htdocs and change AllowOverride from None to All. This will allow us to use .htaccess files to change permissions of directories in the Apache web directory. An .htaccess file in a directory provides specific instructions for permissions to that specific directory. In this example, we will create an .htaccess file in the root directory, thereby blocking off all unauthorized access.

    
       # htpasswd -c /var/www/passwd administrator
    
    Then create the file /var/www/htdocs/.htaccess
       AuthUserFile /var/www/passwd
       AuthName "firewall"
       AuthType Basic
       
       
       require valid-user
       
    

Clear console on logout

Clearing the console isn't nessesary to get your firewall up and running, but it does add an extra layer of security to sensitive information you might enter in the console. When you log out, it will automaticly clear away for you. To do this you must add a line in
/etc/gettytab
. Change the current section:
   P|Pc|Pc console:\
        :np:sp#9600:
adding the line ":cl=\E[H\E[2J:" at the end, so that it ends up looking like this:
   P|Pc|Pc console:\
        :np:sp#9600:\
	:cl=\E[H\E[2J:
Changes will be immediate. Next time you log out, the console will clear. You can get the same result by typing
clear
at the prompt, but who wants to remember to do that every time.

Lockdown single user mode

One element of security often overlooked is physical security. The OpenBSD developers built a "feature" into OpenBSD called single user mode. Single user mode allows you, if you are at the keyboard, to boot into the system to do recovery or diagnostic work. Under normal circumstances, booting into single user mode gives you automatic root access, without asking for a password. Single user mode is also often used for password recovery when nobody can remember the root password. You can make single user mode ask for the root password.

Edit
/etc/ttys
to change the current line:
   console "/usr/libexec/getty Pc"     vt220   off secure
to insecure

   console "/usr/libexec/getty Pc"     vt220   off insecure

Deny remote root login

Root has the power to do anything to a system. Here we'll add a user that has very little power to change files on the system.
   # adduser
If you decided not to install Snort, the
adduser
command will ask for default user account values. Just hit enter to accept each of the default values in brackets. Then follow the prompts to create a user.

   Use option "-silent" if you don't want to see all warnings and questions.
   
   Reading /etc/shells
   Check /etc/master.passwd
   Check /etc/group
   
   Ok, let's go.
   Don't worry about mistakes. I will give you the chance later to correct any input.
   Enter username [a-z0-9_-]: administrator
   Enter full name []: administrator
   Enter shell csh ksh nologin sh [sh]: csh
   Uid [1002]: [ENTER]
   Login group administrator [administrator]: [ENTER]
   Login group is "administrator". Invite administrator into other groups: guest no [no]: wheel
   Enter password []: ********
   Enter password again []: ********
   
   Name:     administrator
   Password: ****
   Fullname: administrator
   Uid:      1002
   Gid:      1002
   Groups:   administrator wheel
   HOME:     /home/administrator
   Shell:    /bin/sh
   OK? (y/n) [y]: [ENTER]
   Added user "administrator
   Copy files from /etc/skel to /home/administrator
   Add another user? (y/n) [y]: n
   Goodbye!
   #
Don't make the administrator password the same as the root password. If someone compromised the system, was able to read /etc/passwd and noticed that the administrator password hash is the same as the root password, you're double login protection is wasted. If you're already familiar with a particular shell, you can pick something other than csh. Default is sh, but root's default is csh.

Edit
/etc/ssh/sshd_config
and change
   #PermitRootLogin yes
to

   PermitRootLogin no
Now that you can no longer log in as root remotely, when you log in as administrator over ssh, you'll have to use the
su
command to become a super user. It will ask you for a password. When it does, type in the root password and you will be root. This is only possible because when you created the administrator user, you added them to the wheel group, which is where super users go. Only users in the wheel group can become a super user from
su
. When you're done being a super user, type
exit
to become a regular user again. The
su
will make a log of when and where someone becomes a super user.

Configuring the firewall

Remember, this section was written for OpenBSD 3.3. These rules might work on other OpenBSD installations >=3.0, however that doesn't mean that they're right.

    Enable IP forwarding

    Edit
    /etc/sysctl.conf
    . Uncomment
    net.inet.ip.forwarding=1
    . While you're in there, you could uncomment
    vm.swapencrypt.enable=1
    .

    Create invisible interfaces

    For this example,
    xl0
    is our administration interface, which will have an IP assigned and firewall rules to allow only SSH and HTTPS connections. The invisible interfaces are
    xl1
    ,
    xl2
    , and
    xl3
    .

    There are some fine details of creating a bridge between network interfaces for a firewall.
    Rule 1: Always filter on one interface.
    Rule 2: Don't filter on the other interfaces.

    Remember, the computer doesn't know which interface leads to the internet and which goes to a crossover cable for a server. When you bridge interfaces, you are essentially creating one virtual interface.

    See the Create invisible interface section for the invisible device configuration.

    You also want to bridge those interfaces to make a connection between them. Create a file in
    /etc
    named
    bridgename.bridge0
    . Add the following to it and save.
       add xl1
       add xl2
       add xl3
       up
    
    You can lock things down even tighter. Type
    man brconfig
    at a prompt to get the manual for the bridge software. Some options might be to consider making the bridge
    
       add xl1
       add xl2
       add xl3
       blocknonip xl1
       blocknonip xl2
       blocknonip xl3
       rule pass in on xl3 dst 00:BB:A0:33:3A:D1
       rule pass out on xl3 src 00:BB:A0:33:3A:D1
       rule block in on xl3
       rule block out on xl3
       up
    
    What the rules have done is block all traffic that's not associated with the computer behind the firewall that has the MAC address of 00:BB:A0:33:3A:D1. If it either isn't headed to or from the machine with 00:BB:A0:33:3A:D1, it won't get passed. If you decide to use bridge rules with MAC addresses, you'll have to maintain a current ruleset of MACs, otherwise don't use bridge rules at all. Note:Experience has shown this author that MAC filtering in this style is not 100% good 100% of the time. If you decide you want MAC address filtering, make sure you test a lot. Merely adding the interfaces should be enough for most firewalling situations.

    Note that the packet filter reads traffic on the IP level. In other words, it won't filter traffic based on MACs, just source and destination IPs by port number and traffic type. The bridge is the only place to filter by MAC and the packet filter is the only place to filter by IP.

    Configure static network interface

    If you already configured the administration static IP you want during the OS install, you can skip this section.

    To switch from DHCP to static or to fix a mess-up if you echoed "up" into the wrong hostname file, you need to edit the hostname.if file for the interface you're using. In the example, the contents of
    /etc/hostname.xl0
    should be
       dhcp NONE NONE NONE
    
    for a DHCP environment. To change it to static, change it to match
       echo "inet 192.168.0.200 255.255.255.0 NONE" > /etc/hostname.xl0
    
    Note that the hostname.if file doesn't contain the gateway IP. That is stored in a different file.
       echo "192.168.0.1" > /etc/mygate
    
    To activate the gateway address, you'll have to restart. There are ways to activate it otherwise, but saying to restart is much simpler. You can do the research if you don't want to reboot.

    Setting up the packet filter (PF)

    First turn PF on. Edit
    /etc/rc.conf
    .
    
       PF=YES
    
    and then turn PF on without having to reboot.
       # pfctl -e
    
    You will not get enough information about packet filtering from this tutorial to be well versed. Minimally, you need to read these two documents and understand them or you're wasting your time with this firewall.


    You can type
       # man pfctl
    
    or
    
       # man pf.conf
    
    to get the manual for the packet filter right from your machine. To exit the man pages viewer, hit the "q" key or scroll all the way down to the end of the document. Page Down will get you there faster.

    Here is a ruleset you might use to start an invisible passthru firewall. It uses the slower bracketed blocks of IPs that expand into separate rules to check against incoming and outgoing traffic.
    #############################
    # /etc/pf.conf
    # David Norman, OpenBSD 3.2
    #############################
    
    #############################
    # Begin Ruleset
    #############################
    
    external="xl1"
    admin="xl0"
    
    # not routable
    # spaces before brackets required
    #
    spoofed="{ 10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.0.0/16, \
                224.0.0.0/4, 240.0.0.0/5, 127.0.0.1/8 }"
    
    
    # IP blocks ripped from http://www.sentry.net/~obsid/
    #
    reserved="{ 0.0.0.0/8, 1.0.0.0/8, 2.0.0.0/8, 5.0.0.0/8, \
                 23.0.0.0/8, 27.0.0.0/8, 31.0.0.0/8, \
                 36.0.0.0/8, 37.0.0.0/8, 39.0.0.0/8, 41.0.0.0/8, \
                 42.0.0.0/8, 58.0.0.0/8, 59.0.0.0/8, \
                 60.0.0.0/8, 69.0.0.0/8, 70.0.0.0/8, \
                 71.0.0.0/8, 72.0.0.0/8, 73.0.0.0/8, 74.0.0.0/8, \
                 75.0.0.0/8, 76.0.0.0/8, 77.0.0.0/8, 78.0.0.0/8, \
                 79.0.0.0/8, 80.0.0.0/8, 81.0.0.0/8, 82.0.0.0/8, \
                 83.0.0.0/8, 84.0.0.0/8, 85.0.0.0/8, 86.0.0.0/8, \
                 87.0.0.0/8, 88.0.0.0/8, 89.0.0.0/8, 90.0.0.0/8, \
                 91.0.0.0/8, 92.0.0.0/8, 93.0.0.0/8, 94.0.0.0/8, \
                 95.0.0.0/8, 96.0.0.0/8, 97.0.0.0/8, 98.0.0.0/8, \
                 99.0.0.0/8, 100.0.0.0/8, 101.0.0.0/8, 102.0.0.0/8, \
                 103.0.0.0/8, 104.0.0.0/8, 105.0.0.0/8, 106.0.0.0/8, \
                 107.0.0.0/8, 108.0.0.0/8, 109.0.0.0/8, 110.0.0.0/8, \
                 111.0.0.0/8, 112.0.0.0/8, 113.0.0.0/8, 114.0.0.0/8, \
                 115.0.0.0/8, 116.0.0.0/8, 117.0.0.0/8, 118.0.0.0/8, \
                 119.0.0.0/8, 120.0.0.0/8, 121.0.0.0/8, 122.0.0.0/8, \
                 123.0.0.0/8, 124.0.0.0/8, 125.0.0.0/8, 126.0.0.0/8, \
                 127.0.0.0/8, 197.0.0.0/8, 201.0.0.0/8, 219.0.0.0/8, \
                 220.0.0.0/8, 221.0.0.0/8, 222.0.0.0/8, 223.0.0.0/8, \
                 240.0.0.0/8, 241.0.0.0/8, 242.0.0.0/8, 243.0.0.0/8, \
                 244.0.0.0/8, 245.0.0.0/8, 246.0.0.0/8, 247.0.0.0/8, \
                 248.0.0.0/8, 249.0.0.0/8, 250.0.0.0/8, 251.0.0.0/8, \
                 252.0.0.0/8, 253.0.0.0/8, 254.0.0.0/8, 255.0.0.0/8 }"
    
    uttnet="{ 198.213.56.0/24, 198.213.57.0/24, 198.213.58.0/24, \
                 198.213.59.0/24, 206.76.228.0/24, 206.76.229.0/24, \
                 204.158.4.0/24 }"
    
    scrub in on $external all
    
    # Loopback device rules
    pass out quick on lo0 all keep state
    pass in quick on lo0 all keep state
    
    block in on { $external, $admin } all
    
    ## Comment this out if you're using LAN IPs
    block in from no-route to any
    
    ## good rule but also dangerously strict and needs IP in place of ($external)
    # block out quick on $external ! from ($external) to any
    
    block in quick on { $external, $admin } inet from $spoofed to any
    block in quick on { $external, $admin } inet from $reserved to any
    
    pass in quick on $admin inet proto tcp from $uttnet to { 198.213.57.12/32 } port { 22, 443 } keep state
    
    pass out quick proto tcp all flags S/SA keep state
    pass out quick proto udp all keep state
    pass in quick on $external inet proto tcp from any to { 198.213.57.6/32, 206.76.228.42/32 } port 80
    pass in quick on $external inet proto icmp all icmp-type 8 code 0 keep state
    pass out quick on $external inet proto icmp all icmp-type 8 code 0 keep state
    
    Here is a newer ruleset that uses tables for blocks of IPs. PF takes as long to look up an address in a table with 5 addresses as it does with a table full of 100,000 addresses.
    #############################
    # /etc/pf.conf
    # Academic Computing Services
    # OpenBSD 3.3 PF ruleset
    #############################
    
    # reload rules with `pfctl -f /etc/pf.conf`
    # rc.conf should take over after you change it there and reboot
    
    ExtIF="xl3"
    IntIF="xl1"
    ExtIP="198.213.57.7"
    
    # not routable
    # spaces before brackets required
    #
    table <spoofed> const { 10/8, 172.16/12, 192.168/16, \
                224/4, 240/5, 127.0.0.1/8 }
    
    # IP blocks ripped from http://www.sentry.net/~obsid/
    #
    table <reserved> const { 0/8, 1/8, 2/8, 5/8, \
                 23/8, 27/8, 31/8, \
                 36/8, 37/8, 39/8, 41/8, \
                 42/8, 58/8, 59/8, \
                 60/8, 69/8, 70/8, \
                 71/8, 72/8, 73/8, 74/8, \
                 75/8, 76/8, 77/8, 78/8, \
                 79/8, 80/8, 81/8, 82/8, \
                 83/8, 84/8, 85/8, 86/8, \
                 87/8, 88/8, 89/8, 90/8, \
                 91/8, 92/8, 93/8, 94/8, \
                 95/8, 96/8, 97/8, 98/8, \
                 99/8, 100/8, 101/8, 102/8, \
                 103/8, 104/8, 105/8, 106/8, \
                 107/8, 108/8, 109/8, 110/8, \
                 111/8, 112/8, 113/8, 114/8, \
                 115/8, 116/8, 117/8, 118/8, \
                 119/8, 120/8, 121/8, 122/8, \
                 123/8, 124/8, 125/8, 126/8, \
                 127/8, 197/8, 201/8, 219/8, \
                 220/8, 221/8, 222/8, 223/8, \
                 240/8, 241/8, 242/8, 243/8, \
                 244/8, 245/8, 246/8, 247/8, \
                 248/8, 249/8, 250/8, 251/8, \
                 252/8, 253/8, 254/8, 255/8 }
    
    #set loginterface xl1
    set optimization conservative
    
    scrub in on $ExtIF all
    
    nat on $ExtIF from 10/8 to any -> $ExtIP
    
    # Loopback device rules
    pass out quick on lo0 all
    pass in quick on lo0 all
    
    # Default block everything
    block in on $ExtIF inet all
    block in on $IntIF inet from any to $IntIF 
    antispoof for lo0
    # Editor note: antispoof here on OBSD 3.2 kills talking btwn bridged interfaces
    #antispoof for { $ExtIF, $IntIF } inet
    # so I came up with a looser rule:
    block in on ! xl3 inet from 10.0.0.250/32 to any
    
    # silently drop UDP broadcasts
    #
    block in quick on $ExtIF inet proto udp from any to 255.255.255.255/32
    
    # Block any IP spoofing attempts. (Packets "from" our network
    # shouldn't be coming from the outside).
    #
    block in quick on $ExtIF inet from  to any
    
    # Block all reserved private IP addresses.
    #
    block in quick on $ExtIF inet from <reserved> to any
    
    # Outgoing Windows networking won't work stable over NAT
    #
    # rules not working?
    block out quick on $ExtIF inet proto tcp from any to any port { 135, 137 >< 139, 445 }
    block out quick on $ExtIF inet proto udp from any to any port { 135, 137 >< 139, 445 }
    
    ## start letting some stuff through
    #
    #  remote administration
    pass in quick on $ExtIF inet proto tcp from { 206.76.228.0/24, 198.213.57.0/24, 198.213.58.0/24, 205.165.41.0/24 } to $ExtIP/32 port { ssh, https } flags S/SA modulate state
    
    # pings
    pass in quick on { $ExtIF, $IntIF } inet proto icmp all icmp-type 8 code 0 keep state
    # dhcp and ntp
    pass in quick on $ExtIF inet proto udp from 10/8 to any port { 68, 123 } keep state
    
    # Let traffic in and out
    pass out quick on $ExtIF inet proto tcp all flags S/SA keep state
    pass out quick on $ExtIF inet proto udp all keep state
    
    ## Let pings out and back
    #
    pass in quick on { $ExtIF, $IntIF } inet proto icmp all icmp-type 8 code 0 keep state
    pass out quick on { $ExtIF, $IntIF } inet proto icmp all icmp-type 8 code 0 keep state
    
    

Transparent Squid

   # cd /usr/ports/www/squid
   # env FLAVOR="transparent" make install clean
   # /usr/local/sbin/squid -z
Before running
squid -z
, you might want to edit the default configuration in
/etc/squid
. The cache directories will be created with
squid -z
so if you want your cache in a different directory than
/var/squid/cache
or if you want to put your cache on a RAID striped device for extra speed, you'll want to edit some of the default options in
/etc/squid
.

Setting up BIND (or other DNS) is a good idea for local DNS resolution.

NTP (Network Time Protocol) daemon

Installing NTPd allows your machine to check with atomic clock servers for the correct time.
   # cd /usr/ports/net/ntp/stable
   # make install clean
   # echo "0" > /etc/ntp.drift
Then create
/etc/ntp.conf
with the following contents.
   server 139.78.100.163 prefer minpoll 9 maxpoll 13
   server 128.194.254.9
   server 129.7.1.66
   server 131.107.1.10
   
   driftfile /etc/ntp.drift
Optionally, you can add
restrict 10.0.0.0 mask 255.255.0.0 nomodify nopeer
to the bottom of the
ntp.conf
file. If you want to let NTP through the firewall, it is port 123/udp.

Symon

Symon is a system monitor that lets you view the status of the CPU, memory, PF, NICs, and misc services running on the system. It uses PHP and a combination of a server (symux) and monitor that reports to the server (symon). It stores the data in a special type of database for continuous data collection called rrdtool.
   # cd /usr/ports/sysutils/symon
Versions of Symon 2.60 and before have an installation bug that doesn't install all the PHP scripts that are needed for viewing services from Apache, so this will bypass some of the post-installation instructions to do some manual configuration. Symon 2.61 should have a fix to the installation bug.

Edit
/usr/ports/sysutils/symon/Makefile
. Since you have already custom installed PHP, you don't want the Symon install to do the generic one again. Change
   WEB_RUNDEPENDS=     rrd:rrdtool-*:net/rrdtool php:php4->=4.2.3:www/php4/core

to
   WEB_RUNDEPENDS=     rrd:rrdtool-*:net/rrdtool
And then also change
   RUN_DEPENDS=     rrd:rrdtool-*:net/rrdtool  php:php4->=4.2.3:www/php4/core
to
   RUN_DEPENDS=     rrd:rrdtool-*:net/rrdtool

Then you can do
   # make install
   # cd w-symon-2.60/symon/symon2web
   # rm Makefile
   # mkdir /var/www/htdocs/symon
   # chmod 444 /var/www/htdocs/symon/*
   # cd /usr/ports/sysutils/symon
   # make clean
   # cd /usr/ports/packages/i386/sysutils
   # pkg_add symon-2.60.tgz
   # cd /usr/local/share/symon
   # ./c_smrrds.sh cpu0
   # ./c_smrrds.sh pf
   # ./c_smrrds.sh mem
   # ./c_smrrds.sh bridge0
   # ./c_smrrds.sh lo0
   # ./c_smrrds.sh xl0
   # ./c_smrrds.sh xl1
   # ./c_smrrds.sh xl2
   # ./c_smrrds.sh xl3
   # ./c_smrrds.sh xl4
  do this if you have an ata drive # ./c_smrrds.sh wd0
  do this if you have a scsi drive # ./c_smrrds.sh sd0
   # ./c_smrrds.sh debug
   # ./c_smrrds.sh proc_httpd
   # ./c_smrrds.sh proc_snort
   # ./c_smrrds.sh proc_sshd
   # ./c_smrrds.sh proc_mysqld
   # mkdir /var/symon
   # mkdir /var/symon/localhost
   # mv *.rrd /var/symon/localhost
   # cd /var/www/htdocs/symon
Most installations will give you an error at the end of the make. Everything actually compiled correctly. Edit
/var/www/htdocs/symon/datasources.inc
and change the $symon2web variable to
/var/symon
.

Then there are a few finishing touches to configure and start the monitor. Create
/etc/symon.conf
. The contents should be similar to the following:
   monitor { cpu(0),  mem, pf,  if(xl0), if(xl1),
	  if(lo0), if(xl2), io(wd0), debug,
          if(bridge0), proc(httpd), proc(sshd),
	  proc(snort), proc(mysqld)}  
		stream to 127.0.0.1 2100
Then create a configuration for the monitor server as
/etc/symux.conf
:
   mux 127.0.0.1 2100

   source 127.0.0.1 {
	accept { cpu(0), mem, pf, if(xl0), if(xl1),
	         if(lo0), io(wd0), if(xl2),  debug,
                 if(bridge0), proc(httpd), proc(sshd),
		 proc(snort), proc(mysqld)}

	datadir "/var/symon/localhost"
   }
Then set some permissions on them. While not required, setting the permissions to 444 makes the file only have read permissions, no write or execute.

   # chmod 444 /etc/symon.conf
   # chmod 444 /etc/symux.conf
To start them, symux (the server) goes first so when the monitor (symon) starts, it has a server to send data to.
   # /usr/local/libexec/symux
   # /usr/local/libexec/symon
Edit
/etc/rc.local
and add this at the bottom:
   if [ -x /usr/local/libexec/symux ]; then
	echo -n ' symux';	/usr/local/libexec/symux
   fi

   if [ -x /usr/local/libexec/symon ]; then
	echo -n ' symon';	/usr/local/libexec/symon
   fi

Additional Notes

  • pftop
  • df -h
  • fewer httpd children
  • winscp

Fix /etc/fstab syntax error in OpenBSD 3.1

I messed up my copy of /etc/fstab and when I booted into obsd 3.1, it threw me into single user mode. /usr was not mounted with editors and /etc was mounted as read-only. Here's how I fixed it.

mount -w /dev/wd0a /
mount /dev/wd0g /usr
export TERM=vt220

vi /etc/fstab
hit x for the characters to delete
hit i to start inserting text
hit esc to escape from insert mode

type :wq to save and exit
reboot

Intrusion detection with OpenBSD 3.2

Problem
I want an intrusion detection system for free.

Solution
This is assuming you're starting from a fresh install of OpenBSD and that it is configured to connect and communicate on the internet.

Install Ports

    Ports from CVS

    Ports are specially packaged software editions for OpenBSD. They are maintained especially for OpenBSD and available from most OpenBSD regional mirrors.

       #:/> cd /usr
       #:/> setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs
       #:/> cvs -d $CVSROOT -q get -rOPENBSD_3_2 -P ports

    If this is your first time to connect to anoncvs.usa.openbsd.org, it will ask if you want to save a key.
    Say yes. Then go get something to drink because it will take a while to download everything.

    Ports from CD

    Alternatively, if you can use ports.tar.gz from the OpenBSD CD (if you have it).

       #:/> mount /dev/cd0a /mnt
       #:/> cd /mnt/3.2
       #:/> cp ports.tar.gz /usr
       #:/> cd /usr
       #:/> tar -xzf ports.tar.gz

    The location of ports.tar.gz on the CD will depend on whether you made the CD yourself or you purchased one from openbsd.org as you should have.

    Ports from FTP

       #:/> cd /usr
       #:/> lynx ftp://ftp.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/3.2/ports.tar.gz
       #:/> tar -xzf ports.tar.gz

    lynx will ask you some questions. The sequence of answers is 'D' for download, '[enter]' to save to disk, '[enter]' again to accept the default filename, 'q' to quit, and 'y' to say you really want to quit.

Compile and Install Snort 1.8.6

By now, ports should be done downloading or un-taring. You'll need to compile and install it, which will involve both downloading and compiling, so figure out what you're going to do for a little while longer.

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/net/snort
   #:/> env FLAVOR="mysql flexresp" make install

The mysql flavor will also download and install mysql if it isn't already installed as well as support
for snort to record alerts to mysql. You do not want to run make clean on the snort port
because it will get rid of the database structure file you will need to import into MySQL later for Snort to record to MySQL for ACID.

Install PHP

If you want to use ACID to view alerts from Snort, you'll need to install php. Ports has PHP too. It will take longer to download, compile, and install than Snort. If you are experienced with using the FLAVORS environment variable, you can alter the PHP install to cut install time.

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/www/php4
   #:/> make
   #:/> cd core
   #:/> make install
   #:/> cd ../extensions
   #:/> make install
   #:/> cd ../pear
   #:/> make install
   #:/> cd ..
   #:/> make clean

You will probably get an error, but don't worry; we will work around it if you did.

   #:/> /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -s
   #:/> cp /usr/local/share/doc/php4/php.ini-recommended /var/www/conf/php.ini

You will probably need some PHP extensions too:

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/packages/i386/www
   #:/> pkg_add php4-mysql*
   #:/> /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -a mysql
   #:/> pkg_add php4-gd*
   #:/> /usr/local/sbin/phpxs -a gd

You can install and activate other extensions while you're in there if you want.

Install a text editor: Nano

If you are familiar with an editor installed by default in OpenBSD, such as vi, you can skip this step. This is merely to install an editor that will be easier to use for someone unfamiliar with vi.

vi is a commonly used editor in OpenBSD. If you want to learn how to use it quickly, there are pleny of hits on google if you search for "vi tutorial". Otherwise, nano is a simple editor found in ports that has a much lower learning curve for editing files since you will need to edit the Apache configuration file to get PHP to work and later Snort configuration files.

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/editors/nano
   #:/> make install clean

Now you can restart if you want so you can use nano without typing the full pathname to the binary. Otherwise the rest of this tutorial will use the full pathname to refer to the nano binary.

Configure PHP

There are a few remaining things to do to to get PHP to work in Apache.

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/editors/nano
   #:/> make install clean
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano /var/www/conf/httpd.conf

Use the CTRL+W function to find "index.html". Add index.php and index.php3 to the DirectoryIndex line to make it look like:

#
# DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written HTML
# directory index. Separate multiple entries with spaces.
#
DirectoryIndex index.php index.html index.php3

Then use the CTRL+W function to find "x-httpd-php3". You'll need to uncomment the two lines it finds and alter them. They should look like:

# For example, the PHP3 module (not part of the Apache distribution)
# will typically use:
#
AddType application/x-httpd-php .php .php3 .phtml
AddType application/x-httpd-php-source .phps

If you can't find those lines in your httpd.conf file, that means you have a newer version of Apache for some reason. Just add the lines as you see them above. If there are other file extensions you want to be parsed by the PHP engine, you can add them to the first AddType line too if you want. Some people add .html to obscure the engines running their website. This can be inefficient if you also have a many regular HTML files that do not contain PHP which will require PHP to examine the files anyway.

Save your httpd.conf with CTRL+X and follow the prompts.

Now it might be nice to test your PHP installation. I delete all the default Apache documents in the web root directory. You can skip that if you want.

   #:/> cd /var/www/htdocs
   #:/> rm -fr *
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano phpversion.php

You're creating a file named phpversion.php. In it, you want to put:

<?php
echo phpversion();
?>

Save it and test it:

   #:/> apachectl start
   #:/> lynx localhost/phpversion.php

If you see a page that has "4.2.3", all went well. If you see phpversion(); then you messed up somewhere. Go back and make sure you did everything. This won't prevent you from installing Snort, but it will definately keep ACID from working.

Start Apache on boot

   #:/> cd /etc
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano rc.conf

Change httpd_flags from NO to YES. Be careful about the comment at the end of the line spilling over to the next line. That is bad. If it does, either get it all on one line again or delete something.

Finishing MySQL Install

For php/mysql applications, php will fail to find the mysql socket in

/var/run/mysql. This is because starting in OpenBSD 3.2, Apache is installed in a chroot, which means it can only see files in /var/www. The workaround is to create /var/www/var/run/mysql (owned by mysql) and start the mysql server using a socket located in /var/www/var/run/mysql/mysql.sock instead of the default location at /var/run/mysql/mysql.sock.

   #:/> mkdir /var/www/var
   #:/> mkdir /var/www/var/run
   #:/> mkdir /var/www/var/run/mysql
   #:/> chown mysql /var/www/var/run/mysql

Check /etc/rc.conf to make sure that the following line is at the bottom:

local_rcconf="/etc/rc.conf.local"

   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano /etc/rc.conf

The line should be there, but if for some reason it isn't, add it.

/etc/rc.conf.local should not exist. If it does or if it doesn't, do exit nano and do the following:

   #:/> echo "mysql=YES" >> /etc/rc.conf.local

Using echo is just shorthand so you don't have to use an editor to edit a file. If the file doesn't exist, it will be created. If it does exist, mysql=YES will be appended to it. You can use cat to verify the contents of /etc/rc.conf.local. cat is a tool that can be used to output a file right to the screen.

   #:/> cat /etc/rc.conf.local

MySQL isn't done installing. Go back to ports.

   #:/> cd /usr/ports/databases/p5-DBD-Msql-Mysql
   #:/> make install
   #:/> cd /usr/ports/packages/i386/databases
   #:/> pkg_add mysql-server*

Now might be a good time to change the default root password to your MySQL server:

   #:/> /usr/local/bin/mysqladmin -u root -p password 'new-password'
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/mysqladmin -u root -h hostname -p password 'new-password'

That is an exact copy from what pkg_add should tell you. If it's a single user machine and you properly deny outside connections to MySQL, you might be fine leaving the root password blank. Later in this tutorial, we will remove the IP address from your network device(s), so it shouldn't be possible to make a connection from anywhere other than localhost.

Next you need to move the configuration file for MySQL to /etc. In /usr/local/share/mysql look at the files my-small.cnf, my-medium.cnf, my-large.cnf, and my-huge.cnf. my-medium.cnf is good for most server configurations.

   #:/> cd /usr/local/share/mysql
   #:/> cp my-medium.cnf /etc/my.cnf
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano /etc/my.cnf

In /etc/my.cnf, change the socket variable to equal what we said earlier. You will have to change it in two places:

socket = /var/www/var/run/mysql/mysql.sock

Save /etc/my.cnf. We're almost done with MySQL.

Edit /etc/rc.conf and change shlib_dirs=   # extra directories for ldconfig at the bottom of the file to read like this:

   #:/> shlib_dirs="/usr/local/lib/mysql"

Or if you have multiple directories:

   #:/> shlib_dirs="/usr/local/lib/{mysql,libmcrypt}"

The following like will add execute permissions to the file that starts mysql.

   #:/> mkdir /var/run/mysql
   #:/> chmod 755 /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server

If /var/run/mysql exists already, that's good. If it doesn't exist it'll be created. Either way, it should be there. Add this to the bottom of /etc/rc.local:

if [ X"${mysql}" == X"YES" -a -x /usr/local/bin/safe_mysqld ]; then
echo -n " mysqld"; /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server start
/bin/sleep 2
/bin/ln -s /var/www/var/run/mysql/mysql.sock /var/run/mysql/mysql.sock
fi

This will start MySQL when you boot your server. Now might be a good time to reboot if you're curious to see if everything will crash and burn. If you don't want to reboot, you can do this:

   #:/> /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server start
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/mysql -u root -p

The second line will try to connect to MySQL. You can either connect or you can't. A connection is good.
The password is blank if you did not set it before. Type exit to get out of mysql. When you
reboot, you should see mysqld in the local daemons list just before logon.

Configuring Snort

There are a lot of rules files in /usr/local/share/examples/snort. We should put them in a different directory.

   #:/> cd /usr/local/share/examples/snort
   #:/> mkdir /etc/snort
   #:/> cp * /etc/snort

Then go to the /etc/snort and edit snort.conf. To log to MySQL for ACID, you will need to find the database section, uncomment the line for MySQL, and change the connection details. I'm not going to step you through this just to make sure you read the whole configuration file.

If you want to add a MySQL user and database for Snort, do this:

   #:/> mysqladmin create snort
   #:/> mysql -u root -p

At the mysql prompt, type

   mysql> grant all on snort.* to snort@localhost identified by 'snort';
   mysql> exit

snort will be the password in the quotes. snort.* says all tables in the snort database. snort@localhost says the snort user can only connect from localhost.

Now add a system user for snort. Edit /etc/group

   #:/> groupadd snort
   #:/> adduser -batch snort snort -shell /bin/nologin -home /home
   #:/> mkdir /var/log/snort
   #:/> chown snort /var/log/snort

We will start Snort a lot like we started MySQL:

   #:/> echo "snort=YES" >> /etc/rc.conf.local
   #:/> /usr/local/bin/nano /etc/rc.local

Add this to the bottom of your rc.local:

if [ X"${snort}" == X"YES" -a -x /usr/local/bin/snort ]; then
echo -n " snort"; /usr/local/bin/snort -D -d -c /etc/snort/snort.conf -u snort -g snort
fi

Then we can import the Snort database information into MySQL:

   #:/> mysql -u snort -p snort < /usr/ports/net/snort/w-snort-1.8.6/snort-1.8.6/contrib/create_mysql

Install ADODB database abstraction

   #:/> mkdir /var/www/htdocs/acid
   #:/> cd /var/www/htdocs/acid
   #:/> lynx http://php.weblogs.com/ADODB
   [ download file here and exit lynx ]
   #:/> tar -xzf adodb*.tgz

Install PHPlot graphing scripts

   #:/> cd /var/www/htdocs/acid
   #:/> lynx http://www.phplot.com
   [ download file here and exit lynx ]
   #:/> tar -xzf phplot-*.tar.gz
   #:/> lynx http://www.aditus.nu/jpgraph/jpdownload.php
   [ download file here and exit lynx ]
   #:/> tar -xzf jpgraph-*.tar.gz

Install ACID

   #:/> mkdir /var/www/htdocs/acid
   #:/> cd /var/www/htdocs/acid
   #:/> lynx http://www.cert.org/kb/acid/
   [ download file here and exit lynx ]
   #:/> tar -xzf acid*.tgz
   #:/> cd acid

Configuring the packet filter

This section is completely optional. It is here for people who are running Snort on a machine that has an IP assigned to the network device. For improved security, you should not have an IP assigned to your intrusion detection system in case a remote vulnerability is found for OpenBSD.

It would not be good to have MySQL available to the world. You should use Packet Filter (PF) in OpenBSD to firewall port 3306 and drop all outside connections to MySQL.

Additional Notes

  • Starting in OpenBSD 3.2, Apache is in a strict chroot, which means it can't see the rest of the OpenBSD filesystem, just what's in the /var/www directory. When you're installing OpenBSD, you might consider giving more filesystem space to /var than you would normally have given in the past.
  • Move mysql database to /snort/mysql and chown, chgrp it to mysql and modify datadir in /usr/local/share/mysql/mysql.server to point to /snort/mysql. Then you have to copy /var/mysql to /snort/mysql

Mounting a floppy disk

I thought mounting a floppy drive in obsd would be the same as in linux, but it's not. Depending on the distro, in linux you could do:

    # mount /dev/fd0 /floppy

but not so in obsd.

I had a floppy I wanted to go from my win2k machine to my standalone obsd box, so it was msdos formatted. I went to /mnt and created a floppy dir

    # cd /mnt
    # mkdir floppy

Then you have to mount the floppy:

    # mount -t msdos /dev/fd0c /mnt/floppy

The -t msdos tells mount to use msdos instead of the default ffs filesystem. Then you put whatever you want in /mnt/floppy and it goes on the floppy. Works the same of course with deleting files.

I did more looking after that and found out how to format a floppy and mount it for the ffs filesystem.

First, as root, do a format. This will also verify that the floppy is OK. When you put in a bad disk like I did, it'll spit some garbage on the screen, but don't worry cause it'll keep going.

    # fdformat fd0

Next we need to partition the floppy. Use disklabel:

    # disklabel -E fd0

    Initial label editor (enter '?' for help at any prompt)
    > p

    device: /dev/rfd0c
    type: floppy
    disk: floppy disk
    label: fictitious
    bytes/sector: 512
    sectors/track: 18
    tracks/cylinder: 2
    sectors/cylinder: 36
    cylinders: 80

    total sectors: 2880
    free sectors: 2880
    rpm: 300

    16 partitions:
    #        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
      c:     2880        0    unused        0     0         # (Cyl.    0 - 79)
    > a a
    offset: [0]

    size: [2880]
    FS type: [4.2BSD]
    > w
    > q
    No label changes.
    #

Constructing the actual file system is next (if you skipped the disklabel part, use fd0c instead of fd0a). We'll use the command newfs for this:

    # newfs fd0a

...and mount your floppy:

    # mount -t ffs /dev/fd0a /mnt

As you can see, that's slightly different from the way we mounted the msdos disk. You can even leave off the -t ffs since that is the filesystem that mount will default to.

Nice

I was looking up stuff about cron and found nice. It is a way to run a program at a lower (or higher) priority than the rest of the things running on your box. I had noticed one of my old Mandrake installations ran a cron every night at 4 am and my desktop really took a performance hit, so this is something I needed. If you use the following command to build a program, it would run at a lower priority than other things on your machine:

nice +19 make

From man nice:

nice is built into csh(1)

with a slightly different syntax than described here. The form `nice +10' nices to positive nice, and
`nice -10' can be used by the superuser to give a process more of the processor.

So if I wanted to change my crons on my obsd box to run at low priority, I edit /var/cron/tabs/root:

# do daily/weekly/monthly maintainance
30 1 * * * root nice +19 /bin/csh /etc/daily 2>&1 | tee /var/log/daily.out | mail -s "`/bin/hostname` daily output" root
30 3 * * 6 root nice +19 /bin/csh /etc/weekly 2>&1 | tee /var/log/weekly.out | mail -s "`/bin/hostname` weekly output" root
30 5 1 * * root nice +19 /bin/csh /etc/monthly 2>&1 | tee /var/log/monthly.out | mail -s "`/bin/hostname` monthly output" root

I probably wouldn't really go as low as 19 because I run the distributed.net RC5 cracking client which is also low priority, so I would have to find a priority just above what it runs at for crons.




OpenBSD 3.4 email server

OpenBSD 3.4, Postfix, Procmail, Courier-Imap, Mutt, Pop/Imap before SMTP authentication

Introduction

    This document is written for configuring a OpenBSD 3.4-based mailserver, however it there is no reason it should not apply to versions as old as OpenBSD 3.0 or something newer.

    Install src

      untar src.tar.gz into /usr/src from the if you have an OpenBSD CD. If you're grabbing them from the ftp site then you want both src.tar.gz and srcsys.tar.gz.

    Upgrade to -stable

      Even OpenBSD can have security updates so be sure to update to the -stable branch of the release you're working with. To update OpenBSD 3.1 change the _3_4 to _3_1.

        # export CVSROOT=anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs
        # cd /usr
        # cvs -q up -rOPENBSD_3_4 -P src
      

      To update this tree later simply cd /usr/src; cvs -q up -rOPENBSD_3_4 -Pd

    Rebuild system from stable source

      Rebuild Kernel
        # cd /usr/src/sys/arch/i386/conf
        # /usr/sbin/config GENERIC
        # cd /usr/src/sys/arch/i386/compile/GENERIC
        # make clean && make depend && make
        # cd /usr/src/sys/arch/i386/compile/GENERIC
        # cp /bsd /bsd.old          (Save an old copy of your kernel)
        # cp bsd /bsd               (Copy the new kernel into place)
        # reboot
      
      
      Rebuild userland programs
        # cd /usr/src
        # rm -r /usr/obj/*
        # make obj && make build
      

    Reboot the machine, at this point it's safe to connect it to the internet

    Install ports tree, upgrade to stable

      # export CVSROOT=anoncvs@anoncvs1.usa.openbsd.org:/cvs
      # cd /usr
      # tar -xvzf /path/to/ports.tar.gz
      # cvs -q up -rOPENBSD_3_1 ports
    
    

Postfix Install

      # cd /usr/ports/mail/postfix
    

    Optionally, edit Makefile and uncomment out all the SUBDIR+= except for: SUBDIR+= stable,pcre,tls

      # make install
    

    edit /etc/rc.conf

      Comment out line:

        #sendmail_flags="-L sm-mta -C/etc/mail/localhost.cf -bd -q30m"
      

      and add:

        sendmail_flags="-bd -q30m"
      

    edit root crontab (# crontab -e )

      Comment out line:

        #*/30  *   *   *   *   /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q
      

    edit /etc/postfix/main.cf

      Set the following fields:

        mydomain = your domain here
      
        myorigin = $mydomain
        mydestination = $myhostname, localhost.$mydomain, $mydomain
        home_mailbox = .maildir/    # NOTE: the trailing /  is important
        # mailbox_command = /usr/local/bin/procmail
      

      Leave mailbox_command commented out for now. After procmail is configured it will be uncommented.

    Run postfix

      # postfix check
      # postfix start
    

    At this point send a test message to a local user, his mail directory should be created $HOME/usrname/.maildir along with sub directories /new /cur /tmp with the new mail being in /new

Mutt Install

    This makes it easier for us to test the mailsystem while setting up the server

        # cd /usr/ports/mail/mutt
    

    edit Makefile

      comment out:

        #     SUBDIR += snapshot
        # make install
        cd /etc/Mutt
      
      

    edit Muttrc

      Set the following settings:

        set mbox_type=Maildir
        set folder=~/.maildir
        set spoolfile=~/.maildir/
      

      This allows Mutt to read Maildir format mailboxes

Procmail Install

    A small change need to be made to the authentice.c source file to make procmail work with the Maildir type mailboxes by default.

        # cd /usr/ports/mail/procmail
        # make fetch extract
        # cd /usr/ports/mail/procmail/w-procmail-3.22/procmail-3.22/src
    

    edit authenticate.c

      change line:

        #define MAILSPOOLDIR   "/var/spool/mail/"
      

      to:

        #define MAILSPOOLDIR   ""
      

      change line:

        #define MAILSPOOLHOME "/.mail"
      

      to:

        #define MAILSPOOLHOME "/.maildir"
      

    Compile install procmail:

      # make install
    

    edit /etc/procmailrc

    add line at top of file:

      DEFAULT=$HOME/.maildir/
    

    edit /etc/postfix/main.cf

      Uncomment the line:

        mailbox_command = /usr/local/bin/procmail  
      

    reload postfix

      # postfix reload
    

    Again you want to send another test message at this point to make sure that procmail is now delivering the mail correctly to the users .maildir mailbox

Courier-Imap Install

      # cd /usr/ports/mail/courier-imap
      # make install
      # cd /etc; mkdir courier-imap
      # cd courier-imap; cp /usr/local/share/examples/courier-imap/* .
    

    Edit imapd.cnf

    Configure the file for your server

      # mkimapdcert
    
    

    This reads imapd.cnf and creates an imap ssl certificate in /etc/ssl/private/imapd.pem

    Edit authdaemond.conf

    Set:

      AUTHDAEMOND="authdaemond.plain"
    

    Edit imapd

    Set at the end of the file:

      MAILDIR=.maildir
      IMAPDSTART=YES
    

    Startup Courier-IMAP:

      # /usr/local/libexec/authlib/authdaemond start
      # /usr/local/libexec/imapd.rc start
      # /usr/local/libexec/imapd-ssl.rc start
    

    You might want to put the above into a shell script you can call from /etc/rc.local for startup

    At this point you should be able to test out imap access with your favorite mail client.

Pop-before-smtp

    If this machine is going to allow remote users to connect and use the mail system, we dont want to have an open relay, so we'll setup pop/imap before smtp authentication to only allow those valid users who have an account and check their email to be able to send it.

    Grab pop-before-stmp from its website: http://popbsmtp.sourceforge.net/ and untar into a temp directory like /usr/local/src/pop-before-smtp

    edit pop-before-smtp-conf.pl

      uncomment the line under: # Override the DB hash file we will create/update (".db" gets appended).
        $dbfile = '/etc/postfix/pop-before-smtp';
    
      uncomment:
        $logto = '/var/log/pop-before-smtp';
    	  
      change the line under: # Set the log file we will watch for pop3d/imapd records. to read:
        $file_tail{'name'} = '/var/log/maillog';
    	  
      uncomment the line under:  # For Courier-POP3 and Courier-IMAP:
        $pat = '^(... .. ..:..:..) \S+ (?:courier)?(?:pop3|imap)(?:login|d|d-ssl): ' .
        'LOGIN, user=\S+, ip=\[[:f]*(\d+\.\d+\.\d+\.\d+)\]$';
    	     
      comment out the lines to tell it to use NDBM database:
        #=pod #------------------------ Postfix NDBM_File ---------------------START-
        #=cut #------------------------ Postfix NDBM_File -----------------------END-
    
      # cp pop-before-smtp-conf.pl /etc
      # cp pop-before-smtp.init /etc
      # cp pop-before-smtp /usr/sbin
    

    Start pop-before-smtp

    
      /etc/pop-before-smtp.init start
    

    You should see a list of ip addresses etc in /var/log/pop-before-smtp from your imap tests. You should also have a database file in /etc/postfix/pop-before-smtp.db

    Setup Postfix for pop-before-smtp authentication

      edit /etc/postfix/main.cf

      Add the following line:

        smtpd_recipient_restrictions = permit_mynetworks,reject_non_fqdn_recipient,check_client_access 
        hash:/etc/postfix/pop-before-smtp,check_relay_domains
      

      Reload postfix settings:

        # postfix reload
      

    You should be able to verify that postfix will now refuse to accept mail from remote (non local network) connections without logging in via imap or pop3 first.

Spamassassin

    Another great tool for configuring email is spamassassin, which is a perl script that can be used to identify and control incoming spam.
    Spamassassin website can be found at: http://spamassassin.sourceforge.net/

    Spamassassin requires HTML-Parser perl module as a prereq so we'll start there.

      # cd /usr/ports/www/p5-HTML-Parser
      # make install
    

    Now onto the spamassasin install

      # mkdir /usr/local/src
      # cd /usr/local/src
      # tar -xvzf /path/to/downloaded/Mail-SpamAssassin-2.41.tar.gz
      # perl Makefile.PL
      # make
      # make install
    

    Lets test the install:

      # spamassassin -t < sample-nonspam.txt > nonspam.out
      # spamassassin -t < sample-spam.txt > spam.out
    
    

    This runs spamassasin in test, by reading the spam.out file and nospam.out file you can see what it does to each mail message.

    At this point spamassassin is ready to be setup in procmail, you can either set it up system wide or in my case on a user by user basis.

    Setup spamassassin for your mail account:

      # cd ~
    

    create directory to store spam in

      
        # maildirmake -f Spam .maildir
      

      This creates a maildir folder inside your ~/.maildir called .Spam

    edit .procmailrc

      Add the following lines:

        :0fw
        | spamassassin -P
      
        :0:
        * ^X-Spam-Status: Yes
        $HOME/.maildir/.Spam/
      

    Now simply kick back and watch most if not all of your incoming spam get tagged and redirected into your new imap folder Spam.

Root partition on OpenBSD raidframe device

This document should show the long process for setting up a kernel-based software RAID system on OpenBSD 3.2 with the root partition / on a raid0a device, swap and /tmp on raid1b and raid1d, and /var and /usr on raid2e and raid2f. This project utilizes raidctl.

From the man raidctl(8):

raidctl is the user-land control program for raid(4), the RAIDframe disk device. raidctl is primarily used to dynamically configure and unconfigure RAIDframe disk devices. For more information about the RAIDframe disk device, see raid(4).

This document assumes the reader has at least rudimentary knowledge of RAID and RAID concepts.

The sample system has sd0(18gb), sd1(18gb), and sd2. I made a complete install of OpenBSD 3.2 on sd2. References:

raidctl(8)
installboot(8)
http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=openbsd-misc&m=103635776223483&w=2
http://marc.theaimsgroup.com/?l=openbsd-misc&m=102839903925282&w=2
http://archives.neohapsis.com/archives/openbsd/2001-10/0142.html

http://www.blackant.net/other/docs/howto-full-system-mfs.php

-- modify the kernel:

# add
option		RAID_AUTOCONFIG
option		NMBCLUSTERS=8192
option		BUFCACHEPERCENT=15 # default is 5
option		DUMMY_NOPS	# speed hack; recommended
pseudo-device	raid		4	# RAIDframe disk driver

-- make partitions RAID

%disklabel -E sd0
# /dev/rsd0c:
type: SCSI
disk: SCSI disk
label: DK32DJ-18MC    
flags:
bytes/sector: 512
sectors/track: 447
tracks/cylinder: 3
sectors/cylinder: 1341
cylinders: 26866
total sectors: 36102720
rpm: 3600
interleave: 1
trackskew: 0
cylinderskew: 0
headswitch: 0		# microseconds
track-to-track seek: 0	# microseconds
drivedata: 0 

16 partitions:
#        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
  a:   307026       63    4.2BSD     1024  8192    16 	# (Cyl.    0*-
228)
  c: 36102720        0    unused        0     0       	# (Cyl.    0 -
26922*)
  d:   409005   307089      RAID                      	# (Cyl.  229 -
533)
  e:  5767641   716094      RAID                      	# (Cyl.  534 -
4834)
  f: 29614320  6483735      RAID                      	# (Cyl. 4835 -
26918*)

% disklabel -E sd1
# /dev/rsd1c:
type: SCSI
disk: SCSI disk
label: DK32DJ-18MC    
flags:
bytes/sector: 512
sectors/track: 447
tracks/cylinder: 3
sectors/cylinder: 1341
cylinders: 26866
total sectors: 36102720
rpm: 3600
interleave: 1
trackskew: 0
cylinderskew: 0
headswitch: 0		# microseconds
track-to-track seek: 0	# microseconds
drivedata: 0 

16 partitions:
#        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
  a:   307026       63    4.2BSD     1024  8192    16 	# (Cyl.    0*-
228)
  c: 36102720        0    unused        0     0       	# (Cyl.    0 -
26922*)
  d:   409005   307089      RAID                      	# (Cyl.  229 -
533)
  e:  5767641   716094      RAID                      	# (Cyl.  534 -
4834)
  f: 29614320  6483735      RAID                      	# (Cyl. 4835 -
26918*)

-- create /etc/raid0.conf:
START array
1 2 0
START disks
/dev/sd0d
/dev/sd1d
START layout
128 1 1 1
START queue
fifo 100

-- create /etc/raid1.conf:
START array
1 2 0
START disks
/dev/sd0e
/dev/sd1e
START layout
64 1 1 0
START queue
fifo 100

-- create /etc/raid2.conf:
START array
1 2 0
START disks
/dev/sd0f
/dev/sd1f
START layout
128 1 1 1
START queue
fifo 100

-- configure raid arrays
raidctl -C /etc/raid0.conf raid0
raid -I 135790 raid0
raid -i raid0
disklabel -E raid0
# /dev/rraid0c:
type: RAID
disk: raid
label: fictitious
flags:
bytes/sector: 512
sectors/track: 128
tracks/cylinder: 8
sectors/cylinder: 1024
cylinders: 399
total sectors: 408832
rpm: 3600
interleave: 1
trackskew: 0
cylinderskew: 0
headswitch: 0		# microseconds
track-to-track seek: 0	# microseconds
drivedata: 0 

16 partitions:
#        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
  a:   408832        0    4.2BSD     8192 65536    32 	# (Cyl.    0 -
399*)
  c:   408832        0    unused        0     0       	# (Cyl.    0 -
399*)


newfs /dev/rraid0a
mkdir /mnt/kernel0
mkdir /mnt/kernel1
mount /dev/raid0a /mnt
mkdir /mnt/etc
mkdir /mnt/dev
mkdir /mnt/bin
mkdir /mnt/sbin
cd /etc
tar cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt/etc
cd /bin
tar cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt/bin
cd /sbin
tar cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt/sbin
cd /dev
tar cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt/dev
mkdir /mnt/tmp
mkdir /mnt/usr
mkdir /mnt/var
cp -r .cshrc .profile bsd bsd.old boot stand altroot root /mnt

newfs /dev/rsd0a
newfs /dev/rsd1a
mount /dev/sd0a /mnt/kernel0
mount /dev/sd1a /mnt/kernel1
cp /bsd /bsd.old /boot /mnt/kernel0
cp /bsd /bsd.old /boot /mnt/kernel1

raidctl -C /etc/raid1.conf raid1
raid -I 246810 raid1
raid -i raid1
disklabel -E raid1
# /dev/rraid1c:
type: RAID
disk: raid
label: fictitious
flags:
bytes/sector: 512
sectors/track: 128
tracks/cylinder: 8
sectors/cylinder: 1024
cylinders: 11264
total sectors: 11535104
rpm: 3600
interleave: 1
trackskew: 0
cylinderskew: 0
headswitch: 0		# microseconds
track-to-track seek: 0	# microseconds
drivedata: 0 

16 partitions:
#        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
  b:  8388608        0      swap                      	# (Cyl.    0 -
8191)
  c: 11535104        0    unused        0     0       	# (Cyl.    0 -
11264*)
  d:  3146496  8388608    4.2BSD     8192 65536    32 	# (Cyl. 8192 -
11264*)


newfs /dev/rraid1d

raidctl -C /etc/raid2.conf raid2
raid -I 123456 raid2
raid -i raid2
disklabel -E raid2
# /dev/rraid2c:
type: RAID
disk: raid
label: fictitious
flags:
bytes/sector: 512
sectors/track: 128
tracks/cylinder: 8
sectors/cylinder: 1024
cylinders: 28920
total sectors: 29614208
rpm: 3600
interleave: 1
trackskew: 0
cylinderskew: 0
headswitch: 0		# microseconds
track-to-track seek: 0	# microseconds
drivedata: 0 

16 partitions:
#        size   offset    fstype   [fsize bsize   cpg]
  c: 29614208        0    unused        0     0       	# (Cyl.    0 -
28920*)
  e: 25165824        0    4.2BSD     8192 65536    32 	# (Cyl.    0 -
24575)
  f:  4448384 25165824    4.2BSD     8192 65536    32 	# (Cyl. 24576 -
28920*)


newfs /dev/rraid2e
newfs /dev/rraid2f
mkdir /mnt2
mount /dev/raid2e /mnt2
mkdir /mnt2
cd /var
tar -cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt2
mkdir /mnt3
mount /dev/raid2f /mnt3
mkdir /mnt3
cd /usr
tar -cXf - . | tar -xpf - -C /mnt3

cd /usr/mdec
./installboot -v /mnt/kernel0/boot ./biosboot sd0
./installboot -v /mnt/kernel1/boot ./biosboot sd1

raidctl -A root raid0
raidctl -A yes raid1
raidctl -A yes raid2

-- modify /mnt/etc/fstab
/dev/raid0a / ffs rw 1 1
/dev/raid1b none swap sw 0 0
/dev/sd2h /home ffs rw,nodev,nosuid,softdep 1 2
/dev/raid1d /tmp ffs rw,nodev,nosuid,softdep 1 2
/dev/raid2f /usr ffs rw,nodev,softdep 1 2
/dev/raid2e /var ffs rw,nodev,nosuid,softdep 1 2

After you reboot, be sure to delete the raid config files from /etc because you'll get "Device already configured!" errors otherwise. The errors don't hurt anything, but they definately aren't needed. The raidctl -A yes raid1 lines eliminate the necessity of having the raid configuration files in /etc.

Unpacking src.tar.gz to /usr

Problem
I copied src.tar.gz to /usr, and unpacked the src into all the /usr, the wrong place. src.tar.gz should be unpacked in /usr/src.

The Fix

Leave src.tar.gz in /usr and do this:

cd /usr && tar zft src.tar.gz|xargs rm && tar zft src.tar.gz|xargs rmdir